JP7096389B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

For a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the symbol is changed when a variation display start condition such as a game ball winning (passing) in a predetermined area provided on the gaming board is satisfied, and the player There is one represented by a stop mode of a symbol in which the result of determination of whether or not to shift the gaming state to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player is changed.

Patent Document 1 proposes this type of gaming machine, in which points are acquired in response to the pressing of a button, and the type of jackpot gaming state is notified according to the acquired points.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-106670

In the conventional gaming machine as described above, when high conditions are set to execute a specific effect, it is necessary to perform a considerable game in order to execute the specific effect, and the specific effect is required. If is not executed, there is a risk that the player who expects the specific effect to be executed may be less interested in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's interest in a game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A symbol changing means (for example, main CPU 101) that changes the symbol when the start condition is satisfied.
A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a lottery related to the progress of the game, and
A staging execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing the staging, and
An operation detecting means (for example, a touch sensor 425) capable of detecting a predetermined operation , and
A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the variation of the symbol satisfies the special result based on the lottery result of the lottery means.
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A first effect (for example, 1P effect or touch point MAX effect) that is an effect executed according to the lottery result of the lottery means and can satisfy the first effect execution condition (for example, the touch point is MAX).
The effect is executed when the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detection means while the first effect execution condition is satisfied by the execution result of the first effect. A second effect (for example, an item transition effect) that changes the effect mode (for example, a pre-touch item (a treasure box holding symbol with a touch icon)) that has been displayed before the first effect is executed.
Depending on the execution result of the first effect, a second effect execution condition different from the first effect execution condition (for example, a condition in which S626 is determined to be YES (that is, a condition in which the touch point exceeds 5)) is satisfied. A third effect (for example, in a state where the touch point exceeds 5), which is an effect different from the second effect, which is executed when the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detection means. Special production to be performed) and
It is possible to execute a fourth effect (for example, a stage change) that is different from any of the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect.
The symbol variation means has a first variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern is HN00) capable of executing the variation of the symbol in a first time (for example, 5000 msec) and a second variation longer than the first time. A second variation pattern (eg, variation patterns HN01 to HN04) capable of executing variation of the symbol over time (eg, 15,000 msec, 25,000 msec, 35,000 msec, 40,000 msec), and any variation pattern including at least one of the symbols. Fluctuations are feasible and
The first effect execution condition can be satisfied when the fourth effect is not executed by the effect execution means (for example, when S622 is NO determination), and the symbol is changed by the symbol change means. Can be established when the fluctuation of is executed in the second fluctuation pattern.
The second effect execution condition can be satisfied in a state where the first effect execution condition is satisfied (for example, a state in which S622 is determined to be NO) .
The second effect can be executed in any of the effect modes including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which the rate of transition to the special gaming state is relatively higher than that of the first effect mode. It is a directing
When the fourth effect is executed, the ratio of the second effect being executed in the second effect mode may differ between before and after the fourth effect is executed.
It is characterized by that.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs a predetermined operation each time the execution condition of the second effect is satisfied in order to execute the second effect, or the second effect is executed in order to execute the third effect. By allowing the player to select whether to perform a predetermined operation after the execution condition of the effect is satisfied and waiting for the first effect to be executed, the player can select the effect to be executed. Further, the first effect execution condition can be satisfied when the fourth effect is not executed, and can be satisfied when the fluctuation of the symbol is executed in the second variation pattern. The effect execution condition of is made to be able to be satisfied in the state where the first effect execution condition is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the production accompanied by the operation.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the overview in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the overview of the game board in the pachinko game machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the component of the distribution device in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the distribution drum which concerns on the distribution apparatus in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance which attached the 1st cam lock to the distribution drum which concerns on the distribution device in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the distribution device in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the distribution apparatus in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the schematic structure of the illumination array in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the illumination array in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball in the pachinko game machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball in the pachinko game machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the rear ball passage unit in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the state in which the lower movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention is located in the standby position. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lower movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lower movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the left rear. It is a rear view which shows the state which the lower movable staging member is positioned in the standby position in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the state in which the lower movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention is located at a drive position. It is a figure which shows the state which the lower movable staging member in the pachinko game machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention moved to a drive position with respect to a game board. It is a front view of the upper movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the upper movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the upper movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the left rear. It is a figure which shows the state which the movable slider in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention presses a rib of a gear. It is a figure which shows the state which the base rib in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention presses the rib of a gear. It is a front view of the state in which the upper movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention is located between the standby position and the drive position. It is a front view of the state in which the upper movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention is located at a drive position. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in the state which the movable arm is open in the state which the upper movable staging member is located in the drive position. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper movable staging member in the pachinko game machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention moved to the drive position with respect to a game board. It is a front view which shows the other aspect of the fixed crossguard member and the movable crossguard member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 25 is a front view showing a first modification of the second engaging portion of the movable arm shown in FIG. 25, showing a state in which the upper slide base moves from the first moving position to the second moving position. It is a front view which shows the 1st modification of the 2nd engaging part in the movable arm shown in FIG. 25, and is the figure which shows the state which the upper slide base moved to the 2nd moving position. It is a front view which shows the 2nd deformation example of the 2nd engaging part in the movable arm shown in FIG. 25, and shows the state which the upper slide base moves from the 1st moving position to the 2nd moving position. It is a front view which shows the 2nd deformation example of the 2nd engaging part in the movable arm shown in FIG. 25, and is the figure which shows the state which the upper slide base moved to the 2nd moving position. It is a front view which shows the state which the right side movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention moved to a standby position. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention as seen from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention as seen from the left rear. It is a front view which shows the state which the right side movable staging member is positioned at the drive position in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the state which the left side movable staging member is positioned in the standby position in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention as seen from the right front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left movable staging member in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention as seen from the left rear. It is a front view which shows the state which the left side movable staging member is positioned at the drive position in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state which the right side movable effect member and the left side movable effect member have moved to the drive position with respect to the game board in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the distribution drum in the 1st modification of the distribution apparatus of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the distribution drum in the 1st modification of the distribution apparatus of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the left rear. It is a perspective view from the left rear view of the distribution drum to which the first cam lock is attached in the first modification of the distribution device of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the distribution drum in the 1st modification of the distribution apparatus of 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a state in which the distribution drum shown in FIG. 47 is out of phase by 90 ° in the direction opposite to the rotation direction. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the distribution drum in the 2nd modification of the distribution apparatus of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the left rear. It is a side view of the distribution drum shown in FIG. 49. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit random number determination table in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit symbol random number determination table in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit type determination table in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production table in the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram of the look-ahead notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the other structure of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which is executed in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which is executed in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart following FIG. 82. It is a flowchart which shows the point giving effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart following FIG. 84. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead notice effect setting process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead continuous effect setting process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the out-mouth-in-the-ball production effect process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the latent probability notification effect setting process during a demonstration executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the touch sensor effect processing which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the touch sensor state control process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit middle effect control process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart following FIG. 92. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the 1st variation effect selection table which is referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the 2nd variation effect selection table which is referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the post-touch item selection table referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the pre-touch item selection table which is referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the look-ahead continuous effect table referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the latent probability change notification table referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the hold continuous notification effect selection table which is referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the specific example of the look-ahead notice effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the 1st specific example of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the 2nd specific example of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the modification of the look-ahead continuous effect table referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the 1st specific example of the modification of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the 2nd specific example of the modification of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram following FIG. 106. It is 1st conceptual diagram for demonstrating the cancellation of look-ahead performed in the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd conceptual diagram for demonstrating the cancellation of the look-ahead performed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the image of the acquisition number display effect displayed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the image of the effect of the other hole winning which is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the image of the acquisition number display effect which is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the image of the effect of the other hole winning effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the image of the overflow effect displayed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the touch sensor effect processing which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the touch hold concealment image selection table which is referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the latent probability notification effect selection table which is referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the point giving effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart following FIG. 117. It is a flowchart which shows the touch sensor effect processing which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the post-touch item selection table referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the touch hold concealment image selection table which is referred to in the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC effect processing which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the touch sensor effect processing which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the 5th Embodiment of this invention.

(First Embodiment) [Structure of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
An overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 2 is a front view showing an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 40 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a glass door 10, a launching device 20, a base door 30, a game board 40, a wooden frame 60, a liquid crystal display device 50 for displaying an image, a payout unit 70, and a substrate. It is composed of a unit 80, a spacer 90 and the like.

The glass door 10 is pivotally attached to the base door 30 so as to be openable and closable. Further, an opening 11 is formed in the center of the glass door 10, and a protective glass 12 having transparency is arranged in the opening 11. The protective glass 12 is arranged so as to face the front surface of the game board 40 with the glass door 10 closed.

Further, the glass door 10 is provided with a dish unit 13, a speaker 14 (see FIG. 51), and an effect button 16 below the opening 11. The plate unit 13 is a unit body in which the upper plate 131 and the lower plate 132 located below the upper plate 131 are integrated. The upper plate 131 and the lower plate 132 are formed with payout outlets for lending the game balls and paying out the game balls (prize balls), and when the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged. In particular, the upper plate 131 stores a game ball for firing in the game area 41 (see FIG. 4) described later. Further, the speaker 14 (see FIG. 51) is arranged inside the lower plate 132. Further, the effect button 16 is arranged on the upper part of the upper plate 131.

The launcher 20 is arranged at the lower right of the base door 30. The launcher 20 includes a launch handle 21 that can be operated by the player, and a panel body 22 that fits into the lower right corner of the dish unit 13. The firing handle 21 is rotatable and is provided on the front side of the panel body 22. When the dish unit 13 and the launching device 20 are arranged on the base door 30, the panel body 22 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 13. Then, the pachinko game can be advanced by operating the firing handle 21 by the player.

A launch solenoid (not shown) for launching a game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 22. Further, a touch sensor (not shown) is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 21. Inside the firing handle 21, a firing volume is provided that changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 21 and changes the electric power supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown).

When the touch sensor (not shown) is touched by the player, it is detected that the launch handle 21 is grasped by the player. When the firing handle 21 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) changes according to the rotation angle, and the resistance value at this time. The corresponding power is supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 131 are sequentially launched into the game area 41 described later of the game board 40, and the game is advanced. When the launch stop button (not shown) is pressed, the launch of the game ball is stopped even when the launch handle 21 is held and rotated.

The base door 30 is pivotally attached to the wooden frame 60 so as to be openable and closable. In the base door 30, a game board 40 is arranged behind the protective glass 12 via a spacer 90. The spacer 90 is interposed between the base door 30 and the game board 40, and is a member for attaching the game board 40 to the base door 30. Further, as will be described later, game members such as various accessories can be attached to the spacer 90.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 40 is formed of a plate-shaped resin, and is made of various materials such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin. At least a part of the game board 40 has translucency or light guide property, and the rear part of the region having translucency or light guide property is visible from the front, and the translucent or light guide property is visible from the front. The rear part of the area that does not have the light is difficult to see from the front. In the game board 40, the plate-shaped portion (the portion where the game region 41 described later is formed) may be made of, for example, a material such as metal or wood that does not have translucency or light guide property. .. In this case, the opening formed in the central portion of the game board 40 becomes a region having translucency or light guide property.

Further, the game board 40 is provided with a game area 41 on which the launched game ball can roll and flow down, and an LED unit 43 arranged on the lower right side outside the game area 41 on the front side thereof.

The game board 40 is provided with an arc-shaped guide rail 411 that defines the game area 41, and a plurality of game nails 412 are driven into the game area 41. Further, in the game board 40, in the game area 41, the central base plate 413, the first starting port 414a, the second starting port 414b, the ordinary electric accessory 415, the ball passage detector 416, the large winning opening 418, and the general winning opening 419a, 419b, 419c, 419d, normal out port 420a, first special out port 420b, second special out port 420c, third special out port 420d, distribution device 421, shutter device 422, flow path plate 423, easy to win. Game members such as a mechanism 424, a touch sensor 425, and an illumination array 426 are arranged.

The guide rail 411 is composed of an outer rail 411a and an inner rail 411b arranged inside the outer rail 411a.

The central base plate 413 is a frame-shaped member made of a resin material, and is arranged in an opening formed in the central portion of the game board 40. The central base plate 413 includes a right rail portion 413a, a left rail portion 413b, a passage port 413c, a stage 413d, and a right guide portion 413e. The right rail portion 413a and the left rail portion 413b are formed on the upper part of the central base plate 413 and guide the game ball launched on the board surface of the game board 40. The game ball that has passed the uppermost portion of the game area 41 flows down to the right area of the game area 41 while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory by the guide of the right rail portion 413a. The game ball that does not exceed the uppermost portion of the game area 41 moves to the left area of the game area 41 by the guide of the left rail portion 413b. Here, the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the frame of the central base plate 413 behind the game board 40 when the game board 40 is viewed from the front.

Further, the passage port 413c is a portion formed on the left side of the central base plate 413 through which the game ball can pass. The stage 413d is formed in the lower part of the central base plate 413 and extends to the opening side of the game board 40. The game ball that has passed through the passage port 413c from the left side of the central base plate 413 rolls on the stage 413d of the game board 40 and flows down from the stage 413d to the board surface of the game board 40. The right guide portion 413e is formed on the right side of the central base plate 413, and is formed by a pair of guide plates that guide both side portions of the game ball and flow downward. The game ball that has passed through the right rail portion 413a flows down the right region in the game region 41 while being guided by the right guide portion 413e.

The game ball launched by the launching device 20 (see FIG. 1 and the like) is guided by the guide rail 411, moves to the upper part of the game area 41, and advances due to a collision with the game nail 412, the central base plate 413, and the like. While changing the direction, it flows down toward the lower part of the game area 41. For example, the player drives a game ball into the left side of the central base plate 413 and causes the game ball to flow down the left side of the central base plate 413 (so-called left-handed), and the launch handle 21 of the launcher 20 (FIG. 1, etc.). Rotate the game ball to the right side to the maximum, drive the game ball to the right side of the central base plate 413, and let the game ball flow down the right side of the central base plate 413 through the right rail portion 413a and the right guide portion 413e (see). You can proceed with the pachinko game by selecting so-called right-handed). The game ball launched into the game area 41 of the game board 40 does not move to the inside of the central base plate 413 from a place other than the passage port 413c.

The first starting port 414a is arranged below the central base plate 413 and below the center of the game area 41. Here, a recess is formed in the center of the stage 413d, and the first starting port 414a is arranged directly below the recess. That is, the game ball placed in the recess in the center of the stage 413d can easily enter the first starting port 414a. A winning area is provided in the first starting port 414a. The winning area is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 116a (see FIG. 51).

The second starting port 414b is arranged below the downstream end of the right rail portion 413a. A winning area is provided in the second starting port 414b. The winning area is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 116b (see FIG. 51). In the present embodiment, various game members are arranged on the game board 40 so that the first starting port 414a can be won only by left-handed hitting and the second starting opening 414b can be won only by right-handed hitting. Has been done.

The ordinary electric accessory 415 is provided directly above the second starting port 414b, and has a flat plate member 415a that can protrude and retract with respect to the plate surface of the game board 40, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111 that drives the flat plate member 415a. (See FIG. 51). The flat plate member 415a has a slope inclined to the right side, and when the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415 is in a protruding state, the game ball on the flat plate member 415a moves to the right and is a flat plate member. The game ball that has passed through the flat plate member 415a when the 415a is retracted is likely to enter the second starting port 414b.

The ball passage detector 416 includes a passage gate through which game balls can pass one by one, and a ball passage detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 51) disposed in the passage gate. The ball passage detector 416 is arranged directly above the ordinary electric accessory 415, and the passage gate of the ball passage detector 416 is arranged facing the downstream end of the right guide portion 413e. That is, the game ball launched into the right area in the game area 41 passes through the right guide portion 413e and flows down toward the passing gate, so that the game ball easily passes through the ball passing detector 416.

The ordinary electric accessory 415 and the ball passage detector 416 are configured as one unit. This facilitates the work of attaching, detaching, and maintaining the game board 40.

The large winning opening 418 is arranged below the second starting opening 414b and the general winning opening 419d in the area on the right side of the game area 41. A winning area is provided in the large winning opening 418, and the counting sensor 113 (see FIG. 51) is provided in this winning area.

The general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c are arranged in the area on the left side of the gaming area 41, and the general winning opening 419d is located in the area on the right side of the gaming area 41, below the second starting opening 414b, from the large winning opening 418. Is also arranged above. The game balls that have entered the general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c pass through a common path, and the general winning ball sensor 114a (see FIG. 51) is provided at a predetermined portion of this common path. Further, the general winning ball sensor 114b (see FIG. 51) is also provided in the general winning opening 419d.

The normal out port 420a is arranged below the first starting port 414a and the general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c in the area on the left side of the game area 41. The game balls that have not entered any of the first start opening 414a and the general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c are usually sent from the out opening 420a to the back side of the game board 40 and collected by the collection device. As described above, the normal out port 420a is an area that triggers the addition of a predetermined game value by the game value adding means (payout device 71) in the game medium that rolls in the second area (the left side area of the game area 41). This is an example of a second out port that passes through a game medium that does not pass through and is sent out to the outside of the game area.

The first special out port 420b and the second special out port 420c are arranged on both sides of the large winning opening 418, respectively. In particular, the first special out port 420b is arranged on the left side of the large winning opening 418, and the first out ball detection sensor 117a (see FIG. 51) is provided in the first special out port 420b. A second out ball detection sensor 117b (see FIG. 51) is provided in the second special out port 420c. The third special out opening 420d is arranged next to the general winning opening 419d.

The distribution device 421 is arranged below the second starting port 414b and above the general winning opening 419d, and moves the game balls that did not enter the second starting port 414b to the left (on the side of the first path 423b). Alternatively, it is a device that distributes game balls by guiding them in the right direction (second path 423c side). The details of the distribution device 421 will be described later. For example, when four game balls move to the distribution device 421 in succession, three balls are distributed to the right side and one ball is distributed to the left side.

The distribution device 421 may be included in one unit including the ordinary electric accessory 415 and the ball passage detector 416. For example, as shown in FIG. 79, in a unit body in which an ordinary electric accessory 415 and a ball passage detector 416 are fixed to a base plate 430, a distribution device 421 is detachably fixed to the base plate 430. May be good. As described above, the distribution device 421 is removable from the unit body having the first passage region forming member (ball passage detector 416) and the first displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 415), and this unit body. It is installed on the game board 40 in a state of being attached to the game board 40. This facilitates work such as positioning and temporary fixing of the ordinary electric accessory 415, the ball passage detector 416, and the distribution device 421 in mounting on the game board 40, and further improves the efficiency of the work. ..

The shutter device 422 is arranged below the distribution device 421, and has a shutter member 422a that can protrude and retract with respect to the plate surface of the game board 40 and a large winning opening solenoid 112 that drives the shutter member 422a. (See FIG. 51). In the shutter device 422, the shutter member 422a has a slope that inclines downward to the left side, and the shutter member 422a is pulled in by the large winning opening solenoid 112 (see FIG. 51), so that the ball can easily enter the large winning opening 418. As a result, the shutter member 422a protrudes, making it difficult to enter the large winning opening 418.

The flow path plate 423 is made of resin and has a plurality of ridges on the plate surface. These ridges define the path of the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the right guide portion 413e. The flow path plate 423 is arranged at the lower right side of the game area 41 of the game board 40, and includes a ball passage detector 416, an ordinary electric accessory 415, a distribution device 421, a shutter device 422, a general winning opening 419d, and a large winning opening. A hole through which a game ball can pass is formed in a portion facing the 418, the first special out port 420b, the second special out port 420c, and the third special out port 420d. The ball passage detector 416, the ordinary electric accessory 415, the distribution device 421, and the shutter device 422 are fixed to the back side of the game board 40, and one of the passage gate and the distribution device 421 through which the game ball passes in the ball passage detector 416. The portion, the protruding flat plate member 415a, and the protruding shutter member 422a project from the surface of the game board 40 through the holes formed in the flow path plate 423.

The flow path plate 423 is a third path formed by a plurality of ridges and receives a game ball that has passed through the receiving path 423a, the first path 423b and the second path 423c branching from the receiving path 423a, and the second path 423c. It is equipped with 423d.

The receiving path 423a is a path through which all the game balls flowing out from the downstream end of the right guide portion 413e pass, and within this path, the ball passing detector 416, the ordinary electric accessory 415, and the second starting port 414b Is placed. The game balls that did not enter the ball passage detector 416 and the game balls that were caused to flow down to the right by the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415 projecting to the first path 423b and the second path 423c. Move to the branch position of. The game ball that has flowed downward due to the flat plate member 415a being pulled in passes through the second starting port 414b, moves to the back side of the game board 40, and is collected by the collection device.

The distribution device 421 is arranged at a branch position between the first path 423b and the second path 423c, and the distribution device 421 places a game ball on the left first path 423b and the right second path 423c. It is sorted.

The first path 423b is a path that guides the game ball to the general winning opening 419d and the third special out opening 420d, and the game ball that has passed through the first path 423b is the general winning opening 419d and the third special out opening 420d. It is divided into the case of entering one of the balls and the case of not entering any of them. The game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 419d and the third special out opening 420d moves to the back side of the game board 40 and is collected by the collecting device. A game ball that does not enter any of the balls joins the second path 423c. The lower end of the second path 423c after merging is connected to the third path 423d.

The third path 423d has a gentle slope that descends to the left side, and a substantially rectangular large drop opening 423e having a size that allows a plurality of game balls to fall at the same time is formed on this slope. Further, on both sides of the large drop opening 423e, small drop openings 423f and 423g having a size capable of dropping one game ball at a time are formed. The small drop opening 423f is formed on the lower side of the slope, and the small drop opening 423g is formed on the upper side of the slope.

The game ball that has fallen into the large drop opening 423e is in the large winning opening 418, the game ball that has fallen in the small drop opening 423f is in the first special out port 420b, and the game ball that has fallen in the small drop opening 423g is in the second special out opening 420c. Will be guided to each.

A slit-shaped hole is formed in a portion of the flow path plate 423 facing the shutter device 422, and the slit-shaped hole is formed in the upper part of the opening of the large drop opening 423e. The shutter member 422a of the shutter device 422 is loosely fitted in this hole, and is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 112 (see FIG. 51) so as to protrude and pull in from the slit-shaped hole. When the shutter member 422a protrudes, the large drop port 423e is closed, and the slope of the third path 423d and the upper surface of the shutter member 422a are flush with each other. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the slope of the third path 423d passes through the upper surface of the shutter member 422a and moves to the first special out port 420b. When the shutter member 422a is retracted, the large drop opening 423e is opened, and the game ball can enter the large winning opening 418. The shutter member 422a constitutes the variable winning means of the present invention that can shift to an open state in which the large drop opening 423e and the large winning opening 418 are opened and a closed state in which the large falling opening 423e and the large winning opening 418 are closed. Since the large winning opening 418 has a winning area inside, the large winning opening 418 constitutes the winning area of the present invention.

When the shutter member 422a of the shutter device 422 protrudes, for example, when a large amount of game balls are placed on the shutter member 422a, when a game ball spilling from the upper part of the shutter member 422a occurs, the game ball is released. , It moves from the upper part of the slope of the third path 423d to the second special out port 420c via the small drop opening 423g.

In this way, the ball passage detector 416 functions as a first passage region forming member that forms a first passage region through which the game medium launched in the predetermined region in the game region can pass, and the second start port 414b is used. The game medium that has passed through the first passage region functions as a second passage region through which the game medium can pass, and the ordinary electric accessory 415 is unitized together with the first passage region forming member, and the game medium to the second passage region is It functions as a first displacement member that can be displaced to either the first position that facilitates passage or the second position that makes it difficult for the game medium to pass through the second passage area, and the general winning opening 419d is the first path. The large winning opening 418 functions as a fourth passage area through which the game media distributed to the second path can pass, and the shutter device 422 functions as a third passage area through which the game media distributed to the second path can pass. The game medium distributed to the second path can be rolled, and it is difficult for the game medium to pass through the third position, which facilitates the passage of the game medium through the fourth passage area, and the fourth passage area. The first special out port 420b corresponds to an example of a second displacement member that can be displaced to any of the fourth positions, and the first special out port 420b allows the game medium that does not pass through the fourth passage area to pass through and is sent out to the outside of the game area. Functions as an out port.

In FIG. 4, the winning easy mechanism 424 is composed of a plurality of ribs 424a formed side by side at equal intervals in the game area 41 above the large drop opening 423e and the shutter member 422a in the flow path plate 423. The rib 424a has a shape obtained by dividing an elongated cylinder into two, and extends in the vertical direction when the winning easy mechanism 424 is viewed from the front. Therefore, when the shutter member 422a closes the large drop opening 423e, the game ball passing through the slope of the shutter member 422a, that is, the game ball rolling toward the shutter member 422a flows down while in contact with the rib 424a. do. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball is reduced while passing through the slope by the shutter member 422a. In other words, the time spent on the shutter member 422a becomes longer. As described above, in the winning easy mechanism 424, when the second displacement member (shutter member 422a) is in the fourth position (the state where the large drop opening 423e is closed), the gaming medium that passes over the upper part of the second displacement member is Easy to win a prize that makes it easy to move to the 4th passage region (large winning opening 418) side when the second displacement member is displaced from the 4th position to the 3rd position (the state where the large falling opening 423e is open). Functions as a mechanism.

A plurality of ribs 424b formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals are provided in the large drop opening 423e inside the shutter member 422a. Like the rib 424a, the rib 424b has a shape obtained by dividing an elongated cylinder into two, and extends in the vertical direction when the rib 424b is viewed from the front.

The rib 424b is a game ball that is not detected by the count sensor 113 (see FIG. 51) among the game balls guided from the game area 41 outside the shutter member 422a to the large drop opening 423e inside the shutter member 422a, in other words. Then, the ball comes into contact with the game ball passing through the large drop opening 423e that has not won the large prize opening 418, and the rolling speed of the game ball is reduced.

The shutter member 422a is provided between the rib 424a and the rib 424b in the vertical direction, and when the shutter member 422a is in the closed state, the rib 424a can decelerate the game ball rolling outside the shutter member 422a. When the shutter member 422a is in the open or closed state (closed state immediately after opening), the rib 424b can decelerate the game ball rolling in the large drop opening 423e. The rib 424a of the present embodiment constitutes the first deceleration means of the present invention, and the rib 424b constitutes the second deceleration means of the present invention.

The touch sensor 425 is a non-contact type touch sensor, and is arranged at a predetermined portion in the region on the right side of the game area 41, for example, the upper part of the winning easy mechanism 424. The touch sensor 425 outputs a detection signal when the player holds his hand over the protective glass 12 (see FIG. 3) or touches the protective glass 12 toward the touch sensor 425.

The illumination array 426 is composed of a transparent light guide plate 426a (see FIG. 10) on which a latent image is formed and a light source 426b (see FIG. 10) arranged on the side of the light guide plate 426a, which will be described in detail later. To. The illumination array 426 is arranged in the vicinity of the touch sensor 425 in the area on the right side of the game area 41. Then, the latent image is visualized by causing the light source 426b (see FIG. 10) to emit light, and is illuminated on the light guide plate 426a (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, information indicating that the touch sensor 425 can be operated is displayed.

The LED unit 43 includes a special symbol display device 431, a round number display device 432, a first special symbol hold display device 433a, a second special symbol hold display device 433b, a normal symbol display device 434, and a normal symbol hold display device 435. It is set up.

The special symbol display device 431 is composed of a 7-segment LED, and the special symbol (also referred to as an identification symbol) indicated by the 7-segment LED is repeatedly turned on and off of the 7-segment LED after a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied. Variable display and stop display. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 431, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 414a or the second starting port 414b, and this game ball wins the first starting port winning ball sensor 116a (see FIG. 51) or the second. When detected by the start opening winning ball sensor 116b (see FIG. 51), the special symbol is variablely displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode.

The round number display device 432 is composed of a 7-segment LED and displays the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state described later.

In the present embodiment, 16 display lamps are arranged on the side of the round number display device 432. These display lamps constitute a first special symbol hold display device 433a, a second special symbol hold display device 433b, a normal symbol display device 434, and a normal symbol hold display device 435.

The first special symbol display device 433a is composed of four display lamps, and the number of executions of variable display in the special symbol display device 431 (so-called “number of hold”) triggered by winning a prize in the first start port 414a. , "Number of reserved special symbols") is displayed by turning on, off, or blinking.

The second special symbol holding display device 433b is composed of four display lamps, and the number of executions of the variable display in the special symbol display device 431 (so-called "holding number") triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 414b. , "Number of reserved special symbols") is displayed by turning on, off, or blinking. Specifically, the first special symbol hold display device 433a and the second special symbol hold display device 433b display one display when, for example, the number of executions of the variation display in the special symbol display device 431 is held once. The lamps are lit, and when the number of times the variation display is executed on the special symbol display device 431 is held for two times, the two display lamps are lit.

The ordinary symbol display device 434 is composed of two display lamps, and the ordinary symbols displayed by these display lamps are alternately turned on and off after the predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. It is displayed in a variable manner and stopped. Specifically, the normal symbol display device 434 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416 and the game ball is detected by the ball passage detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 51). After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode.

The normal symbol hold display device 435 is composed of four display lamps, and the number of executions of the variation display in the normal symbol display device 434 (so-called "hold") triggered by the passage of the game ball through the ball passage detector 416 (so-called "hold"). "Number", "Holding number for ordinary symbols") is displayed by turning on, off, or blinking. Specifically, in the normal symbol display device 435, for example, when the number of executions of the variation display in the normal symbol display device 434 is held for one time, one display lamp is turned on and the normal symbol display device 434 is turned on. When the number of executions of the variable display in is held for two times, the two display lamps are lit.

Returning to FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 50 is an example of display means, is arranged behind (rear side) of the game board 40, and as shown in FIG. 4, the display area 51 is the center of the game board 40. It is arranged higher. In the display area 51, various images such as a derived symbol which is an identification symbol for the effect, an effect image, and a decorative image for decoration are displayed. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 50 is described as an example of the display means, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The display means may be a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT display, a lamp, or the like.

The payout unit 70 includes a payout device 71 (see FIG. 51) described later, and a game ball is provided in the first start opening 414a, the second start opening 414b, the general winning openings 419a to 419d, and the large winning opening 418 shown in FIG. When a prize is won, a preset number of game balls according to the type of each winning opening is paid out to the upper plate 131 or the lower plate 132.

The board unit 80 houses a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 51), a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 51), and the like, which will be described later, and controls the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Configuration of distribution device 421]
5 is an exploded perspective view showing the components of the distribution device 421, FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the distribution drum 501 according to the distribution device 421, and FIG. 6A is a distribution drum. The appearance of the 501 viewed from the left side, and FIG. 6B shows the appearance of the distribution drum 501 viewed from the right side. 7 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the first cam lock 504 attached to the distribution drum 501, FIG. 8 is a front view of the distribution device 421, and FIG. 8A shows the first cam lock 504 and the second cam lock 504. FIG. 8 (b) shows a state in which the cam lock 505 is engaged, and a state in which the first cam lock 504 and the second cam lock 505 are disengaged. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the distribution drum 501.

The distribution device 421 includes a base 500, a distribution drum 501, a distribution shaft 502, a bush 503, a first cam lock 504, a second cam lock 505, a spring member 506, a design lens 507, and a seal 508. And a cover left 509 and a cover right 510.

The base 500 extends from the edges of the case portion 500a formed in a semi-cylindrical shape and the edges of both side surfaces of the case portion 500a formed in a semicircular flat plate shape to the outside of the case portion 500a in a direction perpendicular to the side surface. It is provided with extending portions 500b and 500c.

The case portion 500a is formed in a size that can accommodate the distribution drum 501. The extending portion 500b extends from the left side surface of the distribution drum 501, and the extending portion 500c extends from the right side surface of the distribution drum 501. The extending portions 500b and 500c are formed with holes through which screws for fixing to the game board 40 are passed. Further, the extending portion 500b is formed with a small case portion 500d formed in a semi-cylindrical shape smaller than the case portion 500a and a bearing portion 500e in which one end of the distribution shaft 502 is housed. The small case portion 500d communicates with the case portion 500a, and the bearing portion 500e communicates with the small case portion 500d. The extending portion 500c is formed with a bearing portion 500f in which the other end portion of the distribution shaft 502 is housed. The bearing portion 500f communicates with the case portion 500a. The case portion 500a, the small case portion 500d, the bearing portion 500e, and the bearing portion 500f are arranged on the same axis.

As shown in FIG. 6, the distribution drum 501 is formed in a cylindrical (drum-shaped) drum body 501a having a central hole 501e into which a distribution axis 502 (see FIG. 5) can be inserted, and a drum body 501a. The four groove portions 501b extending along the central axis of the drum body 501a, the projecting portion 501c projecting from one end of the drum body 501a, and the projecting portion 501d projecting from the other end of the drum body 501a are provided. I have.

The four groove portions 501b are formed in the drum main body 501a between the wall surfaces extending at 90 degrees with respect to the central axis, and the blade portions 501f are formed between the adjacent groove portions 501b. That is, the distribution drum 501 includes four blade portions 501f extending in the radial direction from the drum main body 501a, and the four blade portions 501f are viewed from the front toward the axial direction of the drum main body 501a. It extends in a cross shape. The maximum length of the blade portion 501f extending from the drum main body 501a is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The protrusion 501c is formed in a conical trapezoidal shape that is inclined toward the inside of the drum body 501a. Further, the protruding portion 501c is formed with a notch communicating with one of the four groove portions 501b.

The protrusion 501d is formed in a conical trapezoidal shape that is inclined toward the inside of the drum body 501a. The protrusion 501d is formed with a notch communicating with the other three groove portions 501b in the four groove portions 501b. A recess 501k is formed on the side surface of the protrusion 501d, and the design lens 507 (see FIG. 5) is mounted on the recess 501k.

That is, one of the four grooved portions 501b formed in the distribution drum 501 is closed on the right side by the protruding portion 501d and open on the left side, and the other three sets of grooved portions 501b are on the left side. Is closed by a protrusion 501c and the right side is open. In the following description, the right side is closed by a protrusion 501d, the left side is open groove 501b by the left receiving part 501g, the left side is closed by the protrusion 501c, and the right side is open three sets of groove 501b to the right. It is referred to as a receiving portion 501h. That is, the left receiving portion 501g and the right receiving portion 501h are formed between the adjacent blade portions 501f.

As shown in FIG. 5, the bush 503 is composed of a flange body in which a cylindrical body 503b is formed at the center of a disk body 503a. The inner diameter of the disk body 503a is set to be smaller than the inner diameter of the protrusions 501c and 501d (see FIG. 6) of the drum body 501a to the root portion. The outer diameter of the cylindrical body 503b is such that the cylindrical body 503b can be fitted into the central hole 501e (see FIG. 6), and the inner diameter is larger than that of the distribution shaft 502 to the extent that the distribution shaft 502 can be inserted. It is set slightly larger. Then, by fitting the cylindrical body 503b into the center hole 501e, the bush 503 is attached to the right side of the distribution drum 501.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the first cam lock 504 includes a disk body 504a having a fan-shaped missing portion 504b having a central angle of 90 °, and a cylindrical body 504c erected in the center of the disk body 504a. , A gear portion 504e formed on a surface opposite to the surface on which the cylindrical body 504c of the disk body 504a is erected is provided.

The diameter of the disk body 504a is set to be slightly smaller than the diameter of the left side surface of the distribution drum 501, and the cylindrical body 504c is a size that can be fitted into the center hole 501e (see FIG. 6), and is a cylindrical body. The inner diameter of the 504c is set slightly larger than the distribution shaft 502 so that the distribution shaft 502 can be inserted. The hole portion 504d formed inside the cylindrical body 504c penetrates the center of the disk body 504a, and the gear portion 504e surrounds the circumference of the hole portion 504d formed in the center of the disk body 504a. It is formed like this. The inner diameter and outer diameter of the cylindrical body 504c are the same as the inner diameter and outer diameter of the cylindrical body 503b of the bush 503.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first cam lock 504 has a cylindrical body 504c fitted into the center hole 501e from the left side of the distribution drum 501, a disk body 504a on the left side surface of the distribution drum 501, and a groove portion 501b and a missing portion. It is fixed by screwing in a state where the position is adjusted so as to match with 504b. As a result, the gear portion 504e is arranged in the center of the left side surface of the distribution drum 501.

The gear portion 504e is composed of corrugated unevenness in which an ascending slope and a descending slope are switched every 45 ° around a hole portion 504d from a line extending in a predetermined radial direction. Here, since the angle between the ascending slope and the descending slope is an obtuse angle, the unevenness in the gear portion 504e is gently formed.

Since the gear portion 504e switches between an ascending slope and a descending slope every 45 °, convex portions of the gear portion 504e are formed at four locations, and the distribution drum 501 rotates 90 ° in these four convex portions. Each time, it engages with the recessed portion of the gear portion 505d (see FIG. 5) of the second cam lock 505, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 5, the second cam lock 505 is a pair of a cylinder 505a, a hole 505c formed on the central axis of the cylinder 505a, and a pair extending radially from the circumferential surface on one end side of the cylinder 505a. The extending piece 505b and the gear portion 505d formed on the other end surface of the cylindrical body 505a are provided.

Each of the pair of extending pieces 505b is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate, and the base portion thereof extends along the axial direction of the cylindrical body 505a in the radial direction and in the opposite directions to the central axis of the cylindrical body 505a. There is. The gear portion 505d has the same shape as the gear portion 504e of the first cam lock 504, and the gear portion 504e and the gear portion 505d can be meshed with each other. The spring member 506 is a coil spring that is arranged on the left side of the second cam lock 505 and urges the second cam lock 505 to the first cam lock 504 side.

The design lens 507 is a decorative member mounted on the recess 501k (see FIG. 6B) of the protrusion 501d. The seal 508 is a flat plate-shaped member arranged inside the recess 501k of the protrusion 501d. The design lens 507 is attached to the recess 501k of the protrusion 501d after the seal 508 is inserted.

The cover left 509 is fixed to the extending portion 500b of the base 500, and the cover right 510 is fixed to the extending portion 500c of the base 500. The cover left 509 and the cover right 510 are members for holding the distribution shaft 502 so as not to come off the base 500. In FIG. 8, the description of the cover left 509 and the cover right 510 is omitted.

Further, in each member constituting the distribution device 421, the members other than the distribution shaft 502, the spring member 506 and the screw (not shown) are composed of transparent members.

Next, the assembly of the distribution device 421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8. First, the seal 508 is inserted into the recess 501k of the distribution drum 501 in advance, and the design lens 507 is further attached. Next, the bush 503 is passed through the distribution shaft 502, the distribution shaft 502 is further inserted into the center hole 501e of the distribution drum 501, and the cylindrical body 503b of the bush 503 is fitted into the center hole 501e. The bush 503 is mounted on the right side of the distribution drum 501.

Next, the cylinder 504c of the first cam lock 504 is inserted into the distribution shaft 502 extending from the right side of the distribution drum 501, the cylinder 504c is fitted into the center hole 501e, and the right side of the distribution drum 501 is further screwed. The first cam lock 504 is attached to the. In this state, the distribution shaft 502 is arranged on the central axis of the distribution drum 501. Next, the second cam lock 505 is inserted into the distribution shaft 502 extending from the first cam lock 504 so that the gear portion 504e and the gear portion 505d face each other, and further, the spring member 506 is inserted.

In this way, after inserting each member into the distribution shaft 502, the distribution drum 501 is housed in the case portion 500a of the base 500, and the second cam lock 505 and the spring member 506 are housed in the small case portion 500d. The left end of the distribution shaft 502 is housed in the bearing portion 500e, and the right end of the distribution shaft 502 is housed in the bearing portion 500f. In this state, since the spring member 506 is slightly compressed, the urging force from the spring member 506 acts on the second cam lock 505. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8A, the second cam lock 505 is urged toward the first cam lock 504 and is maintained in a state where the gear portion 504e and the gear portion 505d are in mesh with each other.

Then, the cover left 509 and the cover right 510 are fixed to the extending portions 500b and 500c of the base 500, respectively. At this time, an elongated gap is formed between the cover left 509 and the extending portion 500b, and the extending pieces 505b and 505b of the second cam lock 505 are arranged in this gap. Therefore, the rotation of the second cam lock 505 about the distribution axis 502 is restricted, and the slide movement of the second cam lock 505 along the distribution axis 502 is allowed. For example, by sliding the second cam lock 505 to the left, it is possible to release the meshing state between the gear portion 504e and the gear portion 505d as shown in FIG. 8B. When the operation of the second cam lock 505 is released from the state shown in FIG. 8B, the gear portion 504e and the gear portion 505d automatically return to the meshed state.

The distribution device 421 configured as described above is arranged on the back side of the game board 40, and the distribution drum 501 is inserted into the opening formed in a predetermined portion of the right side region of the game board 40, and the base 500 is inserted. Is fixed to the game board 40. At this time, the distribution axis 502 is arranged in the horizontal direction along the game board 40, and only one of the four blade portions 501f formed on the distribution drum 501 is the board surface of the game board 40. Protrudes vertically with respect to.

Next, the operation of the distribution device 421 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the protruding portion 501d is located on the upper right side, the left receiving portion 501g is in a mode in which the game ball can be received. At this time, since the seal 508 housed inside the protrusion 501d is visually recognized by the player in a state of being enlarged by the design lens 507, the player can easily see the seal 508. It becomes possible to determine whether or not the left receiving portion 501 g is in an acceptable mode.

When the left receiving portion 501 g flows down from the game ball from above while the game ball can be received, the left receiving portion 501 g receives the game ball and the distribution drum 501 rotates according to the weight of the game ball. At that time, the game ball moves to the left due to the slope of the protrusion 501d. Further, the rotation of the distribution drum 501 causes the first cam lock 504 to rotate. At this time, as the top of the gear portion 504e moves toward the top of the gear portion 505d, the gear portion 505d slides in a direction that opposes the urging of the spring member 506 (see FIG. 5). Then, when the rotation angle of the distribution drum 501 exceeds 45 °, the top of the gear portion 504e exceeds the top of the gear portion 505d. At this point, the second cam lock 505 is moved to the first cam lock 504 side by the urging of the spring member 506, and the gear portion 504e and the gear portion 505d mesh with each other. In conjunction with this operation, the distribution drum 501 is rotated, and as shown in FIG. 9B, the distribution drum 501 is temporarily held in a state of being rotated by 90 °. At this time, the game ball of the left receiving portion 501 g flows down to the left side of the distribution drum 501, passes through the first path 423b (see FIG. 4), and passes through the general winning opening 419d (see FIG. 4) and the third special out opening. It is guided to the 420d (see FIG. 4) side. Further, the protruding portion 501d is located on the lower right side, and the right receiving portion 501h can be received.

Further, when the game ball flows down from above, the right receiving portion 501h receives the game ball, and the distribution drum 501 rotates according to the weight of the game ball. At that time, the game ball moves to the right due to the slope of the protruding portion 501c. Further, by rotating the distribution drum 501, the first cam lock 504 and the second cam lock 505 operate as described above, and as shown in FIG. 9C, the distribution drum 501 is rotated by 90 °. It is held once. At this time, the game ball of the right receiving portion 501h flows down to the right side of the distribution drum 501, and the second path 423c and the third path 423d
It is guided to the large drop port 423e (see FIG. 4) through (see FIG. 4). Further, the protruding portion 501d moves to the back side of the game board 40, and the second right receiving portion 501h can be accepted.

Further, when the next game ball flows down to the distribution device 421 from above, the distribution drum 501 rotates so that the third right receiving portion 501h can receive the next game ball, and the next game ball is distributed from above. When it flows down to 421, the distribution drum 501 makes one rotation, and as shown in FIG. 9A, the left receiving portion 501 g is in a form that can be accepted.

In this way, the distribution device 421 replaces the game balls that did not win in the second starting port 414b in the order of the first path 423b, the second path 423c, the second path 423c, and the second path 423c. One of them is distributed to the first path 423b. Further, when the left receiving portion 501g is in a mode in which the game ball can be received, the seal 508 housed inside the protruding portion 501d can be visually recognized by the player in a state of being enlarged by the design lens 507. By visually recognizing the seal 508, the person can determine whether or not the left receiving portion 501 g is in an acceptable mode. As a result, if it is determined that the left receiving portion 501 g is an acceptable mode, there is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 419d by hitting one game ball to the right. If you win 419d, you can get a prize ball even if it is a little. Further, even if the general winning opening 419d is not won, the distribution drum 501 can be rotated so that the right receiving portion 501h can be accepted. As a result, the player can finish the game by the pachinko gaming machine 1 without any difficulty.

[Rough configuration of Illumina Array 426]
10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing a schematic configuration of the illumination array 426, FIG. 10A shows a state in which the light source does not emit light, and FIG. 10B shows a state in which the light source emits light. The illumination array 426 includes a light guide plate 426a and a light source 426b including an LED lamp. The light guide plate 426a is formed with a plurality of protrusions having a reflecting surface that reflects light rays along the plate surface toward the player, and the latent image 426c is formed by these plurality of protrusions. The light source 426b is arranged on the side of the light guide plate 426a and emits a light ray along the plate surface. When the light source 426b does not emit light, the player recognizes the light guide plate 426a as a transparent plate, and FIG. 10
The latent image 426c shown in (a) cannot be visually recognized. When the light source 426b is emitting light, a plurality of protrusions reflect the light toward the player, so that the latent image 426c is visualized and visible to the player as shown in FIG. 10 (b). become.

In the present embodiment, the illumination array 426 is arranged in the vicinity of the touch sensor 425, and information prompting the operation of the touch sensor 425 as a latent image 426c on the light guide plate 426a, for example, as shown in FIG. The character information "!!" is formed.

The light source 426b is controlled so as to emit light during an effective period of operation of the touch sensor 425, which will be described in detail later. That is, the fact that the latent image 426c is made into a visible image informs the player that the operation of the touch sensor 425 is effective.

In the illumination array 426 shown in FIG. 10, the light guide plate 426a and the touch sensor 425 do not overlap, but a part of the light guide plate 426a may overlap, and as shown in FIG. 11, the light guide plate 426a and the touch sensor 425 as a whole. May overlap. Further, the display of the illumination array 426 may be switched by arranging the two illumination arrays 426 having latent images 426c having different display modes side by side in the front-rear direction. For example, the character information "Touch !!" is displayed before operating the touch sensor 425, but the light source 426b that emits light after the touch sensor 425 is operated is switched, for example, "Complete !!". Another display mode may be used, such as displaying character information.

As the character information, kanji, katakana, hiragana, etc., or a combination thereof may be displayed. Further, not only the character information but also a character image, a person image, a building, a vehicle, or the like may be displayed, and the image is not limited to these images.

[Game in pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the gaming state of the present embodiment, the large drop opening 423e is closed due to the protrusion of the shutter member 422a of the shutter device 422, and the large winning opening 418 is in a normal gaming state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the shutter member. The large drop opening 423e is opened by pulling in the 422a, and the large winning opening 418 includes a special gaming state in which a game ball can be accepted and a predetermined game value can be given to the player. The special gaming state includes a small hit gaming state and a big hit gaming state in which more game value can be given than the small hit gaming state. Further, the normal gaming state includes a first gaming state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a second gaming state, which is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In the present embodiment, the second gaming state is a normal gaming state (so-called non-probability changing state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is normal, and the first gaming state is a special gaming state as compared with the second gaming state. It is a gaming state (so-called probabilistic state) in which the probability of transition is high.

The player generally starts the game from the normal game state, and drives the game ball into the game area 41 of the game board 40 by the launching device 20. When the driven game ball wins the first starting port 414a or the second starting port 414b, the special symbol of the special symbol display device 431 and the identification symbol (derived symbol) for the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 change. indicate. Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 414a or the second starting port 414b during the variable display of the special symbol, the first starting port 414a or the first starting port 414a or the first starting port 414a or the first starting port 414a or the first starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a or the second starting port 414a until the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. 2 Execution (start) of the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 414b is suspended. After that, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is started.

An upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variation display of the special symbol is suspended. In the present embodiment, the variation of the special symbol due to the entry into the first starting port 414a and the second starting port 414b. The number of pending displays is limited to 4 times each. Therefore, it is possible to hold up to 8 times.

Another condition (start of variable display of a predetermined special symbol) is that the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started every time the condition for starting the variable display of the predetermined special symbol is satisfied.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 431 has a specific stop display mode, the normal gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. Among these specific stop display modes, the stop display mode that shifts to the big hit gaming state is the big hit, and the stop display mode that shifts to the small hit gaming state is the small hit. Further, the stop display mode of the special symbol other than the big hit or the small hit is the lost symbol, and when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal gaming state is maintained without shifting to the special gaming state. As described above, a game in which the special symbol is variablely displayed, then stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is changed or maintained depending on the result is referred to as a "special symbol game".

Further, in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbol display device 431, the derived symbol consisting of numbers, which is an example of the identification symbol, is variablely displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50, except in a specific case. Further, the special symbol display device 431 stops and displays the special symbol, and the derived symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50.

Further, in the special symbol display device 431, when the stop-displayed special symbol has a specific stop display mode, an effect image for the player to grasp that it is a hit is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. To. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 431 in a specific display mode corresponding to a jackpot that can be acquired by many balls, for example, the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 The combination of the identification symbols for the effect displayed in is a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows), and further, an effect image showing a big hit. Is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50.

Then, when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the special symbol display device 431 and the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state, the shutter member 422a is driven to be pulled in from the board surface. As a result, the large drop opening 423e is in an open state in which it is easy to accept the game ball, and the game ball accepted by the large drop opening 423e passes through the large winning opening 418.

The large winning opening 418 has an area (not shown) having a count sensor 113 (see FIG. 51), and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the area, or a predetermined time (for example, for example). The shutter member 422a is driven so that the large drop opening 423e is in the open state until about 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when either the condition of winning a predetermined number of game balls to the large winning opening 418 or the lapse of a predetermined time is satisfied in the open state, the shutter member 422a is driven, and the large falling opening 423e is difficult to accept the game balls. It will be closed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state, the large drop opening 423e repeats the transition from the closed state to the open state 15 times by driving the shutter member 422a, but is not limited to this and accepts the game ball. The easy open state may be set to an arbitrary number of times such as once or twice. The count sensor 113 of the present embodiment constitutes the detection means of the present invention.

Further, when the specific stop display mode in the special symbol display device 431 is a big hit, the gaming state shifts to the big hit gaming state among the special gaming states. Then, in the big hit game state, a game in which the transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 418 is repeated 15 times is regarded as one round, and a round game in which this round is repeated is performed. Such a round game is counted as the number of rounds such as "1" round and "2" round. For example, the first round of a round game is also called the first round, and the second round is also called the second round. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is 10 rounds or 16 rounds, but the number of rounds is not limited to this, and the number of rounds can be any number.

Further, when the specific stop display mode in the special symbol display device 431 is a small hit, the gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state among the special gaming states. Then, in the small hit game state, the game in which the transition from the closed state to the open state of the large drop opening 423e is repeated 15 times is performed only once. That is, in the small hit game state, the round game is not performed unlike the big hit game state. Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, the first gaming state or the second gaming state may be controlled as the normal gaming state. Further, when the small hit game state ends, the game state is not more advantageous than the game state when the small hit game state is won. Therefore, there is no transition of the gaming state in the normal gaming state when the small hit gaming state is won. For example, when the gaming state when the small hit gaming state is won is the first gaming state, the game state is small. The gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state is the first gaming state, and when the gaming state when the small hit gaming state is won is the second gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the second game. It is a state. Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game state, the time may be changed to the time saving state in which the time for displaying the variation of the special symbol is shortened. Such a special gaming state is an example of a special gaming state in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value.

Further, when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 414a, the second starting opening 414b, the general winning opening 419a to 419d, and the large winning opening 418, a preset number of games are played according to the type of each winning opening. The ball is dispensed to the upper plate 131 or the lower plate 132 by the payout unit 70.

Further, when the game ball driven into the game area 41 by the player passes through the ball passage detector 416, the display lamp of the normal symbol display device 434 fluctuates and displays. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416 during the variation display of the normal symbol, the display mode by the normal symbol hold display device 435 is switched until the normal symbol being displayed in the variation is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the ball passage detector 416 is suspended. After that, when the normal symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. Then, in the case where the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 434 indicates a hit, the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415 provided at the second starting port 414b is retracted for a predetermined time. It becomes a state. As described above, a game in which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed, and the open / closed state of the normal electric accessory 415 (see FIG. 4) differs depending on the result is called a "normal symbol game".

[Number of prize balls and flow path of game balls]
As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is entered in any of the first starting port 414a, the second starting port 414b, the large winning opening 418, and the general winning opening 419a, 419b, 419c, 419d. When a ball is hit, the prize ball is paid out from the payout exit.

In the present embodiment, there are three prize balls for winning the first starting port 414a, one prize ball for winning the second starting port 414b, and one prize for winning the general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c. The number of balls is set to 10, the number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 419d is 3, and the number of winning balls for winning the large winning opening 418 is set to 15.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of a game ball in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the firing handle 21 (see FIG. 1) so as to enter the first starting port 414a, and the gaming ball is illustrated. As shown in middle a1, it fires (hits left) in the left area of the game area 41. However, in the big hit game state, it is necessary to shoot the game ball toward the big winning opening 418, and in the time saving state, it is necessary to shoot the game ball toward the ball passage detector 416. Therefore, in the big hit game state and the time saving state, the player rotates the firing handle 21 to the right and launches the game ball into the right area of the game area 41 as shown in a2 in the figure (right-handed). Will do).

When the player launches the game ball into the right area of the game area 41 in the big hit game state, most of them pass through the ball passage detector 416, but the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415 is the second start. Since the mouth 414b is often closed, the game ball moves toward the distribution device 421. Then, one in four game balls that have passed through the distribution device 421 may enter the general winning opening 419d. If the ball enters the general prize opening 419d, three prize balls can be obtained, so that 3/4 of the game balls that have passed through the distribution device 421 will be returned to the player.

Further, the game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 419d or the third special out opening 420d heads toward the shutter member 422a. Since the shutter member 422a is retracted during the round game, the game ball falls to the large drop opening 423e and heads for the large winning opening 418 as shown in FIG. In the interval time between the round game and the next round game, since the shutter member 422a is projected, the game ball passes over the shutter member 422a and easily enters the first special out port 420b. Here, when the game ball passes over the shutter member 422a, it collides with the rib 424a of the winning easy mechanism 424 and thus slowly moves on the shutter member 422a. Therefore, the number of game balls mounted on the shutter member 422a at the start of the next round game is larger than that in the case where the rib 424a of the winning easy mechanism 424 is not provided. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls entering the first special out opening 420b is reduced, and the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening 418 is increased.

Further, in the state where the shutter member 422a is open, the game ball slowly moves through the large drop opening 423e by colliding with the rib 424b (see FIG. 4) when passing through the large drop opening 423e.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the shutter member 422a is in the closed state, the rib 424a can decelerate the gaming ball that rolls outside the shutter member 422a, and the shutter member 422a When in the open or closed state, the rib 424b (see FIG. 4) can decelerate the gaming ball that rolls on the large drop opening 423e inside the shutter member 422a.

As a result, before the count sensor 113 detects a game ball (a predetermined number of game balls for which the condition for closing the shutter member 422a: for example, the tenth game ball) is detected (the game ball is placed in the large winning opening 418). (Before winning a prize), more game balls can be won by the large drop opening 423e. Therefore, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and more profits can be given to the player.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has only one large winning opening, large drop opening, and shutter member (hereinafter, these are referred to as "attackers"), but has a plurality of attackers and is predetermined. The rib 424b may be provided at the large drop port of the attacker, and the rib 424b may not be provided at the large drop port of the other attacker. In this case, the big prize of the predetermined attacker provided with the rib is larger than the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time of the other attacker not provided with the rib 424b (the residual ball monitoring time in the large winning mouth will be described later). It is preferable to lengthen the monitoring time for residual spheres in the mouth. According to this, since many game balls decelerated in the large drop opening of a predetermined attacker can be detected by the count sensor, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and more profits can be given to the player. Can be done.

Further, a V winning area may be provided inside the large drop opening 423e having the rib 424b so that the game ball wins in the V winning area on the upstream side of the rib 424b. In this case, the game ball for winning the V winning area can be quickly won in the V winning area without deceleration, while more game balls can be won in the large winning opening 418.

Here, the V winning area is a winning area in which, for example, in a big hit game state, when the winning of the game ball is successful, after the end of the big hit game state, the game state shifts to a game state advantageous for the player such as a probabilistic game state. On the other hand, if the winning of the game ball in the V winning area is not successful, the game shifts to the non-probable variable game state, the non-probable variable game state and the non-time-saving game state, or the non-probable variable game state and the short-time game state. do. The non-probable variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state, and the non-probable variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state may be referred to as a time-saving gaming state. In addition, when a prize is won in the V winning area at the time of a small hit, the game state may be changed to the big hit game state.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are game balls that enter the first special out port 420b and the third special out port 420d in the big hit game state, and four game balls. Since the number of prize balls when the ball is entered into the general winning opening 419d is three, the increase number of the player's balls is assumed to be the total number of games fired in the game area 41 in the jackpot game state. The number of game balls fired from the 2400 prize balls (16R x 15 prize balls x 10 prizes) due to the prizes in the large prize opening 418, that is, the number of increased number of balls when the balls win the large prize opening 418. (16R x 10) Less than the deducted 2240.

Further, when the player launches a game ball into the right area of the game area 41 (striking to the right) in a time-saving state, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, all the launched game balls are ball passage detectors. It is arranged to pass through 416. Further, since the hit probability of the normal symbol game is high, the flat plate member 415a of the normal electric accessory 415 operates frequently, and the number of balls entering the second starting port 414b increases. Therefore, the progress of the special symbol game becomes faster. Further, when the ball enters the second starting opening 414b, one prize ball can be obtained, so that the amount of the game ball entered into the second starting opening 414b is returned. Further, as in the jackpot game state, one in four of the game balls that have passed through the distribution device 421 enters the general winning opening 419d. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the balls held in the time-saving state. For example, a special symbol game in the time-saving state can be played while the game ball remains on the upper plate 131. It will be possible to proceed. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since all the game balls hit to the right pass through the ball passage detector 416, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 hits right when it is not necessary to hit right as in the normal gaming state, 1 It is possible to detect that the ball is hit right from the game ball. This makes it possible to promptly notify by voice or image that "Please return to left-handed".

Whether or not the distribution device 421 is in a state of distributing the game ball to the general winning opening 419d side in the time saving state can be easily determined by checking the position of the seal 508 (see FIG. 5) of the distribution device 421. Can be determined. For example, it is assumed that the player stops firing the game ball in order to end the game when the time saving state ends. At this time, if the position of the seal 508 is confirmed and it is determined that the distribution device 421 is in a state of distributing the game ball to the general winning opening 419d side, only one is right-handed to obtain three prizes. It will be possible to get the interest of whether or not you can get the ball. As a result, the game can be ended without leaving an advantageous state for the next player who intends to start the game with the same pachinko gaming machine 1.

In some cases, three prize balls are important. For example, if you have 2499 balls and you can redeem the prize you want for 2500, or if you have one ball and you have a so-called sticker, you want to secure a game ball as much as possible in preparation for a big hit. By confirming the position of the seal 508, it is possible to easily increase the number of balls held.

Further, in the small hit game state, as described above, the game ball that has passed through the distribution device 421 may return to the player, and the game ball slowly moves on the shutter member 422a. Therefore, even if the large drop opening 423e is opened instantaneously, there is a possibility that one or two balls will enter. Therefore, by hitting right in the small hit game state, there is a possibility that the number of balls held can be increased slightly. In this way, even if it is a small hit, it is possible to give the player an interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, all the right-handed gaming balls pass through the ball passage detector 416, and further, the distribution device 421. Therefore, all the gaming balls distributed to the general winning opening 419d are those that enter the general winning opening 419d, but are not limited to this. For example, a game nail 412 or the like may be arranged in the flow path of the game ball hit to the right so that a part of the game ball deviates from the ball passage detector 416 or the general winning opening 419d.

[Structure of rear ball passage unit]
As shown in FIG. 14, a rear ball passage unit 600 is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4). The rear ball passage unit 600 has a plurality of ball passages 601 and 602, respectively, which constitute a winning area.

The ball passage 601 extends in the vertical direction of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4), and the upper end of the ball passage 601 communicates with the second starting port 414b. As a result, the game ball that has won the prize in the second starting port 414b is discharged to the inside of the ball passage 601.

The ball passage 602 is inclined diagonally from the upper left to the lower right of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4), and the upper end of the ball passage 602 communicates with the general winning opening 419d. As a result, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 419d is discharged to the inside of the ball passage 602.

A ball passage 603 is provided downstream of the ball passage 601 and the ball passage 602, and a merging portion 604 that joins the ball passage 601 and the ball passage 602 is provided on the upstream side of the ball passage 603. The ball passage 603 is inclined diagonally downward to the left from the confluence portion 604, and the downstream end 603a of the ball passage 603 is located near the lower end of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4).

The width of the merging portion 604 is formed so that two game balls can pass side by side in the left-right direction, that is, a width that is at least twice the diameter of the game balls. The game balls discharged from the ball passages 601 and 602 merge at the merging portion 604 and are discharged to the ball passage 603, and the game balls discharged to the ball passage 603 flow down the inside of the ball passage 603 and flow down the downstream end 603a. It is discharged downward from.

A partition plate 605 is provided at the downstream end of the ball passages 601 and 602. The partition plate 605 is composed of a common wall portion forming the ball passages 601 and 602, and extends downward from the downstream end of the ball passages 601 and 602.

The extending direction of the partition plate 605 and the extending direction of the ball passage 601 are the same direction, and the extending direction of the ball passage 602 is inclined obliquely with respect to the extending direction of the partition plate 605. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the ball passage 602 to the merging portion 604 collides with the partition plate 605, and its traveling direction A is substantially the same as the traveling direction B of the game ball flowing down from the ball passage 601 to the merging portion 604. It is guided by the partition plate 605 in the direction and so that the traveling directions A and B are parallel to each other. The partition plate 605 of the present embodiment constitutes the partition portion of the present invention.

A general winning ball sensor 114b is provided in the middle of the ball passage 602, and a game ball flowing down inside the ball passage 602 is detected by the general winning ball sensor 114b (see FIG. 51). Here, the general winning ball sensor 114b is provided in the general winning opening 419d (see FIG. 4). Further, as described above, the general winning ball sensor 114a (see FIG. 51) is provided on a common passage (not shown) through which the game balls winning in the general winning openings 419a, 419b, and 419c flow down.

As described above, in the rear ball passage unit 600 of the present embodiment, the traveling direction A of the game ball flowing down from the ball passage 602 to the merging portion 604 is the traveling direction B of the game ball flowing down from the ball passage 601 to the merging portion 604. It has a partition plate 605 that guides the game ball in substantially the same direction of travel.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down from the ball passages 601 and 602 from coming into contact with each other at the merging portion 604. Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring, and the game can be continued smoothly.

In particular, the partition plate 605 is provided so that the traveling direction A of the game ball colliding with the partition plate 605 from the ball passage 602 and the traveling direction B of the game ball flowing down from the ball passage 601 to the merging portion 604 are parallel to each other. Since the game balls are guided to the merging portion 604, it is possible to more effectively prevent the game balls flowing down from the ball passages 601 and 602 from coming into contact with each other.

Further, since it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down from the plurality of ball passages 601 and 602 from coming into contact with each other in the merging portion 604, the game balls flowing down from the ball passage 602 to the merging portion 604 flow down from the ball passage 601 to the merging portion 604. It is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the ball and being pushed back into the ball passage 602.

This makes it possible to prevent one game ball from being detected more than once by the general winning ball sensor 114b (so-called chattering) inside the ball passage 602. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the payout of the gaming balls more than necessary and to prevent the reliability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from deteriorating.

Further, according to the rear ball passage unit 600 of the present embodiment, since the partition plate 605 is composed of a common wall portion forming the ball passages 601 and 602, the partition plate 605 is provided with respect to the ball passages 601 and 602. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the ball passages 601 and 602 by eliminating the need to add a dedicated member constituting the ball passage 601 and 602.

[Structure and operation of the lower movable staging member 610]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a lower movable effect member 610. The lower movable effect member 610 is provided below the display area 51 at the rear of the game board 40. Note that FIG. 4 shows a state in which the lower movable staging member 610 is located behind and below the stage 413d (a state in which it is located at a standby position described later). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, in the standby position, it is possible to control a part or all of the lower movable staging member 610 so as not to be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, FIG. 20 shows a state in which the lower movable staging member 610 is located behind and above the stage 413d (a state in which it is located at a drive position described later). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20, at the drive position, a part or all of the lower movable staging member 610 can be controlled so as to be visible to the player.

The lower movable staging member 610 of the present embodiment constitutes the accessory of the present invention. The figure with front, back, up, down, left, and right directions shows the direction with respect to the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 15, the lower movable staging member 610 includes a lower fixed base 611, and the lower fixed base 611 is fixed to the spacer 90 (see FIG. 3). The spacer 90 (see FIG. 3) of the present embodiment constitutes the support member of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 16, a motor 612 is provided on the front surface (surface) of the lower fixed base 611. A gear 613 (see FIG. 17) is provided on a motor shaft (not shown) of the motor 612. As shown in FIG. 17, the gear 613 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower fixed base 611.

As shown in FIG. 16, a gear 614 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower fixed base 611. As shown in FIG. 18, the gear 614 meshes with the gear 613. In FIG. 18, the lower fixed base 611 is shown by a virtual line.

As shown in FIG. 16, a fitting protrusion 614A is formed on the gear 614, and the fitting protrusion 614A projects forward from the gear 614. The lower fixed base 611 is formed with vertically elongated protrusions 611A and 611B extending in the vertical direction and projecting forward from the lower fixed base 611, and a slit 611c. The slit 611c is provided between the protrusion 611A and the protrusion 611B at a position adjacent to the protrusion 611A.

Slits 611a and 611b are formed in the protrusions 611A and 611B, and rack teeth 611G are formed on the side surfaces of the protrusions 611A. A lower movable base 615 and a movable arm 618 are provided on the front side of the lower fixed base 611. The lower fixed base 611 of the present embodiment constitutes the fixing member of the present invention, and the movable arm 618 constitutes the arm member of the present invention.

A slit 615A is formed in the lower portion of the lower movable base 615, and the slit 615A extends in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 17, relay gears 616A and 616B and a disk member 617 are rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower movable base 615.

As shown in FIG. 17, the relay gear 616A is rotatably supported by the fitting projection 615c of the lower movable base 615. Further, the relay gear 616A meshes with the relay gear 616B.

As shown in FIG. 18, a gear portion 617A that meshes with the relay gear 616B is formed on the front surface of the disk member 617. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, a protrusion 617B is formed on the rear surface of the disk member 617 so as to project rearward from the disk member 617.

As shown in FIG. 16, at one end of the movable arm 618, a fitting hole 618a into which the protrusion 611D formed on the lower fixed base 611 is fitted is formed. The movable arm 618 is rotatably supported by the protrusion 611D via a fitting hole 618a formed at one end. As a result, the movable arm 618 swings with the protrusion 611D as a fulcrum.

As shown in FIG. 17, a fitting protrusion 618A is provided at the other end of the movable arm 618, and the fitting protrusion 618A slides on the slit 615A of the lower movable base 615 via the sliding bush 619F. It is freely fitted.

As shown in FIG. 16, a slit 618B is formed in the intermediate portion of the movable arm 618 in the longitudinal direction, and the fitting projection 614A of the gear 614 is slidably fitted in the slit 618B.

As shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of fitting protrusions 615a to 615e projecting rearward from the lower movable base 615 are formed on the rear surface of the lower movable base 615, and the fitting protrusions 615a to 615e slide. It is slidably fitted to the slits 611a, 611b, and 611c of the lower fixed base 611 via the bushes 619A to 619E.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the motor 612 is driven, the gear 613 rotates the gear 614, and the fitting protrusion 614A is aligned with the slit 618B of the movable arm 618 with the rotation of the gear 614. The movable arm 618 swings in the vertical direction with the protrusion 611D as a fulcrum.

When the movable arm 618 swings in the vertical direction, the fitting projection 618A of the movable arm 618 moves along the slit 615A of the lower movable base 615, thereby pressing the lower movable base 615 in the vertical direction.

When the lower movable base 615 is pressed in the vertical direction, the fitting projections 615a to 615e of the lower movable base 615 move along the slits 611a to 611c via the sliding bushes 619A to 619E, thereby moving to the lower side. The movable base 615 moves up and down with respect to the lower fixed base 611.

As shown in FIG. 15, one end of the movable arm 618 and the lower fixed base 611 are elastically connected by a coil spring 620. One end of the coil spring 620 is attached to one end of the movable arm 618, and the other end is attached to the lower fixed base 611. The coil spring 620 urges the movable arm 618 so that the movable arm 618 swings upward, that is, presses the lower movable base 615 upward.

As shown in FIG. 16, a rotating body 621 is provided on the front side of the lower movable base 615, and the rotating body 621 includes an illuminated substrate 622A and an inner lens 622B provided on the front side of the illuminated substrate 622A. And have. An LED (not shown) is provided on the illuminated substrate 622A, and the LED is controlled to be lit by the illuminated substrate 622A to emit light through the inner lens 622B.

As shown in FIG. 17, the rotating body 621 is provided with a rotating shaft 621A, and the rotating shaft 621A projects rearward from the rotating body 621. The rotating shaft 621A is rotatably supported by a bearing portion 615D (see FIG. 16) formed on the lower movable base 615. The rear end (tip in the protruding direction) of the rotating shaft 621A is fixed to the disk member 617, and the rotating body 621 rotates integrally with the disk member 617.

In the lower movable effect member 610, as shown in FIG. 18, when the lower movable base 615 moves in the vertical direction, the relay gear 616A that meshes with the rack teeth 611G rotates. When the relay gear 616A rotates, power is transmitted from the relay gear 616A to the gear portion 617A via the relay gear 616B, and the disk member 617 rotates. Therefore, the rotating body 621 rotates together with the disk member 617. As a result, the rotating body 621 rotates as the lower movable base 615 moves in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 16, a curved groove 611E is formed on the front surface of the lower fixed base 611. The curved groove 611E has a curved shape that matches the rotation locus of the protrusion 617B (see FIG. 18) when the disk member 617 (see FIG. 17) rotates. As a result, as shown in FIG. 18, when the disk member 617 rotates integrally with the rotating body 621, the protrusion 617B is guided along the curved groove 611E, and the disk member 617 and the rotating body 621 rotate. It can be prevented from being obstructed by the protrusion 617B.

Here, the lower fixed base 611 of the present embodiment constitutes the fixed body of the present invention, and the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 constitute the movable body of the present invention. Further, the state in which the rotating body 621 is located at the lowermost position with respect to the lower fixed base 611 (the state shown in FIG. 18) corresponds to the standby position of the present invention, and the rotating body 621 is the most with respect to the lower fixed base 611. The state located above (the state shown in FIG. 19) corresponds to the driving position of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 16, an L-shaped locking piece 611F is provided on the front surface of the lower fixed base 611, and the lower movable base 615 is in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned locking piece 611F. An L-shaped locking piece 615B is formed.

As shown in FIG. 18, the locking piece 611F locks the lower movable base 615 to the lower fixed base 611 by engaging the locking piece 615B in the standby position where the lower fixed base 611 is located at the lowest position. It is locked and restricts the lower movable base 615 from moving forward in the standby position. The locking piece 611F of the present embodiment constitutes the first locking portion of the present invention, and the locking piece 615B constitutes the second locking portion of the present invention. Further, the locking piece 611F and the locking piece 615B constitute the locking means of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 16, a base cover 623 is provided on the front side of the rotating body 621, and the base cover 623 is fixed to the lower fixing base 611 by a screw (not shown). The base cover 623 extends in the left-right direction of the pachinko game machine 1 and is provided on the front side of the rotating body 621 in a state where the rotating body 621 is located in the standby position (see FIG. 15), and the rotating body 621 is displaced forward. When the rotating body 621 comes into contact with the rotating body 621, the rotating body 621 is restricted from moving forward.

A relay board 624 is attached to the base cover 623, and the relay board 624 is connected to the illuminated board 622A of the rotating body 621 via a flexible cable 625. The illumination board 622A controls lighting of an LED (not shown) based on a control signal transmitted from the LED control circuit 250 (see FIG. 51).

The flexible cable 625 is arranged along the front surface of the base cover 623. A holding member 623A is provided on the front surface of the base cover 623, and the flexible cable 625 is supported and protected by the holding member 623A on the base cover 623. The base cover 623 of the present embodiment constitutes the guide member of the present invention, and the flexible cable 625 constitutes the wiring of the present invention.

A rib 626 extending in the vertical direction is provided on the upper portion of the lower fixed base 611, and the rib 626 has a protrusion 617B of the disk member 617 in contact with the upper side surface 626A and the lower side surface 626B. ing. The rib 626 of the present embodiment constitutes the first rib and the second rib of the present invention.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, in a state where the rotating body 621 rotates and is positioned in the standby position as the lower movable base 615 moves downward, the protrusion 617B is below the rib 626. It abuts on the side surface 626B. As a result, the rotating body 621 is restricted from rotating (moving) in a direction opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 18) when moving from the standby position to the drive position.

Further, when the rotating body 621 is stopped at the standby position, the motor 612 is driven to urge the rotating body 621 so that the rotating body 621 does not move from the driving position to the standby position. That is, when the rotating body 621 is stopped at the standby position, the motor 612 is driven to rotate the motor 612 in the forward direction to move the rotating body 621 from the driving position to the direction opposite to the standby position side (in FIG. 18). A driving force that urges the driver in the counterclockwise direction is applied. Here, since the rotating body 621 may be urged so as not to move from the driving position toward the standby position at least, the rotating body 621 may be moved in the direction opposite to the standby position side from the driving position or the driving position. It suffices if it is urged so that it is in a misaligned position.

Here, the left end portion (end portion on the protrusion 611D side) of the slit 618B has a shape that is bent downward (see FIG. 19). This makes it possible to prevent the fitting protrusion 614A from easily moving to the right in the slit 618B when the fitting protrusion 614A is at the left end of the slit 618B (when it is in the state shown in FIG. 18). .. Therefore, since the left end portion of the slit 618B is bent, the rotating body 621 can be stably held in the standby position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, in a state where the rotating body 621 rotates and is positioned at the drive position as the lower movable base 615 moves upward, the protrusion 617B is located on the upper side surface 626A of the rib 626. Contact with. As a result, the rotating body 621 is restricted from rotating (moving) in a direction opposite to the rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 19) when moving from the drive position to the standby position.

Further, when the rotating body 621 is stopped at the driving position, the rotating body 621 is set to the clock in FIG. 19 so that at least the rotating body 621 does not move from the driving position to the standby position by driving the motor 612. A driving force that urges the driver in the turning direction is applied. The motor 612 of the present embodiment constitutes the driving means of the present invention.

The protrusion 617B of the present embodiment constitutes the first contact portion of the present invention, and the rib 626 constitutes the second contact portion of the present invention. The lower movable effect member 610 of the present embodiment has the protrusion 617B in contact with the upper side surface 626A and the lower side surface 626B of one rib 626 at the standby position and the drive position. Two ribs may be provided, the protrusion 617B may be brought into contact with one rib at the standby position, and the protrusion 617B may be brought into contact with the other rib at the drive position.

As shown in FIG. 18, a detection piece 615C is formed at the left end of the lower movable base 615, and the detection piece 615C is detected by an optical home position sensor 627. The home position sensor 627 is provided at the lower part of the front surface of the lower fixed base 611, and detects the detection piece 615C when the lower fixed base 611 is in the standby position.

When the home position sensor 627 detects the detection piece 615C, the main control circuit 100
The detection signal is output to (see FIG. 51). The main control circuit 100 determines that the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are located in the standby position based on the detection signal input from the home position sensor 627, and the sub control circuit 200 (based on this standby position) ( A motor control command is transmitted to (see FIG. 51).

When the sub control circuit 200 receives the motor control command from the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200 outputs a motor control signal to the movable staging device control circuit 205 (see FIG. 51). The movable staging device control circuit 205 drives the motor 612 based on the motor control signal, moves the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 to the standby position and the driving position, and at the standby position and the driving position, the rotating body. Control to urge 621.

Next, the operation of the lower movable staging member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are located in the standby position, the locking piece 611F of the lower fixed base 611 is locked to the locking piece 615B of the lower movable base 615. As a result, the lower movable base 615 is locked to the lower fixed base 611, and the lower movable base 615 is restricted from moving forward.

When the motor 612 is driven in one direction with the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 18), power is transmitted from the gear 613 to the gear 614.

When the gear 614 rotates, the fitting protrusion 614A moves along the slit 618B of the movable arm 618, so that the movable arm 618 swings upward with the protrusion 611D as a fulcrum.

As a result, the fitting projection 618A of the movable arm 618 slides along the slit 615A of the lower movable base 615 and presses the lower movable base 615 upward. Further, when the movable arm 618 swings upward with the protrusion 611D as a fulcrum, one end of the movable arm 618 is urged downward by the coil spring 620. As a result, the urging force of the coil spring 620 becomes an assist force when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621, which are heavy objects, are pressed upward.

When the lower movable base 615 is pressed upward, the fitting protrusions 615a to 615e of the lower movable base 615 move upward along the slits 611a to 611c via the sliding bushes 619A to 619E, thereby lowering. The side movable base 615 moves upward with respect to the lower fixed base 611.

When the lower movable base 615 moves upward, the relay gear 616A meshing with the rack teeth 611G rotates, and power is transmitted from the relay gear 616A to the gear portion 617A of the disk member 617 via the relay gear 616B. .. As a result, the rotating body 621 rotates integrally with the disk member 617 as the lower movable base 615 rises, and the protrusion 617B moves along the curved groove 611E of the lower fixed base 611. Therefore, the rotating body 621 rotates smoothly to the drive position (see FIGS. 19 and 20). FIG. 20 shows a state in which the lower movable effect member 610 is moved to the drive position with respect to the game board 40.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the lower movable base 615 rises and the rotating body 621 moves to the driving position, the protrusion 617B abuts on the upper side surface 626A of the rib 626, and the rotating body 621 further rotates from the driving position. Is regulated.

Further, when the rotating body 621 is stopped at the driving position, the direction opposite to the rotating direction when the motor 612 is driven to move the rotating body 621 from the driving position to the standby position (clockwise direction in FIG. 19). To be urged to. The urging force at this time may be smaller than the driving force of the motor 612 when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are moved from the standby position to the driving position. By energizing the rotating body 621 at the driving position in this way, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 621 from swaying at the driving position, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the rotating body 621.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19, the motor 612 is moved in the other direction (the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are moved from the standby position to the driving position) from the state where the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are located at the driving position. When driven in the direction opposite to the rotation direction in the case of making the gear 613, power is transmitted from the gear 613 to the gear 614.

When the gear 614 rotates, the fitting protrusion 614A moves along the slit 618B of the movable arm 618, so that the movable arm 618 swings downward with the protrusion 611D as a fulcrum.

As a result, the fitting projection 618A of the movable arm 618 slides along the slit 615A of the lower movable base 615 and presses the lower movable base 615 downward. When the lower movable base 615 is pressed downward, the fitting projections 615a to 615e of the lower movable base 615 move downward along the slits 611a to 611c via the sliding bushes 619A to 619E. The side movable base 615 moves downward with respect to the lower fixed base 611.

When the lower movable base 615 moves downward, the relay gear 616A meshing with the rack teeth 611G rotates, and power is transmitted from the relay gear 616A to the gear portion 617A of the disk member 617 via the relay gear 616B. .. As a result, as the lower movable base 615 descends, the rotating body 621 rotates integrally with the disk member 617, and the protrusion 617B moves along the curved groove 611E of the lower fixed base 611. Therefore, the rotating body 621 smoothly rotates to the standby position.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the lower movable base 615 descends and the rotating body 621 moves to the standby position, the protrusion 617B abuts on the lower side surface 626B of the rib 626, and the rotating body 621 further moves from the standby position. Rotation is restricted.

Further, when the rotating body 621 is stopped at the standby position, the direction opposite to the rotation direction when the motor 612 is driven to move the rotating body 621 from the standby position to the driving position (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 18). ). The urging force at this time may be smaller than the driving force of the motor 612 when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are moved from the driving position to the standby position.

As described above, the lower movable effect member 610 of the present embodiment includes a lower fixed base 611, a lower movable base 615 movable with respect to the lower fixed base 611, and a rotating body 621. The side movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are configured to move between the standby position and the drive position (see FIGS. 18 and 19).

The lower movable effect member 610 includes a locking piece 611F provided on the lower fixed base 611 and a locking piece 615B provided on the lower movable base 615, and is engaged with the locking piece 611F in the standby position. It is configured to regulate the swing of the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 by engaging with the stop piece 615B (see FIG. 18).

Further, the lower movable effect member 610 includes a base cover 623 that guides the flexible cable 625 connected to the rotating body 621, and the base cover 623 has the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 in the standby position. In this state, it is provided in front of the rotating body 621 to restrict the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 from moving forward (see FIG. 15).

As a result, the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 can be prevented from swinging forward with respect to the lower fixed base 611 in the standby position, and the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 can be stably held. Can be done.

Further, since the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 can be restricted from moving forward by the base cover 623 in the state where the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are located in the standby position, the pachinko gaming machine can be controlled. It is possible to prevent the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 from moving forward with respect to the lower fixed base 611 when excessive vibration is applied to the lower movable effect member 610 during transportation of 1.

As a result, the locking piece 611F and the locking piece 615B are not released from the locked state when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are located at the standby positions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower movable staging member 610 from malfunctioning due to the unlocking of the locking piece 611F and the locking piece 615B. Therefore, it is possible to improve the staging effect while ensuring that the lower movable staging member 610 operates smoothly.

In addition to this, since the base cover 623 is composed of a guide member for guiding the flexible cable 625 connected to the illuminated board 622A of the rotating body 621 (see FIG. 16), the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 It is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated member that regulates the movement of the illumination forward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of parts of the lower movable staging member 610 from increasing and prevent the manufacturing cost of the lower movable staging member 610 from increasing.

Further, the lower movable effect member 610 of the present embodiment includes a motor 612 for moving the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 at the standby position and the drive position, and the lower movable base 615 is lowered at the drive position. The lower fixed base 611 has a protrusion 617B that abuts on the side fixed base 611, and the lower fixed base 611 has a rib 626 that the protrusion 617B abuts when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are in the drive position (FIG. 18). And FIG. 19).

Further, the motor 612 refers to the rotating body 621 so that at least the rotating body 621 does not move from the driving position to the standby position when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are stopped at the driving position. A driving force that urges the vehicle in the clockwise direction is applied.

As a result, the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 can be prevented from swinging at the drive position, and the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 can be stably stopped at the drive position. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the lower movable staging member 610 while ensuring that the lower movable staging member 610 operates smoothly.

Further, the lower movable staging member 610 of the present invention is connected to the lower movable base 615, and by transmitting the driving force of the motor 612 to the lower movable base 615, the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are placed in a standby position. It has a movable arm 618 that can be moved to a drive position and a drive position (see FIGS. 18 and 19).

As a result, when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are positioned at the drive position (position shown in FIG. 19), an excessive load is applied from the motor 612 to the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 via the movable arm 618. Is applied, the movable arm 618 bends and can absorb the load applied to the protrusion 617B from the rib 626. This makes it possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the lower movable base 615, the rotating body 621, and the motor 612.

Further, when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are located at the drive position (position shown in FIG. 19), the drive gear 613 provided between the lower movable base 615 and the lower fixed base 611 is provided. , 614, when the backlash of the gear portion 617A and the relay gears 616A and 616B occurs, the backlash can be eliminated by bending the movable arm 618 by the amount of backlash.

Further, according to the lower movable effect member 610 of the present embodiment, the rib 626 has a lower side surface 626A to which the protrusion 617B abuts when the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 are in the drive position. When the side movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 have a lower side surface 626B to which the protrusion 617B abuts when the rotating body 621 is in the standby position, and the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 move to the driving position, It is preferable that the protrusion 617B abuts on the lower side surface 626B when the protrusion 617B abuts on the upper side surface 626A and the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 move to the standby position (FIGS. 18 and FIG. 19).

As a result, the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 can be stably stopped at both the drive position and the standby position.

In the lower movable staging member 610 of the present embodiment, elastic members such as rubber and soft resin that come into contact with the other of the rib 626 and the protrusion 617B are provided on at least one of the rib 626 and the protrusion 617B. May be good.

In this way, when the rotating body 621 is positioned at the drive position, the elastic member flexes when an excessive load is applied from the motor 612 to the rotating body 621 and the lower movable base 615 via the movable arm 618. Therefore, the load applied to the rib 626 from the protrusion 617B can be absorbed.

This makes it possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the motor 612, the rotating body 621 and the lower movable base 615. Further, by combining the elastic member and the elastic deformation of the movable arm 618, the load applied to the rib 626 from the protrusion 617B can be absorbed more effectively.

In the present embodiment, the protrusion 617B rotates about one and a half rotations when the rotating body 621 moves from the standby position to the drive position. Therefore, an elastic member is provided on at least one side surface of the protrusion 617B. It may be provided. By using such a structure, it is possible to prevent the lateral width from becoming wider than when elastic members are provided on both side surfaces of the protrusion 617B.

Further, according to the lower movable effect member 610 of the present embodiment, when the rotating body 621 is moved from the standby position to the driving position, the rotating body 621 is slightly advanced from the driving position (regular stop position). By driving the motor 612 to rotate to the position, control is performed to urge the rotating body 621 to be pushed from the drive position (regular stop position). As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 621 from swaying at the drive position, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the rotating body 621. Therefore, the effect of the lower movable effect member 610 can be enhanced.

Here, when the rotating body 621 is moved from the standby position to the driving position, the movable effect device control circuit 205 drives several pulses to the number of pulses of the motor 612 until the rotating body 621 moves from the standby position to the driving position. By driving the motor 612 by applying a pulse, control may be performed to urge the rotating body 621 to be pushed from the drive position. Further, when there is a sensor that detects that the rotating body 621 is in the drive position, the drive of the motor 612 is not stopped at the time when the sensor detects the rotation body 621, but after the sensor detects the rotation body 621 for a predetermined time. By stopping the drive of the motor 612, the rotating body 621 may be urged to be pushed from the drive position (regular stop position).

Further, a permanent magnet may be provided on either one of the rib 626 and the protrusion 617B, and an armature may be provided on either one of the rib 626 and the protrusion 617B. In this case, the rib 626 and the protrusion 617B can be attracted by the magnetic force of the permanent magnet regardless of whether the rotating body 621 is in the driving position or the standby position. As a result, the lower movable base 615 and the rotating body 621 can be stably stopped at both the drive position and the standby position.

[Structure and operation of the upper movable staging member 650]
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an upper movable effect member 650. The upper movable effect member 650 is provided behind the game board 40 and above the display area 51. Note that FIG. 4 shows a state in which the upper movable staging member 650 is located behind the central base plate 413 (a state in which it is located in a standby position described later). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper movable staging member 650 is not entirely visible to the player at the standby position. The upper movable staging member 650 of the present embodiment constitutes the accessory of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 21, the upper movable staging member 650 is formed in a shape imitating a longsword, and includes an upper fixed base 651. The upper fixed base 651 is fixed to the spacer 90 (see FIG. 3) behind the game board 40.

As shown in FIG. 22, a motor 652 is attached to the front surface of the upper fixed base 651. A gear 653 (see FIG. 23) is attached to a motor shaft (not shown) of the motor 652, and the gear 653 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the upper fixed base 651.

A gear 654 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the upper fixed base 651, and the gear 654 meshes with the gear 653 (see FIG. 23). A fitting protrusion 654A is provided on the front surface of the gear 654, and the fitting protrusion 654A projects forward from the gear 654.

A slit 651A is formed in the upper part of the upper fixed base 651, and the slit 651A is curved from the upper left side to the lower right side. A swing shaft 651B is formed on the front surface of the upper fixed base 651, and the swing shaft 651B projects forward from the upper fixed base 651.

An upper movable base 655 is provided on the front surface side of the upper fixed base 651. A boss portion 655A (see FIG. 23) is formed in the lower left portion of the upper movable base 655, and the swing shaft 651B is rotatably fitted to the boss portion 655A. As a result, the upper movable base 655 swings in the vertical direction with respect to the upper fixed base 651 with the swing shaft 651B as a fulcrum.

In the upper movable effect member 650 of the present embodiment, the swing shaft 651B of the upper movable base 655 constitutes the base end portion of the present invention. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the state in which the upper movable base 655 extends in the horizontal direction in the upper direction is the standby position of the upper movable effect member 650, and as shown in FIG. 27, the upper movable base 655 is obliquely extended in the lower direction. The tilted state is the drive position of the upper movable staging member 650.

As shown in FIG. 23, a fitting protrusion 655D is formed on the upper left portion of the rear surface of the upper movable base 655, and the fitting protrusion 655D is slidably fitted to the slit 651A via the swing bush 656A. Has been done.

A slit 655B is formed in the lower left portion of the upper movable base 655, and the slit 655B extends in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the upper movable base 655. A fitting projection 654A (see FIG. 22) of the gear 654 is slidably fitted to the slit 655B via a sliding bush 656B.

A slit 655C is formed in the upper left portion of the upper movable base 655, and the slit 655C extends longer than the slit 655B in the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the upper movable base 655 of the present embodiment, when the gear 654 rotates, the fitting projection 654A of the gear 654 moves along the slit 655B (see FIG. 23) of the upper movable base 655. As a result, the fitting projection 655D (see FIG. 23) moves along the slit 651A. As a result, the upper movable base 655 swings in the vertical direction with the swing shaft 651B as a fulcrum along the curved shape of the slit 651A.

An upper slide base 657 is provided on the front surface of the upper movable base 655, and the upper slide base 657 is formed in a shape imitating a blade and is decorated to imitate a blade.

A fitting protrusion 657A is provided on the upper left portion of the upper slide base 657, and the fitting protrusion 657A projects rearward from the upper slide base 657. The fitting projection 657A is slidably fitted to the slit 655C of the upper movable base 655 via the sliding bush 656C.

The upper movable base 655 is formed with a pair of slits 655E and 655F that are separated in the vertical direction, and the slits 655E and 655F both extend along the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655. The slits 655E and 655F are formed so as to be offset from each other in the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655, the slit 655E is closer to the center of the upper movable base 655 in the longitudinal direction, and the slit 655F is formed in the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655. It is formed near the end of the.

As shown in FIG. 23, a fitting protrusion 657B is provided on the rear surface of the upper slide base 657. The fitting projection 657B projects rearward from the upper slide base 657 and is slidably fitted to the slit 655E via the sliding bush 656D.

A pair of fitting protrusions 657C are provided on the rear surface of the upper slide base 657. The fitting projection 657C projects rearward from the upper slide base 657 and is slidably fitted to the slit 655F via a pair of sliding bushes 656E (see FIG. 22).

A movable slider 658 is provided on the rear surface of the upper slide base 657, and the pair of sliding bushes 656E (see FIG. 22) described above are attached to the front surface side of the movable slider 658. Therefore, the movable slider 658 slides in the slit 655F integrally with the pair of sliding bushes 656E (see FIG. 22).

The upper slide base 657 is integrated with the upper movable base 655 by fitting the fitting protrusions 657A, 657B, and 657C into the slits 655C, 655E, and 655F, respectively, and the upper movable base 655 swings in the vertical direction. When moving, it swings integrally with the upper movable base 655.

As shown in FIG. 22, a rack 659 is provided on the rear surface of the upper slide base 657, and the rack 659 is fixed to the upper slide base 657 and integrated with the upper movable base 655.

A guide groove 655G extending along the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 is formed in the upper movable base 655, and a guide protrusion 659a formed in the rack 659 is slidably fitted in the guide groove 655G. ..

A rack tooth 659A is formed in the lower portion of the rack 659, and a gear 660 is meshed with the rack tooth 659A. The gear 660 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the upper slide base 657. The gear 660 is attached to a rotating shaft (not shown) of the motor 661 (see FIG. 23) provided on the rear surface of the upper slide base 657.

When the motor 661 (see FIG. 23) is driven, power is transmitted from the gear 660 to the rack teeth 659A, and the rack 659 is integrated with the upper slide base 657 in the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 with respect to the upper movable base 655. Moving.

At this time, the rack 659 moves while the gear 660 and the rack teeth 659A are stably meshed with each other by the guide protrusion 659a moving along the guide groove 655G of the upper movable base 655.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the fitting protrusions 657A, 657B, and 657C move in the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 along the slits 655C, 655E, and 655F, respectively. As a result, the upper slide base 657 smoothly moves with respect to the upper movable base 655 without the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 being displaced in the vertical direction. The upper movable base 655 of the present embodiment constitutes the base body of the present invention, and the upper slide base 657 constitutes the moving body of the present invention. The upper movable base 655 constitutes the first moving member of the present invention, and the upper slide base 657 constitutes the second moving member of the present invention.

The upper slide base 657 has a first moving position (for example, a position shown in FIGS. 26 and 27) having the largest area overlapping the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the front-rear direction with respect to the upper movable base 655 and the upper movable base 655. It moves to the second moving position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 28) where the area overlapping in the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the smallest.

As shown in FIG. 23, a pair of movable arms 662 and 663 imitating the shape of a blade are provided on the rear surface of the upper movable base 655. A plurality of protrusions 655H, 655I, 655J, and 655K are formed on the rear surface of the upper movable base 655, and the base ends of the movable arms 662 and 663 are rotatably fitted to the protrusions 655H and 655I, respectively. .. As a result, the movable arms 662 and 663 move in the direction in which the tip portions approach and separate from each other with the protrusions 655H and 655I as fulcrums.

As shown in FIG. 24, gear portions 662A and 663A are formed at the base ends of the movable arms 662 and 663, and gears 664 and 665 are meshed with the gear portions 662A and 663A.

As shown in FIG. 23, the gears 664 and 665 are rotatably supported by the protrusions 655J and 655K, and when the gears 664 and 665 rotate, the movable arms 662 and 663 swing around the protrusions 655H and 655I as fulcrums. do.

As shown in FIG. 24, a rib 664A is formed in the gear 664, and the rib 664A projects outward in the radial direction of the gear 664.

A movable slider 658 can be brought into contact with the rib 664A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, when the power of the motor 661 (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the rack teeth 659A via the gear 660, the upper slide base 657 is integrated with the rack 659 in the first moving position. Moves to one side in the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 (for example, a direction protruding with respect to the upper movable base 655) toward the second moving position.

At this time, the movable slider 658 also moves to one side in the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 (see FIG. 23) from the first moving position to the second moving position. The movable slider 658 faces the rib 664A of the gear 664 located at the first operating position (rotational position shown in FIG. 24) described later in the longitudinal direction of the upper slide base 657 (see FIG. 23). The movable slider 658 presses the rib 664A to rotate the gear 664 when the upper slide base 657 (see FIG. 23) moves from the first moving position to the second moving position.

As a result, the gear 665 that meshes with the gear 664 also rotates together with the gear 664, and the first movable position (movable arms 662, 663) in which the gears 664 and 665 are closest to the movable arms 662 and 663 via the gear portions 662A and 663A It is movable to the second movable position (the position where the movable arms 662 and 663 are opened) which is the most distant from the closed position). That is, the movable arms 662 and 663 are movable from the closed state to the open state.

The gears 664 and 665 are movable by rotating (moving) from the first operating position (rotational position shown in FIG. 24) to the second operating position (rotational position when the movable arms 662 and 663 are in the open state). The arms 662 and 663 are moved from the first movable position to the second movable position. Further, the gears 664 and 665 rotate from the second operating position to the first operating position to move the movable arms 662 and 663 from the second movable position to the first movable position.

The movable slider 658 first operates the gears 664 and 665 when the upper slide base 657 (see FIG. 23) moves from the first movement position to the second movement position with respect to the upper movable base 655 (see FIG. 23). Rotate from position to second actuation position. The gears 664 and 665 of the present embodiment constitute the operating member of the present invention, and the movable slider 658 constitutes the first engaging portion of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 23, the movable arm 663 and the upper movable base 655 are elastically connected by a coil spring 667, and the coil spring 667 urges the movable arm 663 in a direction close to the movable arm 662. There is.

As a result, when the upper slide base 657 moves from the second moving position to the first moving position with respect to the upper movable base 655, and the movable slider 658 moves in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rib 664A (see FIG. 24) is pressed. , The movable arms 662 and 663 are moved from the second movable position to the first movable position by the urging force of the coil spring 667.

As the movable arms 662 and 663 are moved from the second movable position to the first movable position, the gears 664 and 665 rotate from the second operating position to the first operating position.

As shown in FIG. 22, an L-shaped base rib 666 is provided at the right end of the upper slide base 657. The base rib 666 faces the rib 664A of the gear 664 located at the first operating position with respect to the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 (see FIG. 25). Here, the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 is the same as the slide direction (moving direction) of the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657.

The gears 664 and 665 are provided between the movable slider 658 (see FIG. 25) and the base rib 666 with respect to the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657.

As shown in FIG. 25, the base rib 666 is a movable slider when the upper slide base 657 (see FIG. 22) moves from the second moving position to the first moving position with respect to the upper movable base 655 (see FIG. 22). It engages with the rib 664A from the direction opposite to 658, and rotates the gears 664 and 665 from the second operating position to the first operating position. The base rib 666 of the present embodiment constitutes the second engaging portion of the present invention.

In the state where the gears 664 and 665 are rotated to the first operating position (the state shown in FIG. 25), the base rib 666 regulates the rotation of the gears 664 and 665 by pressing the rib 664A toward the movable slider 658. do. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the base rib 666 is not provided. In this case, the rotation of the gears 664 and 665 is restricted only by the urging force of the coil spring 667.

As shown in FIG. 23, the upper movable staging member 650 includes a pair of guide rails 668 and 669. The guide rails 668 and 669 are provided on the right side of the spacer 90 (see FIG. 3) so as to be located behind the game board 40 (see FIG. 3) and in front of the liquid crystal display device 50 (see FIG. 3). .. The guide rails 668 and 669 are formed in a curved shape along the trajectory when the upper movable effect member 650 and the upper slide base 657 swing in the vertical direction, and are formed in the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 3). Are separated from each other.

A guide piece 670 is provided at the right end of the upper movable base 655, and the guide piece 670 is provided between the guide rails 668 and 669 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The guide piece 670 has triangular reinforcing portions 670a and 670b (see FIG. 22) that incline from a portion in contact with the guide rails 668 and 669 toward the upper movable staging member 650.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 21, 26 and 27, the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are driven to the standby position (position shown in FIG. 21) with the swing shaft 651B (see FIG. 22) as a fulcrum. When moving to the position (position shown in FIG. 27), it swings up and down along the guide rails 668, 669 (see FIG. 23). The guide rails 668 and 669 of the present embodiment constitute the guide member of the present invention, and the guide piece 670 constitutes the guided portion of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 22, the guide rail 669 located on the rear side of the guide rail 668 located on the front side extends downward, and a stopper 669A is provided at the lower end of the guide rail 669. The guide piece 670 abuts on the stopper 669A when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are in the drive position, and the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are restricted from moving below the drive position. Slide.

The guide rail 668 located on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the front-rear direction is installed behind the upper slide base 657. As a result, when the upper slide base 657 moves so as to protrude from the first moving position to the second moving position with respect to the upper movable base 655, the upper slide base 657 can be prevented from coming into contact with the guide rail 668, and the upper side can be prevented. The slide base 657 can be smoothly and surely moved to the first moving position and the second moving position.

As shown in FIG. 23, a fixed crossguard member 672 and a movable crossguard member 673 are provided at the front portion of the upper slide base 657. The fixed crossguard member 672 is fixed to the front surface of the left end portion of the upper slide base 657, and the movable crossguard member 673 is provided between the fixed crossguard member 672 and the upper slide base 657 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ing.

Fitting protrusions 673A to 673C are provided on the rear surface of the movable crossguard member 673, and the fitting protrusions 673A to 673C project rearward from the movable crossguard member 673. A pair of slits 657E and 657F extending in the vertical direction are formed at the left end of the upper slide base 657, and fitting protrusions 673A to 673C slide through the slits 657E and 657F via sliding bushes 656F, 656G and 656H. It is fitted so that it can move freely.

As a result, the movable crossguard member 673 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672 by sliding the fitting protrusions 673A to 673C along the slits 657E and 657F. The upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672 of the present embodiment constitute the first movable member of the present invention, and the movable crossguard member 673 constitutes the second movable member of the present invention. The upper slide base 657, the fixed crossguard member 672, and the movable crossguard member 673 constitute the movable means of the present invention.

The upper slide base 657 and the movable crossguard member 673 are elastically connected by a coil spring 674, and the coil spring 674 urges the movable crossguard member 673 upward with respect to the upper slide base 657. The coil spring 674 of the present embodiment constitutes the urging member of the present invention.

A contact wall member 675 is provided above the movable crossguard member 673, and the contact wall member 675 is provided on the spacer 90.

When the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move from the drive position to the upper standby position, the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are closer to the contact wall member 675 than the drive position.

On the other hand, when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move from the standby position to the lower drive position, they are separated from the contact wall member 675 as compared with the standby position.

The movable crossguard member 673 comes into contact with the contact wall member 675 when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move from the drive position toward the standby position so as to be close to the contact wall member 675, thereby causing the coil spring 674. It moves against the urging force of the upper movable base 655 and the fixed crossguard member 672 and moves to the first position (the position shown in FIG. 21).

Further, the movable crossguard member 673 is urged by the coil spring 674 when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move from the standby position toward the drive position so as to be separated from the contact wall member 675. It is movable with respect to the upper movable base 655 and the fixed crossguard member 672 to move to the second position (position shown in FIG. 27).

The upper fixed base 651 and the upper slide base 657 are elastically connected by a coil spring 671, and the coil spring 671 urges the upper slide base 657 to move upward with respect to the upper fixed base 651. There is. As a result, the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are urged to the standby position. Further, the coil spring 671 assists the driving force of the motor 652 when moving (moving upward) the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 from the driving position to the standby position.

Next, the operation of the upper movable staging member 650 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the motor 652 is driven in one direction in a state where the upper movable staging member 650 is located in the standby position, power is supplied from the gear 653 (see FIG. 22) to the gear 654 (see FIG. 22). Be transmitted. As shown in FIG. 23, when the gear 654 rotates, the fitting projection 654A (see FIG. 22) slides along the slit 655B of the upper movable base 655 via the sliding bush 656B, whereby the upper movable base 655 And the upper slide base 657 swings downward with the swing shaft 651B (see FIG. 22) as a fulcrum.

At this time, the fitting projection 655D of the upper movable base 655 slides along the slit 651A via the sliding bush 656A, so that the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move upward from the standby position toward the drive position. Move down from.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move from the upper side to the lower side from the standby position toward the drive position, the guide piece 670 is guided by the guide rails 668 and 669.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move from the standby position toward the drive position so as to be separated from the contact wall member 675, the movable crossguard member 673 moves the coil spring 674 (see FIG. 23). ) Is urged to move with respect to the upper movable base 655 and the fixed crossguard member 672.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26, while the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are swinging from the standby position to the drive position, the upper end of the movable crossguard member 673 comes into contact with the contact wall member 675. Keep it in the same condition. As a result, the movable flange member 673 is produced so as to pop out with respect to the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 that swing downward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27, the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 swing further downward toward the drive position, and when the drive position is reached, the movable crossguard member 673 is urged by the coil spring 674. It is maintained in a movable state with respect to the upper movable base 655 and the fixed crossguard member 672.

At this time, since the upper end of the movable crossguard member 673 does not come into contact with the contact wall member 675, the movable crossguard member 673 protrudes to the maximum with respect to the upper movable base 655 and the fixed crossguard member 672, and the crossguard appears on the handle of the blade. The production is done.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are moved to the drive position, the fitting projection 655D (see FIG. 23) of the upper slide base 657 provides the sliding bush 656A (see FIG. 23). The guide piece 670 comes into contact with the stopper 669A (see FIG. 23) at the lower end of the guide rail 669 (see FIG. 23) while contacting the lower end of the slit 651A (see FIG. 23) through the slit 651A. This restricts the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 from moving below the drive position.

When the motor 661 (see FIG. 23) is driven in one direction at the drive position, the gear 660 (see FIG. 22) rotates to drive the rack 659 (see FIG. 22), thereby driving the upper slide base integrated with the rack 659. 657 moves from the first moving position (eg, the position shown in FIGS. 26 and 27) to the second moving position (eg, the position shown in FIG. 28). When the upper slide base 657 moves from the first moving position to the second moving position, the upper fixed base 651 and the upper slide base 657 extend in the longitudinal direction as a whole. Further, when the upper slide base 657 moves from the first moving position to the second moving position, the end portion of the upper slide base 657 protrudes beyond the guide rails 668 and 669.

As shown in FIG. 23, when the upper slide base 657 moves from the first moving position to the second moving position, the fitting protrusions 657B and 657C of the upper slide base 657 are along the slits 655E and 655F of the upper movable base 655. Moving.

At this time, the movable slider 658 that moves integrally with the fitting protrusion 657C moves toward the rib 664A (see FIG. 24) of the gear 664, and presses the rib 664A from the movable slider 658 side. As a result, the gear 664 rotates from the first operating position.

When the gear 664 rotates from the first operating position, the gear 665 meshing with the gear 664 rotates together with the gear 664, and the gears 664 and 665 bring the movable arm 662 and the movable arm 663 closest to each other via the gear portions 662A and 663B. It is movable to the second movable position (position shown in FIG. 28) that is farthest from the first movable position (position shown in FIG. 24). That is, as shown in FIG. 28, the movable arms 662 and 663 change from the closed state to the open state.

In this way, the upper movable staging member 650 moves from the standby position to the drive position as shown in FIGS. 21 and 27. The state in which the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 swing downward most downward from the standby position and the movable arms 662 and 663 are opened may be the drive position of the upper movable effect member 650.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, when the motor 661 (see FIG. 23) is driven in the other direction while the upper movable effect member 650 is located at the drive position, the gear 660 rotates to drive the rack 659. The upper slide base 657 integrated with the rack 659 moves from the second moving position toward the first moving position (for example, the position shown in FIGS. 26 and 27) with respect to the upper fixed base 651. When the upper slide base 657 moves from the second moving position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 28) toward the first moving position with respect to the upper fixed base 651, the upper fixed base 651 and the upper slide base 657 are , Shrinks in the longitudinal direction as a whole.

When the upper slide base 657 moves from the second moving position to the first moving position, as shown in FIG. 23, the fitting projections 657B and 657C of the upper slide base 657 are along the slits 655E and 655F of the upper movable base 655. Moving.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 25, the base rib 666 provided at the right end of the upper slide base 657 (see FIG. 23) moves toward the rib 664A of the gear 664, and the movable slider 658 moves away from the rib 664A. Moving.

When the movable slider 658 moves away from the rib 664A, the movable arms 662 and 663 are moved from the second movable position separated from each other to the first movable position close to each other by the urging force of the coil spring 667. That is, the first movable arms 662 and 663 can move from the open state to the closed state.

As the movable arms 662 and 663 are moved from the second movable position to the first movable position, the gears 664 and 665 rotate from the second operating position to the first operating position.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the upper slide base 657 moves from the second moving position to the first moving position, as shown in FIG. 25, the base rib 666 presses the rib 664A of the gear 664 to press the gears 664 and 665. Moves from the second operating position to the first moving position.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the upper slide base 657 moves to the first moving position, the base rib 666 presses the rib 664A toward the movable slider 658 in a state where the gears 664 and 665 are rotated to the first operating position. It regulates the rotation of gears 664 and 665.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27, when the motor 652 is driven in the other direction in the state where the upper slide base 657 is located at the first moving position, the gear 653 (see FIG. 23) to the gear 654 (see FIG. 23). Power is transmitted to.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the gear 654 rotates, the fitting projection 654A slides along the slit 655B (see FIG. 23) of the upper movable base 655 via the sliding bush 656B (see FIG. 23). , The upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 swing upward with the swing shaft 651B as a fulcrum.

At this time, the fitting projection 655D (see FIG. 23) of the upper movable base 655 slides along the slit 651A via the sliding bush 656A, so that the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 are stabilized. It is rocked.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move from the lower side to the upper side from the drive position to the standby position, the guide piece 670 is guided by the guide rails 668 and 669.

As shown in FIG. 26, the movable crossguard member 673 is in the process of moving from the standby position to the drive position so that the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 approach the contact wall member 675 from the drive position toward the standby position. The upper end of the contact wall member 675 comes into contact with the padding wall member 675.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 21, when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move further upward toward the standby position, the upper end of the movable crossguard member 673 comes into contact with the contact wall member 675 and the movable crossguard member 673. Is restricted from moving upwards.

As a result, the movable crossguard member 673 moves against the urging force of the coil spring 674 (see FIG. 23) with respect to the upper movable base 655 and the fixed crossguard member 672. As a result, the effect is performed so that the movable crossguard member 673 is accommodated in the upper movable base 655 and the fixed crossguard member 672.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 move to the standby position, the driving of the motor 652 is stopped. In this way, the upper movable staging member 650 moves from the drive position to the standby position. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the upper movable effect member 650 is moved to the drive position with respect to the game board 40.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to the spacer 90 (see FIG. 3) to which the gaming board 40 (see FIG. 3) is attached and to the rear of the gaming board 40. A liquid crystal display device 50 (see FIG. 3) that displays a predetermined effect, and an upper movable effect member 650 that moves between a standby position and a drive position around a swing shaft 651B attached to a spacer 90. The spacer 90 is provided with guide rails 668, 669 so as to be located in front of the liquid crystal display device 50, and the upper movable staging member 650 is provided between the standby position and the drive position with the swing shaft 651B as a fulcrum. It has a guide piece 670 that is guided by the guide rails 668 and 669 when it moves.

As a result, the trajectory of the upper movable staging member 650 can be stabilized. Therefore, the effect by the upper movable effect member 650 can be accurately performed. Further, for example, when the upper movable effect member 650 moves between the standby position and the drive position, it is possible to prevent the game board 40 from swinging in the front-rear direction. It is possible to prevent the liquid crystal display device 50 from coming into contact with the upper movable effect member 650, the game board 40, and the liquid crystal display device 50.

In addition to this, by preventing the upper movable effect member 650 from swinging in the front-rear direction, the space between the upper movable effect member 650 and the game board 40, the upper movable effect member 650, and the liquid crystal display device 50 The space between and can be reduced. Therefore, the dimensions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the front-rear direction can be shortened, and the space of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be saved.

Further, since the guide piece 670 has triangular reinforcing portions 670a and 670b (see FIG. 22) that incline from the portions in contact with the guide rails 668 and 669 toward the upper movable staging member 650, the rigidity of the guide piece 670 is increased. Can be improved. Therefore, the upper movable staging member 650 can be smoothly and stably moved along the guide rails 668 and 669.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 650 has an upper movable base 655 and an upper slide base 657 that can move along the longitudinal direction of the upper movable base 655, and has an upper slide. When the base 657 moves from the first moving position to the second moving position, the end portion of the upper slide base 657 can protrude beyond the guide rails 668 and 669.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the movement of the upper slide base 657 from being restricted by the guide rails 668 and 669, and it is possible to more effectively perform the staging by the upper movable staging member 650.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the upper movable effect member 650 is located between a standby position close to the contact wall member 675 and a drive position separated from the contact wall member 675. An upper slide base 657 and a fixed crossguard member 672 that are movable around the swing shaft 651B, a movable collar member 673 that is movable with respect to the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672, and an upper slide base 657 and a movable crossguard member 673. With a coil spring 674 (see FIG. 23) that elastically connects the two.

Further, the movable crossguard member 673 resists the urging force of the coil spring 674 by coming into contact with the contact wall member 675 when the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672 move so as to be close to the contact wall member 675. Moves to the first position (position shown in FIG. 21) with respect to the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672, and moves so that the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672 are separated from the contact wall member 675. At that time, by being urged by the coil spring 674, it moves with respect to the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672 and moves to the second position (position shown in FIG. 27).

As a result, it is possible to improve the staging effect while smoothly operating the upper movable staging member 650 with a simple configuration. In particular, the upper movable effect member 650 is composed of an upper slide base 657 and a fixed crossguard member 672, a movable crossguard member 673 and a coil spring 674, and by associating the contact wall member 675 with this, the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member Since the movable crossguard member 673 can be moved with respect to the upper slide base 657 and the fixed crossguard member 672 with the movement of the 672, the configuration of the upper movable effect member 650 can be more effectively simplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the upper movable effect member 650 of the present embodiment can move between the upper movable base 655 and the first moving position and the second moving position with respect to the upper movable base 655. The upper slide base 657, the upper movable base 655, the movable arms 662, 663 between the first movable position and the second movable position, and the upper slide base 657 are provided, and the second operation is performed from the first operation position. By operating to the position, the movable arms 662 and 663 can be moved from the first movable position to the second movable position, and by moving from the second operating position to the first operating position, the movable arms 662 and 663 can be moved from the second movable position. It has gears 664 and 665 that can be moved to the first movable position.

Further, the upper movable effect member 650 is provided on the upper slide base 657, and is engaged with the rib 664A of the gear 664 when the upper slide base 657 moves from the first moving position to the second moving position with respect to the upper movable base 655. Together, the movable slider 658 (see FIG. 24) that moves the gears 664 and 665 from the first operating position to the second operating position and the upper slide base 657 are provided so that the upper slide base 657 is relative to the upper movable base 655. When moving from the second moving position to the first moving position, the gears 664 and 665 are moved from the second operating position to the first operating position by engaging with the rib 664A of the gear 664 from the direction opposite to the movable slider 658. A base rib 666 (see FIG. 25) is provided.

As a result, the movable arms 662 and 663 can be smoothly operated with a simple configuration. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved while ensuring that the upper movable effect member 650 operates smoothly.

Further, in the upper movable effect member 650 of the present embodiment, gears 664 and 665 are provided between the movable slider 658 and the base rib 666 with respect to the slide direction (movement direction) of the upper slide base 657. 664 has a rib 664A engageable with a movable slider 658 and a base rib 666.

As a result, the movable slider 658 and the base rib 666 are engaged with the rib 664A to rotate the gears 664 and 665, whereby the movable arms 662 and 663 are moved to the first movable position and the second movable position via the gear portions 662A and 663A. Can be moved between and. As a result, the upper movable staging member 650 can be more effectively and simply configured.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, when the movable arms 662 and 663 are positioned at the first movable position and the second movable position, the movable slider 658 and the base rib 666 are engaged with the rib 664A to engage the gear. The rotation of 664 and 665 can be regulated. As a result, the postures of the movable arms 662 and 663 can be stabilized at the first movable position and the second movable position, and the behavior of the movable arms 662 and 663 can be prevented from becoming unstable.

In the upper movable staging member 650 of the present embodiment, only the movable crossguard member 673 is movable with respect to the fixed crossguard member 672, but the fixed crossguard member 672 may also be movable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the movable crossguard member 673 is movably provided on the fixing plate 690, and the fixing plate 690 is fixed to the upper slide base 657 (see FIG. 23).

A movable crossguard member 691 is movably provided on the fixed body 690. The movable crossguard member 673 is provided with a rack 673D on which the rack teeth 673a are formed, and the movable crossguard member 691 is provided with a rack 691A on which the rack teeth 691a are formed.

The rack teeth 673a mesh with the rack teeth 691a via gears 692. The fixed plate 690 and the movable crossguard member 673 are elastically connected by a coil spring 674, and the coil spring 674 urges the movable crossguard member 673 upward with respect to the fixed body 690, that is, the upper slide base 657. ing.

With this configuration, as the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657 swing between the drive position and the standby position, the movable crossguard member 691 can be moved from the rack 673D of the movable crossguard member 673 via the gear 692. Power can be transmitted to the rack 691A, and the movable crossguard member 691 can be moved with respect to the fixing plate 690 in conjunction with the movement of the movable crossguard member 673.

As a result, the movable crossguard members 673 and 691 can be moved to a position where they retract into the fixing plate 690 and a position where they protrude from the fixing plate 690.

Further, in the present embodiment, the base rib 666 is used as a configuration for restricting the rotation of the gears 664 and 665 in the state where the gears 664 and 665 are rotated to the first operating position (the state shown in FIG. 25). Alternatively, a coil spring as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 may be used. 31 and 32 are schematic views of the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, a support member 680A for supporting one end of the coil spring 680 is fixed to the right end of the upper movable base 655, and the other end of the coil spring 680 is opposite to the movable slider 658. A contact piece 680B capable of contacting the rib 664A of the gear 664 from the direction is provided.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 32, the upper slide base 657 moves from the first position (position shown in FIG. 31) to the second position (position shown in FIG. 32) with respect to the upper movable base 655. When the movable slider 658 presses the rib 664A of the gear 664, the coil spring 680 is compressed with the rotation of the gear 664.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31, the upper slide base 657 moves from the second position (position shown in FIG. 32) to the first position (position shown in FIG. 31) with respect to the upper movable base 655, and the movable slider 658 moves. When the gear 664 is separated from the rib 664A, the coil spring 680 is extended so that the contact piece 680B presses the rib 664A from the direction opposite to the movable slider 658.

Even in such a configuration, when the movable arms 662 and 663 are positioned in the first movable position and the second movable position, the movable slider 658 and the coil spring 680 are engaged with the rib 664A to engage the gear. The rotation of 664 and 665 can be regulated. As a result, the postures of the movable arms 662 and 663 can be stabilized at the first movable position and the second movable position, and the behavior of the movable arms 662 and 663 can be prevented from becoming unstable.

Further, instead of the base rib 666 and the coil spring 680 described above, a link mechanism as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 may be used. 33 and 34 are schematic views of the upper movable base 655 and the upper slide base 657.

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the upper movable base 655 is provided with a rack 681 extending in the same direction as the rack 659 extends, and the rack 681 is provided with respect to the upper movable base 655. It is configured to be movable.

The upper slide base 657 is provided with a gear 682, and the gear 682 meshes with the rack teeth 681a of the rack 681. The upper movable base 655 is provided with a rotatably gear 683, and the gear 683 is provided with an L-shaped rib 683A. The rib 683A can press the rib 664A of the gear 664 from the direction opposite to the movable slider 658.

The gear 683 is a rack tooth 681a of the rack 681 when the upper slide base 657 moves to a first position (position shown in FIG. 33) and a second position (position shown in FIG. 34) with respect to the upper movable base 655. It is switched between a state in which meshing is possible and a state in which meshing is not possible.

When the upper slide base 657 moves from the first position (position shown in FIG. 33) to the second position (position shown in FIG. 34) with respect to the upper movable base 655, the upper movable effect member 650 configured in this way The rotation of the gear 682 causes the rack 681 to move to the left.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the rack 681 moves to the left, the meshing between the gear 683 and the rack teeth 681a is released (the meshing becomes impossible). Further, the movable slider 658 presses the rib 664A of the gear 664 to rotate the gear 664. At this time, the rib 664A presses the rib 683A, but since the force opposed to the pressing force of the rib 664A does not act on the rib 683A, the gear 683A rotates to allow the gear 664 to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper slide base 657 moves from the second position (position shown in FIG. 34) to the first position (position shown in FIG. 33) with respect to the upper movable base 655, and the movable slider 658 moves. When moving away from the rib 664A of the gear 664, the rotation of the gear 682 causes the rack 681 to move to the right.

When the rack 681 moves to the right, the gear 683 meshes with the rack teeth 681a and rotates, and the rib 683A presses the rib 664A from the direction opposite to the movable slider 658. As a result, the gear 664 rotates.

Even in such a configuration, when the movable arms 662 and 663 are positioned in the first movable position and the second movable position, the movable slider 658 and the rib 683A are engaged with the rib 664A to engage the gear 664. , 665 rotations can be regulated. As a result, the postures of the movable arms 662 and 663 can be stabilized at the first movable position and the second movable position, and the behavior of the movable arms 662 and 663 can be prevented from becoming unstable. Although the gear 682 is driven by the movement of the upper slide base 657, it may be driven by a motor (not shown).

[Structure and operation of the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 43, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a right side movable effect member 750 and a left side movable effect member 770. The right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 are provided on the right side and the left side of the display area 51 behind the game board 40. Note that FIG. 4 shows a state in which the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 are located behind the central base plate 413 (a state in which they are located in a standby position described later). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the right-side movable effect member 750 and the left-side movable effect member 770 are not entirely visible to the player at the standby position. The right-side movable effect member 750 and the left-side movable effect member 770 of the present embodiment constitute the displacement means of the present invention.

First, the right side movable staging member 750 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 35, the right side wing member 751 is provided on the right side movable staging member 750, and the right side wing member 751 is decorated to imitate a wing. The right wing member 751 is provided with an inner lens 751A on the front surface, and an illuminated substrate 751B (see FIG. 37) is built in so as to be located behind the inner lens 751A. An LED (not shown) is provided on the illuminated substrate 751B (see FIG. 37), and the illuminated substrate 751B (see FIG. 37) controls the lighting of the LED to emit light through the inner lens 751A.

As shown in FIG. 36, a right wing guide member 752 is provided behind the right wing member 751, and the right wing guide member 752 has a pair of doglegged guide grooves 752A separated in the vertical direction. 752B is formed.

A pair of fitting protrusions 751C and 751D separated in the vertical direction are formed at the rear portion of the right wing member 751, and the fitting protrusions 751C and 751D are formed in the guide grooves 752A and 752B via the sliding bushes 753A and 753B. It is slidably fitted.

As shown in FIG. 37, a pair of protrusions 752C and 752D separated in the vertical direction are formed at the rear portion of the right wing guide member 752, and the lower ends of the movable arms 754 and 755 rotate on the protrusions 752C and 752D, respectively. It is supported freely.

Vertical slits 754A and 755A are formed in the movable arms 754 and 755, and sliding bushes 753A and 753B are slidably fitted in the slits 754A and 755A.

As a result, the movable arms 754 and 755 swing in the vertical direction with the protrusions 752C and 752D as fulcrums. When the movable arms 754 and 755 swing in the vertical direction with the protrusions 752C and 752D as fulcrums, the sliding bushes 753A and 753B move along the guide grooves 752A and 752B, so that the right wing member 751 moves in the guide grooves 752A and 752B. Move up, down, left and right (including diagonal direction) so as to draw a dogleg along.

Gear portions 754B and 755B are formed on the movable arms 754 and 755, and the gear portions 754B and 755B mesh with the rack teeth 756A and 756B (see FIG. 36) formed on the rack 756.

As shown in FIG. 36, a right wing fixing base 757 is provided behind the right wing guide member 752, and a pair of protrusions 757A and 757B separated in the vertical direction are formed on the front surface of the right wing fixing base 757. ing.

The rack 756 is formed with a pair of vertically elongated slits 756C and 756D separated in the vertical direction. The protrusions 757A and 757B are slidably fitted to the slits 756C and 756D. As a result, the rack 756 can be moved in the vertical direction with respect to the right wing fixed base 757.

A slit 756E is formed in the upper part of the rack 756, and the slit 756E extends in the left-right direction.

A motor 758 is attached to the front surface of the right wing fixed base 757, and a gear 759 is attached to a rotating shaft (not shown) of the motor 758. The gear 759 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the right wing fixed base 757. The gear 759 meshes with a gear 760 rotatably supported at the rear of the right wing fixed base 757. These gears 759 and 760 are covered by a gear cover 763.

A fitting protrusion 760A is formed on the gear 760, and the fitting protrusion 760A is slidably fitted to the slit 756E. A semi-circular slit (not shown) is formed in the right wing fixing base 757, and when the gear 760 rotates, the fitting projection 760A is guided along the semi-circular slit. When the fitting protrusion 760A is guided along the semicircular slit, the fitting protrusion 760A pushes the rack 756 downward while moving along the slit 756E.

The right wing fixed base 757 and the rack 756 are connected by a coil spring 762, and the coil spring 762 urges the rack 756 upward.

A guide protrusion 761 is formed on the right side of the right wing member 751, and the guide protrusion 761 projects forward from the front surface of the right wing member 751. The guide protrusion 761 makes it difficult to visually recognize the rear of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4) when the right side movable staging member 750 moves to the standby position (position shown in FIG. 35) and the drive position (position shown in FIG. 38). It is in contact with the rear surface of the game board 40 in the area of the game board 40. As a result, the guide protrusion 761 becomes difficult to see from the player. The guide protrusion 761 of the present embodiment constitutes the contact portion of the present invention.

In the right side movable staging member 750 of the present embodiment, when the motor 758 rotates, the gear 759 rotates the gear 760. When the gear 760 rotates, the fitting protrusion 760A is guided along the semicircular slit, and the fitting protrusion 760A moves along the slit 756E of the rack 756.

As a result, the rack 756 moves in the vertical direction. When the rack 756 moves in the vertical direction, the gear portions 754B and 755B of the movable arms 754 and 755 that mesh with the rack teeth 756A and 756B of the rack 756 rotate. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the movable arms 754 and 755 swing in the vertical direction with the protrusions 752C and 752D as fulcrums.

Therefore, the sliding bushes 753A and 753B move along the guide grooves 752A and 752B, and the fitting projections 751C and 751D of the right wing member 751 move up and down and left and right along the guide grooves 752A and 752B. As a result, the right wing member 751 has a standby position (position shown in FIG. 35) waiting behind the game board 40 (see FIG. 4) and a drive position (position shown in FIG. 38) located diagonally downward to the left from the standby position. ) And move to.

Further, when the right wing member 751 moves from the drive position (position shown in FIG. 38) to the standby position diagonally upward to the right (position shown in FIG. 35), the rack 756 is pulled upward by the coil spring 762. As a result, the right wing member 751 which is a heavy object can be pulled up in the direction opposite to its own weight direction by the coil spring 762, and the drive of the motor 758 (see FIG. 36) can be assisted by the coil spring 762.

Further, when the right wing member 751 moves to the standby position and the drive position, the guide protrusion 761 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 40 in the area of the game board 40 where it is difficult to see the rear of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4). Contact. As a result, the right wing member 751 can be moved to the standby position and the drive position without swinging in the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the left movable effect member 770 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 39, the left wing member 771 is provided on the left movable effect member 770, and the left wing member 771 is decorated to imitate a wing. The left wing member 771 is provided with an inner lens 771A on the front surface, and an illuminated substrate 771B (see FIG. 41) is incorporated so as to be located behind the inner lens 771A. An LED (not shown) is provided on the illuminated substrate 771B (see FIG. 41), and the illuminated substrate 771B (see FIG. 41) controls the lighting of the LED to emit light through the inner lens 771A.

As shown in FIG. 40, a left wing guide member 772 is provided behind the left wing member 771, and the left wing guide member 772 has a pair of doglegged guide grooves 772A separated in the vertical direction. 772B is formed.

As shown in FIG. 41, a pair of fitting protrusions 771C and 771D separated in the vertical direction are formed at the rear portion of the left wing member 771, and the fitting protrusions 771C and 771D are sliding bushes 773A and 773B (FIG. 41). 40) is slidably fitted to the guide grooves 772A and 772B via the guide grooves 772A and 772B.

A pair of vertically separated protrusions 772C and 772D are formed on the rear portion of the left wing guide member 772, and the upper ends of the movable arms 774 and 775 are rotatably supported on the protrusions 772C and 772D, respectively.

Vertical slits 774A and 775A are formed in the movable arms 774 and 775, and sliding bushes 773A and 773B are slidably fitted in the slits 774A and 775A.

As a result, the movable arms 774 and 775 swing in the vertical direction with the protrusions 772C and 772D as fulcrums. When the movable arms 774 and 775 swing in the vertical direction with the protrusions 772C and 772D as fulcrums, the sliding bushes 773A and 773B move along the guide grooves 772A and 772B, so that the left wing member 771 moves in the guide grooves 772A and 772B. Move up, down, left and right (including diagonal direction) so as to draw a dogleg along.

Gear portions 774B and 775B are formed on the movable arms 774 and 775, and the gear portions 774B and 775B mesh with the rack teeth 776A and 776B formed on the rack 776.

As shown in FIG. 40, a left wing fixing base 777 is provided behind the left wing guide member 772, and a pair of protrusions 777A and 777B separated in the vertical direction are formed on the front surface of the left wing fixing base 777. ing.

The rack 776 is formed with a pair of vertically elongated slits 776C and 776D separated in the vertical direction. The protrusions 777A and 777B are slidably fitted to the slits 776C and 776D. This allows the rack 776 to move up and down with respect to the left wing fixed base 777.

A slit 776E is formed in the upper part of the rack 776, and the slit 776E extends in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 41, a motor 778 is attached to the rear portion of the left wing fixed base 777, and a gear 779 is attached to a rotating shaft (not shown) of the motor 778. As shown in FIG. 40, the gear 779 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the left wing fixed base 777. The gear 779 meshes with a gear 780 rotatably supported on the front surface of the left wing fixed base 777. These gears 779 and 780 are covered by a gear cover 783.

As shown in FIG. 40, a fitting protrusion 780A is formed on the gear 780, and the fitting protrusion 780A is slidably fitted to the slit 767E. When the gear 780 rotates, the fitting projection 780A moves upward along the slit 776E and pushes the rack 776 upward.

The left wing fixed base 777 and the rack 776 are connected by a coil spring 782, and the coil spring 782 urges the rack 776 upward.

A guide protrusion 781 is formed on the left side of the left wing member 771, and the guide protrusion 781 projects forward from the front surface of the left wing member 771. The guide protrusion 781 makes it difficult to visually recognize the rear of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4) when the left movable effect member 770 moves to the standby position (position shown in FIG. 39) and the drive position (position shown in FIG. 42). It is in contact with the rear surface of the game board 40 in the area of the game board 40. As a result, the guide protrusion 781 becomes difficult to see from the player. The guide protrusion 781 of the present embodiment constitutes the contact portion of the present invention.

In the left movable effect member 770 of the present embodiment, when the motor 778 (see FIG. 41) rotates, the gear 779 rotates the gear 780. As the gear 780 rotates, the fitting projection 780A moves along the slit 776E of the rack 776.

As a result, the rack 776 moves in the vertical direction. When the rack 776 moves in the vertical direction, the gear portions 774B and 775B of the movable arms 774 and 775 that mesh with the rack teeth 776A and 776B of the rack 776 rotate. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, the movable arms 774 and 775 swing in the vertical direction with the fitting projections 772C and 772D as fulcrums.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40, the sliding bushes 773A and 773B move along the guide grooves 772A and 772B, and the fitting projections 771C and 771D (see FIG. 41) of the left wing member 771 are the guide grooves 772A and 772B. It moves up, down, left, and right along (see FIG. 41). As a result, the left wing member 771 has a standby position (position shown in FIG. 39) that stands by behind the game board 40 (see FIG. 4) and a drive position (position shown in FIG. 42) that has moved diagonally upward to the right from the standby position. ) And move to.

Further, when the left wing member 771 moves from the standby position (position shown in FIG. 39) to the drive position diagonally upward to the right (position shown in FIG. 42), the rack 776 is pulled upward by the coil spring 782. As a result, the heavy left wing member 771 can be pulled up in the direction opposite to its own weight direction by the coil spring 782, and the drive of the motor 778 (see FIG. 41) can be assisted by the coil spring 782.

Further, when the left wing member 771 moves to the standby position and the drive position, the guide protrusion 781 is placed on the rear surface of the game board 40 in the area of the game board 40 where it is difficult to see the rear of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4). Contact. As a result, the left wing member 771 can be moved to the standby position and the drive position without swinging in the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a state in which the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 are moved from the standby position to the drive position when the game board 40 is viewed from the front. The right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 move so as to be close to each other when moving from the standby position to the drive position.

Further, when the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 move from the standby position to the drive position, the right side movable effect member 750 moves to the left and then moves downward, and the left side movable effect member 770. Is designed to move to the right and then to the top. Therefore, when the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 move from the standby position to the drive position, the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 move as if they were rotating (liquid crystal display). In front of the device 50, the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 are visually recognized as one effect member, and the one effect member appears to rotate counterclockwise). It is possible to enhance the staging effect.

As described above, the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 of the present embodiment have guide protrusions 761 and 781 that abut on the rear surface of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4), and the guide protrusions 761 and 781 have guide protrusions 761 and 781. When the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 move to the standby position and the drive position, the rear side of the game board 40 is on the right side so as to abut on the rear surface of the game board 40 in the area of the game board 40 which is difficult to see. It is provided on the movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770.

As a result, when the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 move to the standby position and the drive position, the guide protrusions 761 and 781 come into contact with the rear surface of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4), whereby the guide protrusions The 761 and 781 can be used as guides when the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 are moved, and the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 can be stably operated. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect while ensuring that the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 operate smoothly.

Further, by bringing the guide protrusions 761 and 781 into contact with the rear surface of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4), the decorations and the like formed on the front surfaces of the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 come into contact with the game board 40. Can be prevented. Therefore, the front surfaces of the right-side movable effect member 750 and the left-side movable effect member 770, which are decorated to imitate wings, can be protected from the game board 40.

Further, in a region where it is difficult to see the rear of the game board 40 (see FIG. 4), the guide protrusions 761 and 781 of the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 are brought into contact with the rear surface of the game board 40. The guide protrusions 761 and 781 of the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770 are not easily visible to the player. Therefore, the decorativeness of the game board 40 can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 20, a small movable staging member 790 (shown by a virtual line in FIG. 4) is provided on the front side of the right guide portion 413e. The small movable staging member 790 is driven by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown) so as to reciprocate between the diagonally upper left and the lower right. The small movable staging member 790 is not limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and may be driven by various actuators including, for example, a motor and gears.

[Modification example of sorting device]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the distribution device 421 will be described. 44 to 48 are views showing a first modification of the distribution device 421. 49 and 50 are views showing a second modification of the distribution device 421.

In the distribution device 800 according to the first modification and the second modification described below, the configurations other than the distribution drum 801 are the same as those of the distribution device 421 shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 44 to 50, the configuration of the distribution drum 801 will be specifically described, and the description of the configurations other than the distribution drum 801 will be omitted. The configuration of the distribution drum 801 is different between the first modification and the second modification of the distribution device 421.

[Distribution drum of the first modification]
As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution drum 801 according to the first modification includes a cylindrical (drum-shaped) drum body 802 having a central hole 801e into which a distribution axis 502 (see FIG. 5) can be inserted. Four groove portions 802A to 802D formed in the drum main body 802, extending along the central axis direction of the drum main body 802, and divided in the circumferential direction of the drum main body 802, and one end of the drum main body 802. It includes a projecting portion 803 that projects radially from the portion (left end) and a projecting portion 804 that projects radially from the other end (right end) of the drum body 802.

The four groove portions 802A to 802D are formed between the wall surfaces extending 90 degrees with respect to the central axis of the drum main body 802, and the blade portions 805 are formed between the adjacent groove portions 802A to 802D.

The blade portion 805 extends radially outward from the drum main body 802, and extends in a cross shape when viewed from the front toward the central axis direction of the drum main body 802. The blade portion 805 constitutes a partition wall that partitions the groove portions 802A to 802D in the circumferential direction of the drum main body 802.

The protrusion 803 is formed in a conical trapezoidal shape that is inclined in the axial direction of the drum main body 802 (see FIG. 47). Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 803 is formed with a notch 803A communicating with one of the four groove portions 802A to 802D.

The protrusion 804 is formed in a conical trapezoidal shape that is inclined in the axial direction of the drum body 802 (see FIG. 48). As shown in FIG. 44, the protrusion 804 is formed with a notch 804A communicating with the three groove portions 802A to 802C among the four groove portions 802A to 802D. A recess 806 is formed on the side surface of the protrusion 804, and a design lens 507 (see FIG. 5) is attached to the recess 806.

As shown in FIG. 45, one groove 802D among the four grooves 802A to 802D has the right side closed by the protrusion 804 and the left side open, and the other three sets of grooves 802A to 802C have the other three sets of grooves 802A to 802C. , The left side is closed by the protrusion 803 and the right side is open. The open portions of the protruding portions 803 and 804 are portions in which notches 803A and 804A are formed, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 46, a first cam lock 504 is attached to one end of the distribution drum 801 in the axial direction. Since the first cam lock 504 has the same configuration as the first cam lock 504 shown in FIG. 7, the description thereof will be omitted. Here, the distribution drum 801 constitutes the rotating member of the present invention, and the groove portions 802A to 802D constitute the receiving portion of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 46, each of the groove portions 802A to 802D is provided with a mounting surface portion 802a. The mounting surface portion 802a is composed of one surface of the blade portion 805 in the circumferential direction of the distribution drum 801. The mounting surface portion 802a temporarily mounts a game ball accepted in each of the groove portions 802A to 802D. Placed. In addition, "the game ball is temporarily placed" means that the game ball received in the grooves 802A to 802D rotates the distribution drum 801 by its own weight and falls on the mounting surface portion 802a. The state in which the ball stays (contacts).

In the distribution drum 801 the rotation center axis extends in the same direction as the left-right direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the mounting surface portion 802a is a flow path plate 423 (FIG. 4) so that the mounting surface portion 802a can be seen from above during rotation. See) protruding forward.

In other words, the surface of the blade portion 805 opposite to the mounting surface portion 802a is hidden behind the flow path plate 423 (see FIG. 4) and cannot be seen from above. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the flow path plate 423 (see FIG. 4) in the game area 41 (see FIG. 4) is always placed on the mounting surface portion 802a in the groove portions 802A to 802D, and the distribution drum 801 is set to one. Rotate only in the direction.

As shown in FIG. 44, the protruding portion 803 forming a part of the three groove portions 802A to 802C is provided on one side of the distribution drum 801 in the axial direction with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a, and is provided on one side of the game ball. It has a wall surface portion 803B that determines a distribution direction. That is, the wall surface portion 803B faces the notch 804A with respect to the axial direction of the distribution drum 801.

As shown in FIG. 47, the wall surface portion 803B is orthogonal to the first inclined surface portion 803e extending radially outward from the mounting surface portion 802a and the mounting surface portion 802a from the first inclined surface portion 803e. It is formed from a second inclined surface 803f extending radially outward of the drum main body 802.

The inclination angle θ1 (for example, 120 °) of the first inclined surface 803e with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a is formed to be larger than the inclination angle θ2 (for example, 90 °) of the second inclined surface 803f with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a. The second inclined surface 803f is composed of a vertical surface.

The second inclined surface 803f extends from the first inclined surface 803e to the upper side of the center point 807a of the game ball 807 mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a. In other words, the outer end 803u of the second inclined surface 803f in the radial direction of the drum main body 802 is located above the center point 807a of the game ball 807 mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a.

As shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 804 forming a part of one groove portion 802D is provided on the other side of the distribution drum 801 in the axial direction with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a, and the distribution direction of the game ball is determined. It has a wall surface portion 804B to be determined. That is, the wall surface portion 804B faces the notch 803A with respect to the axial direction of the distribution drum 801.

As shown in FIG. 48, the wall surface portion 804B is orthogonal to the first inclined surface portion 804e extending radially outward from the mounting surface portion 802a and the mounting surface portion 802a from the first inclined surface portion 804e. It is formed from a second inclined surface 804f extending radially outward of the drum main body 802.

The inclination angle θ1 (for example, 120 °) of the first inclined surface 804e with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a is formed to be larger than the inclination angle θ2 (for example, 90 °) of the second inclined surface 804f with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a. The second inclined surface 804f is composed of a vertical surface.

The second inclined surface 804f extends from the first inclined surface 804e to the upper side of the center point 807a of the game ball 807 mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a. In other words, the outer end 804u of the second inclined surface 804f in the radial direction of the drum main body 802 is located above the center point 807a of the game ball 807 mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a.

In the distribution device 800, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, when the groove portion 802C faces upward, the groove portion 802C is in a mode in which the game ball can be accepted. When the groove portion 802C flows down from the game ball from above in a state where the game ball can be received, the groove portion 802C receives the game ball and the game ball is placed on the mounting surface portion 802a. As a result, the groove portion 802C faces downward while the distribution drum 801 rotates due to the weight of the game ball.

At this time, the game ball moves to the right by the slope of the first inclined surface 803e, and is distributed to the right along the first inclined surface 803e. As a result, the game balls distributed by the distribution drum 801 are guided to the second path 423c (see FIG. 4) side.

Since the distribution drum 801 has a notch 804A to the right in three grooves 802A to 802C out of the four grooves 802A to 802D, the game ball has a probability of 3/4 of the second path 423c (FIG. 4). See) It is distributed to the side.

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, when the groove portion 802D faces upward, the groove portion 802D is in a mode in which the game ball can be accepted. When the groove portion 802D flows down from the game ball from above while the groove portion 802D can accept the game ball, the groove portion 802D receives the game ball and the game ball is placed on the mounting surface portion 802a. At this time, the groove portion 802D faces downward while the distribution drum 801 rotates due to the weight of the game ball.

At this time, the game ball moves to the left by the slope of the first inclined surface 804e, and is distributed to the left along the first inclined surface 804e. As a result, the game balls distributed by the distribution drum 801 are guided to the first path 423b (see FIG. 4) side.

Since only one of the four grooves 802A to 802D of the distribution drum 801 has a notch 803A to the left, the game ball has a 1/4 probability of the first path 423b (see FIG. 4). ) Is distributed to the side.

As described above, in the distribution device 800 of the first modification, the distribution drum 801 in which a plurality of groove portions 802A to 802D for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area 41 (see FIG. 4) are formed in the circumferential direction. The game ball accepted (placed) in the grooves 802A to 802D is distributed.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the groove portions 802A to 802D extend radially outward of the distribution drum 801 and are distributed to the mounting surface portion 802a on which the game ball is placed and the mounting surface portion 802a. The wall surface portions 803B and 804B provided on both sides of the drum 801 in the axial direction and determining the distribution direction of the game ball are provided, and the wall surface portions 803B and 804B have first inclined surfaces connected to the mounting surface portion 802a. The 803e and 804e and the second inclined surfaces 803f and 804f connected to the first inclined surfaces 803e and 804e are formed, and the inclination angle θ1 of the first inclined surfaces 803e and 804e with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a is placed. It is configured to be larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the second inclined surfaces 803f and 804f with respect to the surface portion 802a.

As a result, the inclination angles of the second inclined surfaces 803f and 804f can be made steeper than the inclination angles of the first inclined surfaces 803e and 804e. As a result, for example, when the flow speed of the game ball is high, the game ball received by the groove portions 802A to 802D runs up along the wall surface portions 803B and 804B, and the game ball rolls in an unintended direction. Can be prevented.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the distribution drum 801 and the flow path plate 423 (see FIG. 4), and it is possible to prevent the distribution drum 801 from rotating poorly. As a result, the gaming balls can be reliably distributed, and the reliability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Further, according to the distribution device 800 of the first modification, the second inclined surfaces 803f and 804f are mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a from the first inclined surfaces 803e and 804e, and the center point 807a of the game ball 807. It is stretched upward.

As a result, the center of gravity of the game ball 807 mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a can be set below the upper ends of the second inclined surfaces 803f and 804f, and the game ball 807 mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a can be placed on the wall surface. It is possible to more effectively prevent running up along the portions 803B and 804B. Further, when the distribution drum 801 is rotated by the own weight of the game ball, the game ball is surely guided in the direction guided along the inclined surfaces of the first inclined surfaces 803e and 804e of the groove portions 802A to 802D facing downward. Can be discharged to.

In the distribution drum 801 of the present embodiment, the slope connecting the outer ends 803u and 804u of the second inclined surfaces 803f and 804f and each of the protruding portions 803 and 804 is mounted on the outside (mounting surface portion 802a). Since it is inclined in the direction away from the placed game ball 807), the outer ends 803u and 804u protrude from the protruding portions 803 and 804 toward the inside (the side of the game ball 807 mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a). It has a shape like that. As a result, when the game ball hits the outer ends 803u and 804u, the game ball is guided in the distribution direction.

On the other hand, the first inclined surface is formed by inclining the slope connecting the outer ends 803u and 804u and the protruding portions 803 and 804 to the inside (the game ball 807 side mounted on the mounting surface portion 802a). The configuration may be such that the 803e, 804e and the second inclined surfaces 803f, 804f form a recess. In this case, the second inclined surfaces 803f and 804f can guide the game ball in the distribution direction. Even in this case, the inclination angle θ1 of the first inclined surface with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a is larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the second inclined surface with respect to the mounting surface portion 802a.

[Distribution drum of the second modification]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the distribution drum 801 of the second modification, the configuration of the first cam lock 504 (see FIG. 7) is different from that of the present embodiment, and the configuration of the blade portion is the first modification. It is different from the distribution drum of.

That is, as shown in FIG. 7, in the first cam lock 504 of the present embodiment, the convex portions of the gear portion 504e are formed at four locations (the concave portions are also four locations), but the vibration of the second modification is performed. As shown in FIG. 49, the gear portion 810A in the minute drum 801 has eight convex portions 810a and concave portions 801b. In this case, the gear portion of the second cam lock 811 also has eight convex portions 811a and concave portions 811b that mesh with the gear portion 810A.

According to such a configuration, the inclination angle of the slope continuous with the convex portion 810a and the concave portion 810b can be made larger than the inclination angle of the slope continuous with the convex portion and the concave portion of the gear portion 504e in the present embodiment. That is, in the distribution drum 801 of the second modification, the inclination angle of the slope connecting the lowermost portion of the concave portion 810b and the apex of the convex portion 810a is set to be convex with the lowermost portion of the concave portion of the gear portion 504e in the present embodiment. It can be larger than the inclination angle of the slope connecting the apex of the part.

Therefore, the unevenness of the gear portion 810A of the second modification can be made steeper than the unevenness of the gear portion 504e in the present embodiment. As a result, when the distribution drum 801 is rotated, the convex portions 810a form the rotation angle of the distribution drum 810 from the concave portion 811b of the second cam lock 811 to the convex portion 811a via the slope at four positions. It can be made smaller than the rotation angle of the distributed distribution drum 801.

Therefore, when the distribution drum 801 is rotating, the convex portion 810a of the gear portion 810A is in the middle of the slope of the second cam lock 811 due to the pressing force of the second cam lock 811 urged by the spring member 506 (see FIG. 5). It is possible to reliably prevent the distribution drum 801 from locking in the rotation direction in the state of being stopped at.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the blade portion 812 in the distribution drum 801 of the second modification is in the circumferential direction with respect to the blade portion 805 (see FIG. 44) in the distribution drum 801 of the first modification. It has a thin structure.

Specifically, the blade portion 812 gradually becomes thinner as its tip side goes outward in the radial direction, and the tip portion has the thinnest shape. Therefore, the circumferential width of the top surface 812a of the blade portion 812 is smaller than the circumferential width of the top surface of the blade portion 805 (see FIG. 44) in the first modification. Therefore, the area of the top surface 812a of the blade portion 812 that comes into contact with the game ball is smaller than that of the blade portion 805 (see FIG. 44) in the first modification.

According to such a configuration, when the flowing game ball is received in the groove portions 802A to 802D, the game ball is prevented from being left on the top surface 812a of the blade portion 812, and is distributed. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the drum 801 and the flow path plate 423 (see FIG. 4). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotation failure of the distribution drum 801 from occurring and to distribute the game balls more reliably, and it is possible to more effectively improve the reliability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 51 shows a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 that controls a game and a sub-control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), and a main RAM 103 (read / write memory).

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101, and have a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, for example, a program for causing the main CPU 101 to execute the processes shown in FIGS. 52 to 61, various tables, and the like. There is.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

Further, the main control circuit 100 commands commands to the reset clock pulse generation circuit 104 that generates a clock pulse of a predetermined frequency, the initial reset circuit 105 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and the sub-control circuit 200 described later. Is provided with a serial communication IC 106 for supplying the above. Further, these reset clock pulse generation circuit 104, initial reset circuit 105, and serial communication IC 106 are connected to the main CPU 101.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 104 generates a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute the system timer interrupt process described later.

The initial reset circuit 105 includes a capacitor and a watchdog timer, and when the voltage applied to the capacitor reaches a certain value, a reset signal is transmitted to the main CPU 101. Further, the initial reset circuit 105 discharges to release the voltage applied to the capacitor by receiving a predetermined control signal from the main CPU 101.

The serial communication IC 106 is connected to the main CPU 101, the sub control circuit 200, and the payout / launch control circuit 300, and includes a buffer for the sub control board and a buffer for the payout / launch control circuit.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 100. For example, various devices that respond to signals from the main control circuit 100 include a special symbol display device 431 that displays a special symbol in a variable manner in a special symbol game, a round number display device 432 that displays the number of rounds in a round game, and a special symbol. The first special symbol hold display device 433a and the second special symbol hold display device 433b for displaying the number of holdings of the variable display of the special symbol in the game, and the ordinary symbol display device for variablely displaying the normal symbol as the identification symbol in the normal symbol game. 434, a normal symbol hold display device 435 that displays the number of holdings of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game, a normal electric accessory solenoid 111 in which the flat plate member 415a is in a protruding state or a retracted state, and a shutter member 422a are driven. A large winning opening solenoid 112 or the like is connected so that the large falling opening 423e (large winning opening 418) is opened or closed. Further, a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits, and an external terminal board used for data transmission to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall are connected.

Further, various sensors are connected to the main control circuit 100. For example, in the main control circuit 100, a count sensor 113 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 418, and a game ball in the general winning opening 419a, 419b, 419c. A general winning ball sensor 114a that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when a prize is won, and a general winning ball that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 419d. When a game ball enters the ball sensor 114b and the ball passage detector 416, and when the game ball wins a prize in the ball passage detection sensor 115 and the first starting port 414a that supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100. , A second starting port winning ball sensor 116a that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100, and a second that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100 when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 414b. When a game ball enters the starting port winning ball sensor 116b, the first special out port 420b, and the second special out port 420c, the first out ball detection sensor 117a, which supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 100, The second out ball detection sensor 117b, the backup clear switch 118 that clears the backup data at the time of power failure or the like according to the operation of the manager of the game hall, etc. are connected. In the present embodiment, winning means that the game ball passes through the area where each of the above sensors is provided.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. A payout device 71 for paying out a game ball, a launcher 20 for firing a game ball, and a card unit 400 are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300. The card unit 400 can be transmitted and received to and from the lending operation unit 401 that outputs a signal requesting the card unit 400 to lend the game ball by the operation of the player.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 400, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 71. Have the payout device 71 pay out the game ball. Further, the payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle when the launch handle 21 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the game is played. Controls the firing of the ball.

Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 50, control related to sound generated from the speaker 14, control of lamps including decorative lamps, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. ..

In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, and the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, it may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 is a movable effect device control circuit 205 that drives a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, an RTC 204, a lower movable effect member 610, an upper movable effect member 650, a right side movable effect member 750, and a left side movable effect member 770. , A display control circuit 210 for controlling the display in the liquid crystal display device 50, a voice control circuit 220 for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 14, a lamp control circuit 230 for controlling the lamp 15 including a decorative lamp, and an effect button. The first operation means control circuit 240a for receiving the operation signal based on the operation of the player from 16, the second operation means control circuit 240b for receiving the operation signal based on the operation of the player from the touch sensor 425, and the light source 426b of the illumination array 426. It is composed of an LED control circuit 250 that controls light emission. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program and various tables for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as the storage means for storing the program, the table, etc., but the storage medium is not limited to this and can be read by a computer equipped with the control means. If it is, it may be another embodiment, and may be recorded on a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge. Further, these programs may not be recorded in advance, but may be those that are downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, each of the programs may be recorded on a separate storage medium.

The work RAM 203 stores the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used. RTC204 clocks the current time.

The display control circuit 210 is a circuit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 50, and is an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, and an image data ROM. It is composed of a frame buffer for buffering image data, a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 210 is a device capable of performing various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 50 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 210 displays various image data such as identification symbol image data, background image data, effect image data, etc. indicating the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device 50 in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be used is temporarily stored in the frame buffer.

Then, the display control circuit 210 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 50 at a predetermined timing, so that the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. That is, the display control circuit 210 controls the liquid crystal display device 50 to display an image related to the game.

Further, the voice control circuit 220 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

This sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 14. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 14.

The lamp control circuit 230 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The first operation means control circuit 240a transmits the operation signal received from the effect button 16 to the sub CPU 201. The sub CPU 201 supplies data for performing an effect according to the operation signal to the display control circuit 210 and the like.

The second operating means control circuit 240b transmits the operating signal received from the touch sensor 425 to the sub CPU 201. The sub CPU 201 supplies data for performing an effect according to the operation signal to the display control circuit 210 and the like.

The movable effect device control circuit 205 includes a motor 612 that drives the lower movable effect member 610, a motor 652 that drives the upper movable effect member 650, a motor 661, a motor 758 that drives the right side movable effect member 750, and a left side movable effect member. A movable staging device 205A equipped with a motor 778 for driving the 770 and an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown) for driving the small movable staging member 790 is connected.

The movable effect control circuit 205 drives the movable effect device 205A in a jackpot game state, a normal game state, or the like to drive the lower movable effect member 610, the upper movable effect member 650, the right side movable effect member 750, and the left side movable effect member. An effect of moving the 770 to the standby position and the drive position, an effect of reciprocating the small movable effect member 790 in the diagonally vertical direction, and the like are executed.

The LED control circuit 250 is provided on the LED provided on the lower movable effect member 610, the LED provided on the upper movable effect member, the LED provided on the right side movable effect member 750 and the left side movable effect member 770, and the effect button 16. Data in which a drive circuit for supplying a current to the LED group 18 composed of the LEDs and the light source 426b of the illumination array 426, a plurality of types of illumination displays, and a light emission pattern for executing the display of the LED group 18 are stored. It is composed of ROM and the like.

Next, the processing executed by the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 of the present embodiment will be described. First, a process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. The main CPU 101 reads a program from the main ROM 102 and executes the main control main process in response to the power being turned on. Further, the main CPU 101 may interrupt the main control main process and execute the system timer interrupt process even when the main control main process is being executed. The main CPU 101 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds), and executes a system timer interrupt process accordingly.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The system timer interrupt process of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52, 53 and 54. As shown in FIG. 52, in step S10, a process of saving each register is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S11.

In step S11, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating a random number. For example, the main CPU 101 updates random numbers such as a big hit determination random number counter, a big hit symbol random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, an effect condition determination random number counter, and a look-ahead advance notice determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for jackpot determination and the random number counter for jackpot symbol will lack fairness. Therefore, in order to secure this, the random number counter is updated at a fixed timing every 2 msec. I try to do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S12.

In step S12, the switch input detection process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input to the switch. For example, the main CPU 101 includes a count sensor 113 (see FIG. 51) provided in the large winning opening 418 (see FIG. 4) and a general winning ball sensor provided in the general winning openings 419a, 419b, 419c (see FIG. 4). The ball passage detection provided in the 114a (see FIG. 51), the general winning ball sensor 114b (see FIG. 51) provided in the general winning opening 419d (see FIG. 4), and the ball passage detector 416 (see FIG. 4). The first starting port winning ball sensor 116a and the second starting port winning ball sensor 116b provided in the sensor 115 (see FIG. 51), the first starting port 414a, and the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4) (see FIG. 51). ), And by receiving detection signals from the first out ball detection sensor 117a and the second out ball detection sensor 117b provided in the first special out port 420b and the second special out port 420c (see FIG. 4). It is determined whether each switch has detected the game ball. When the main CPU 101 determines that it has been detected, the main CPU 101 updates the large winning opening prize ball counter, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the starting opening winning ball counter, and the like according to the detection. The details of the switch input process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S13.

In step S13, the timer update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 measures the opening time of the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200, and the opening time of the big winning opening 418 (see FIG. 4) that is opened when a big hit occurs. The process of updating various timers, such as the big winning opening time timer for the game, is executed. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S14.

In step S14, command output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 supplies various commands to the sub-control circuit 200. Examples of these various commands include a demo display command derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50, a derived symbol specification command described later, a variation pattern specification command described later, a jackpot type command described later, a jackpot start command described later, and a jackpot start command described later. It includes a small hit start command, a start opening winning command, an out ball command, etc., which will be described later. In this process, in addition to various commands, the main CPU 101 supplies data indicating the value of the probability variation state fluctuation counter described later and data indicating the value of the time reduction state fluctuation counter described later to the sub-control circuit 200. .. Further, the main CPU 101 is used to open and close the large winning opening solenoid 112 (see FIG. 51) for driving the shutter member 422a of the large falling opening 423e (large winning opening 418) and the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415. A solenoid power supply for driving the object solenoid 111 (see FIG. 51) is supplied. Further, in the start opening winning detection process (see FIG. 54), which will be described later, a variation pattern of the identification symbol (derived symbol) for the effect to be displayed in the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50 is determined. If so, the main CPU 101 generates a variation pattern designation command indicating the determination result and supplies the command to the sub-control circuit 200. Further, when it is determined in the start opening winning detection process (see FIG. 54) described later that the look-ahead advance notice is executed, the main CPU 101 generates a look-ahead notice determination command indicating the determination result in the sub-control circuit 200. Supply. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S15.

In step S15, game information output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 transfers the game information, which is information related to the game, processed by the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc. to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit, and the like. 300, output to an external device (for example, a hall computer or a calling device). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S16.

In step S16, a process of returning each register is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning each register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Switch input detection process]
The subroutine (switch input detection process) executed in step S12 of FIG. 52 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In step S20, the start opening winning detection process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a first starting port winning ball sensor 116a and a second starting opening winning ball sensor 116b (see FIG. 51) provided in the first starting port 414a and the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4). When the detection signal from is received, the jackpot determination random value and the jackpot symbol random value are acquired, the number of reserved special symbols is added up to 4 up to 4, and the payout information is stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. set. The details of the start opening winning detection process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S21.

In step S21, the general winning opening passage detection process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 is a general winning ball sensor 114a (see FIG. 51) provided in the general winning opening 419a, 419b, 419c (see FIG. 4), and a general winning opening 419d (see FIG. 4). When the detection signal from the winning ball sensor 114b (see FIG. 51) is received, the payout information corresponding to the winning of the general winning openings 419a, 419b, 419c, and 419d is set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S22.

In step S22, the large winning opening passage detection process is performed. In this process, when the main CPU 101 receives a detection signal from the count sensor 113 (see FIG. 51) provided in the large winning opening 418 (see FIG. 4), the main CPU 101 pays out corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening 418. Information is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S23. The payout information corresponding to the winning of the first starting opening 414a, the second starting opening 414b, the general winning opening 419a, 419b, 419c, 419d, and the large winning opening 418 set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 is used as a prize ball control command. It is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout / launch control circuit 300 causes the payout device 71 to pay out the game ball based on the supplied prize ball control command. As described above, the payout device 71 functions as a game value-giving means capable of adding a predetermined game value based on the fact that the game medium has passed through either the third passing area or the fourth passing area.

In step S23, the ball passage detector passage detection process is performed. In this process, when the main CPU 101 receives the detection signal from the ball passage detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 51) provided in the ball passage detector 416 (see FIG. 4), the lottery result (random) regarding the normal symbol is obtained. (Numerical value) is acquired, and up to 4 pieces are added to the normal symbol hold storage number counter (holding number) stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S24, the first out port passage detection process is performed. In this process, when the main CPU 101 receives a detection signal from the first out ball detection sensor 117a (see FIG. 51) provided in the first special out port 420b (see FIG. 4), the main CPU 101 issues a first out ball command. When the detection signal is stored in the main RAM 103 and is received from the second out ball detection sensor 117b (see FIG. 51) provided in the second special out port 420c (see FIG. 4), the second out ball command is sent to the main RAM 103. Performs the process of storing in.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
The subroutine (starting opening winning detection process) executed in step S20 of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In step S30, a process of determining whether or not the sensor has been detected by the first start opening winning ball sensor is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been received from the first start opening winning ball sensor 116a. If the detection signal has been received from the first starting port winning ball sensor 116a, the process is transferred to step S31, and if the detection signal has not been received from the first starting opening winning ball sensor 116a, the process proceeds to step S39. Move the process.

In step S31, the payout information set process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the payout information corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 414a (see FIG. 4) in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S32.

In step S32, a process of determining whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes is smaller than "4" is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number based on the winning of the first starting port 414a (see FIG. 4) is smaller than "4", and if the reserved number is smaller than "4", the step. The process is transferred to S33, and if the number of reserved items is "4" or more, the process is transferred to step S39.

In step S33, a process of adding "1" to the number of reserved first start opening prizes is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved pieces stored in the main RAM 103 based on the winning of the first starting port 414a (see FIG. 4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S34.

In step S34, random number acquisition / storage processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the jackpot determination random number value of the special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts the jackpot symbol random number value from the jackpot symbol random number counter. Then, the main CPU 101 stores the extracted big hit determination random value and the big hit symbol random value in the first special symbol start storage area for storing the random value based on the winning of the first start port 414a (see FIG. 4) in the main RAM 103. Performs the process of storing in. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is the first special symbol start storage area (0). The judgment result based on the hit judgment random number stored in) is derived and displayed by a special symbol, and various random value values acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 414a (see FIG. 4) during the fluctuation of the special symbol are , The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) are stored in order. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S35.

In step S35, a special symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot random number determination table (see FIG. 73) and the jackpot symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 74) based on the jackpot determination random number value and the jackpot symbol random number value extracted in step S34. , A special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is determined, and data indicating the special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, the special symbol includes a jackpot symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won, a small hit symbol indicating that a small hit has been won, and a jackpot or a small hit indicating that neither has been won. Lost symbols and are included.

[Big hit random number judgment table]
Here, the jackpot random number determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number determination table is a jackpot random number determination table referred to when a random number value based on a prize of the first starting port 414a (see FIG. 4) shown in FIG. 73 (a) is extracted. The jackpot random number determination table (second starting port) that is referred to when the random number values based on the winnings of the first starting port) and the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4) shown in FIG. 73 (b) are extracted. And are stored in the main ROM 102. In the jackpot random number determination table, the determination value data is associated with the jackpot determination random number value in which a predetermined width is set for each probability variation flag indicating whether the game state is a probability variation state or a non-probability variation state. Here, the random value for determining the jackpot is 65536 (0 to 65535), and it is a random determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot that is the result of a lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 414a or the second starting port 414b. It represents a numerical value, and specifically, is a random value indicating a lottery result of a special symbol. Further, the probability change flag is stored in the main RAM 103 and is a flag indicating whether or not the probability change state is selected as the game state after the end of the big hit game state. If the value is "0", the probability change flag is not the probability change state. It indicates that (non-probable change state), and when the value is "1", it indicates that it is a probable change state. In this way, whether or not it is in the probabilistic state is flag-managed by the main control circuit 100, and the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not it is in the probable change state. Further, the selection rate shown in FIG. 73 represents the probability that the corresponding determination value data is selected.

Specifically, in the jackpot random number determination table (first starting port) shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the probability variation flag is “0” (non-probability variation state), the jackpot determination random number value “777-943” (width 167) ) Is associated with the big hit judgment value data, the big hit judgment random number value "1-300" (width 300) is associated with the small hit judgment value data, and the random numbers other than these are associated with the loss judgment value data. ing. Further, in the jackpot random number determination table (first start port), in the case of the probability variation flag "1" (probability variation state), the jackpot determination value data is associated with the jackpot determination random number value "777-1277" (width 500). The small hit determination value data is associated with the big hit determination random number value "1-300" (width 300), and the loss determination value data is associated with the random numbers other than these. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first starting port 414a is won in the non-probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (hereinafter, also referred to as the big hit probability) is 1/392, and the probability of becoming a small hit (hereinafter, also referred to as a big hit probability). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a small hit probability) is 1/218. On the other hand, when the first starting port 414a is won in the probabilistic state, the big hit probability is 1/131 and the small hit probability is 1/218.

Further, the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port) shown in FIG. 73 (b) hits the jackpot determination random number value "777-943" (width 167) when the probability variation flag is "0" (non-probability variation state). Judgment value data is associated, and loss determination value data is associated with other random numbers. Further, in the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port), in the case of the probability variation flag "1" (probability variation state), the jackpot determination value data is associated with the jackpot determination random number value "777-1277" (width 500). Loss determination value data is associated with random numbers other than this. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second starting port 414b is won in the non-probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (hereinafter, also referred to as the big hit probability) is 1/392, and the small hit is won. There is no. On the other hand, when the first starting port 414a is won in the probable change state, the big hit probability is 1/131, and the small hit is not won.

[Big hit symbol random number judgment table]
Next, the jackpot symbol random number determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random number determination table is referred to when a random number value based on the winning of the first starting port 414a (see FIG. 4) shown in FIG. 74 (a) is extracted. The jackpot symbol random number determination table (second) referred to when the random number value based on the winning of the table (first starting port) and the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4) shown in FIG. 74 (b) is extracted. The start port) and are stored in the main ROM 102. In the jackpot symbol random number determination table, a symbol designation command is associated with a jackpot symbol random number value for which a predetermined width is set. Here, the jackpot symbol random value represents a random number value that determines the jackpot symbol when the result of the lottery is a jackpot. Further, the symbol designation command represents a jackpot symbol designation command according to a jackpot symbol random value.

Specifically, in the jackpot symbol random number determination table (first starting port) shown in FIG. 74 (a), the jackpot symbol random number value "0 to 19" is associated with the symbol designation command "z0", and the jackpot symbol random number value. The symbol designation command "z1" is associated with "20 to 39", the symbol designation command "z2" is associated with the jackpot symbol random number value "40 to 59", and the symbol designation is associated with the jackpot symbol random number value "60 to 79". The command "z3" is associated, and the symbol designation command "z4" is associated with the jackpot symbol random number values "80 to 99". As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first starting port 414a is won and a big hit is won, the symbol designation commands "z0" to "z4" are equally selected with a probability of 20/100.

Further, in the jackpot symbol random number determination table (second starting port) shown in FIG. 74 (b), the jackpot symbol random number value "0 to 19" is associated with the symbol designation command "z0", and the jackpot symbol random number value "20 to" The symbol designation command "z4" is associated with "99". As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second starting port 414b is won and the big hit is won, the symbol designation command "z0" is selected at 20/100, and the symbol designation command "z4" is selected at 80/100. Be selected. That is, when the second starting port 414b is won and the jackpot is won, the probability that the symbol designation command "z4" is selected is higher than when the first starting opening 414a is won and the jackpot is won.

Returning to FIG. 54, in step S35, in detail, the main CPU 101 is shown in FIG. 73.
With reference to the jackpot random number determination table (first starting port) shown in (a) and the jackpot symbol random number determination table (first starting port) shown in FIG. 74 (a), based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted in step S34. , Determines the symbol designation command associated with the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 431. Specifically, when the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is associated with the jackpot determination value data in the jackpot random number determination table (first starting port), the main CPU 101 has extracted the jackpot in step S34. Based on the symbol random number value, the jackpot symbol random number determination table (first start port) is referred to, and one of the symbol designation commands "z0" to "z4" is selected. Further, when the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is associated with the small hit determination value data in the jackpot random number determination table (first starting port), the main CPU 101 uses the symbol designation command “z11” (FIG. See 75). Further, when the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is associated with the loss determination value data in the jackpot random number determination table (first starting port), the main CPU 101 uses the symbol designation command "z5" (FIG. 75). See). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S36.

In step S36, the jackpot determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot random number determination table (first starting port) shown in FIG. 73A, and the jackpot determination random number value extracted in step S34 is associated with the jackpot determination value data. Determine if. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S37.

In step S37, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the variation pattern random value, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random value, the special symbol determined in step S35, and the result of the jackpot determination process in step S36. The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 75), and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 431 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

[Variation pattern determination table]
Here, the fluctuation pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 75. The variation pattern determination table is stored in the main ROM 102, and the symbol designation commands (“z0”, “z1”, “z2”, “z3”, “z4”, “z5”, “z11” are used for a plurality of types of variation patterns. ) And the winning type (“missing”, “small hit”, “big hit”) are associated with each other. Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table, data indicating the fluctuation time of the special symbol is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation time is information that may be used as the execution time of the effect in the fluctuation of 1 including the case of being used as the end condition of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation of 1 and for the fluctuation pattern of 1. When 1 variation time is associated, when 1 variation pattern is associated with a plurality of variation times, when 1 variation pattern is associated with 1 variation time, In addition, the correspondence of various information is considered, such as when a plurality of fluctuation times are associated with a plurality of fluctuation patterns, but on the other hand, one fluctuation pattern corresponds to one fluctuation. It is considered that the relationship between the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time is composed of a combination of each storage pattern, such as when there is a fluctuation and when a plurality of fluctuation patterns correspond to one fluctuation. Be done.

Returning to FIG. 54, in step S37, the main CPU 101 supplies data indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 fluctuates and displays the special symbol at the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 75) based on the data showing the fluctuation pattern, and is associated with the symbol designation command. Stop display. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a fluctuation pattern designation command based on the first start port winning. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S38.

In step S38, the look-ahead notice determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice by referring to the random value for pre-reading notice determination and the look-ahead notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice.

Here, the look-ahead notice determination table will be described. The look-ahead notice determination table is stored in the main ROM 102 and is associated with each variation pattern determined according to the number of reserved pieces and a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice. The judgment value is associated more with the fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time. That is, the longer the fluctuation time is, the easier it is to determine that the look-ahead notice is executed. When the main CPU 101 decides to execute the look-ahead notice, the main CPU 101 transmits a look-ahead notice determination command including information to execute the look-ahead notice to the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200. As a look-ahead notice, the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received look-ahead notice determination command. The pre-reading notice is not limited to the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol, as long as it is an effect accompanied by a change such as a change of the effect stage or a change of the effect mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S39.

In step S39, the command set process for increasing the number of pending prizes for the first start opening is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a hold number increase command for driving the first special symbol hold display device 433a (see FIG. 4) in response to the process of adding "1" to the hold number value in step S33. The process of storing in the RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 supplies the hold number increase command to the first special symbol hold display device 433a. The first special symbol hold display device 433a turns on the display lamp based on the supplied hold number increase command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S40.

In step S40, a process of determining whether or not the sensor has been detected by the second starting opening winning ball sensor is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been received from the second start opening winning ball sensor 116b. If the detection signal has been received from the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, the process is transferred to step S41, and if the detection signal has not been received from the second starting opening winning ball sensor 116b, this subroutine is executed. finish.

In step S41, the payout information set process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the payout information corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4) in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S42.

In step S42, a process of determining whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes is smaller than "4" is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number based on the winning of the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4) is smaller than "4", and if the reserved number is smaller than "4", the step. The process is transferred to S43, and if the number of pending items is "4" or more, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S43, a process of adding "1" to the number of reserved prizes in the second starting opening is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved pieces stored in the main RAM 103 based on the winning of the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S44.

In step S44, random number acquisition / storage processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the jackpot determination random number value of the special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), extracts the jackpot symbol random number value from the jackpot symbol random number counter, and further reads ahead. The random number value for pre-reading advance notice is extracted from the random number counter for advance notice determination. Then, the main CPU 101 stores the extracted random value for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol random value, and random number value for pre-reading advance notice determination, and stores the random number value based on the winning of the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4) in the main RAM 103. The process of storing in the second special symbol start storage area is performed. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is the second special symbol start storage area (0). The judgment result based on the hit judgment random number stored in) is derived and displayed by a special symbol, and various random value values acquired by winning a prize in the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4) during the fluctuation of the special symbol are , The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) are stored in order. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S45.

In step S45, a special symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot random number determination table (see FIG. 73) and the jackpot symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 74) based on the jackpot determination random number value and the jackpot symbol random number value extracted in step S44. , A special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is determined, and data indicating the special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot random number determination table (second start port) shown in FIG. 73 (b) and the jackpot symbol random number determination table (second start port) shown in FIG. 74 (b), and steps S44. Based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted in step 1, the symbol designation command associated with the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is determined. Specifically, when the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is associated with the jackpot determination value data in the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port), the main CPU 101 has extracted the jackpot in step S44. Based on the symbol random number value, the jackpot symbol random number determination table (second start port) is referred to, and either the symbol designation command "z0" or "z4" is selected. Further, the main CPU 101 selects the symbol designation command "z5" when the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is associated with the loss determination value data in the jackpot random number determination table (second start port). .. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S46.

In step S46, the jackpot determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port) shown in FIG. 73B, and the jackpot determination random number value extracted in step S44 is associated with the jackpot determination value data. Determine if. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S47.

In step S47, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the variation pattern random value, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random value, the special symbol determined in step S45, and the result of the jackpot determination process in step S46. The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 75), and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 431 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

Further, the main CPU 101 supplies data indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the special symbol display device 431. The special symbol display device 431 fluctuates and displays the special symbol at the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 75) based on the data showing the fluctuation pattern, and is associated with the symbol designation command. Stop display. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a fluctuation pattern designation command based on the second start opening winning. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S48.

In step S48, the look-ahead notice determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the random value for pre-reading notice determination with the determination value of the pre-reading notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice, and gives the pre-reading notice, as in step S38. Decide whether to execute. When the main CPU 101 decides to execute the look-ahead notice, the main CPU 101 transmits a look-ahead notice determination command including information to execute the look-ahead notice to the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200. As a look-ahead notice, the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received look-ahead notice determination command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S49.

In step S49, a command set process for increasing the number of pending prizes for the second starting opening is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a hold number increase command for driving the second special symbol hold display device 433b (see FIG. 4) in response to the process of adding "1" to the hold number value in step S43. The process of storing in the RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 supplies the hold number increase command to the second special symbol hold display device 433b. The second special symbol hold display device 433b turns on the display lamp based on the supplied hold number increase command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol and a variation pattern for each winning of the first starting port 414a or the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4). Further, even if the main CPU 101 wins a prize in the first starting port 414a or the second starting port 414b when the number of holdings is "0" and the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 101 once holds the first special symbol holding display. The device 433a or the second special symbol hold display device 433b is turned on, then immediately turned off, and the variable display of the special symbol is started. The main CPU 101 does not turn on the first special symbol hold display device 433a or the second special symbol hold display device 433b once as a hold, and after determining that the number of holds is not "0" as an internal process, it is special. The design may be displayed in a variable manner.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main control main process executed by the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, and 61. As shown in FIG. 55, the initial setting is performed in step S50. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the boot program from the main ROM 102 in response to the power being turned on, and also performs a process of initializing the flags and the like stored in the main RAM 103 or returning to the state before the power is cut off. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S51.

In step S51, the initial value random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S52.

In step S52, a special symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 101 has the jackpot random number determination table (first starting port) shown in FIG. 73A or FIG. 73 based on the jackpot determination random number value extracted in step S34 or step S43. With reference to the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port) shown in (b), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit or small hit) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 103. .. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S53. The main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S52 determines whether or not to displace the second displacement member to the third position on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage region. Functions as a means.

In step S53, the normal symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value according to the detection signal from the ball passage detection sensor 115, refers to the normal symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 102, and draws a normal symbol. It is determined whether or not the player has won the prize, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 103. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the flat plate member 415a of the normal electric accessory 415 is in a retracted state, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S54. The main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S53 determines whether or not to displace the first displacement member to the first position on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage region. Functions as a means.

In step S54, the symbol display device control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol display device 431 and a normal symbol display device 434 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S52 and S53 and the result of the normal symbol control process. A process of storing a control signal for driving and is stored in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits this control signal to the special symbol display device 431 or the normal symbol display device 434. The special symbol display device 431 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. The ordinary symbol display device 434 displays a variable display and a stop display of the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S55.

In step S55, game information data generation processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer, etc., and storing the game information data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S56.

In step S56, the storage / game state data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 according to the jackpot flag, the probability change flag, and the time reduction flag, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S51. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the current gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probable change state, and a time saving state) by receiving the storage / gaming state data.

[Special symbol control processing]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) executed in step S52 of FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. In FIG. 56, the numerical values drawn on the sides of steps S60 to S69 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps and are stored in the storage area functioning as the control state flags in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103, and advances the special symbol game.

In step S60, a process of loading the control state flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S61.

In steps S61 to S69, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag, as will be described later. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in steps S61 to S69 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 101 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the process ends without executing the process in each step, and other subroutines are executed.

In step S61, a special symbol memory check process is performed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved special symbols when the control state flag is a value (00) indicating the special symbol storage check. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S62.

In step S62, the special symbol fluctuation time management process is performed. In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (01) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the value (02) indicating the special symbol display time management is set as the control state flag. Set and set the waiting time (for example, 1 second) after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S63 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S63.

In step S63, the special symbol display time management process is performed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the control state flag is a value (02) indicating the special symbol display time management, and when the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation, a hit (big hit or a big hit or) It is judged whether or not it is a small hit). When the main CPU 101 is a hit, the value (03) indicating the jackpot start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S64 after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (08) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S69. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S64 or step S69.

In step S64, the jackpot start interval management process is performed. In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (03) indicating the jackpot start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval has elapsed, the value (04) indicating that the jackpot is open. To the control status flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S65. Further, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the round count command and the round start command in the main RAM 103. Here, the round count command and the round start command set in the process of this step are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 has the round count command and the round start command. Recognize the start of the round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S65.

In step S65, the process of opening the large winning opening is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 30 seconds) of the large winning opening 418 (see FIG. 4) in the large winning opening opening time timer, and the large winning opening 418 read from the main ROM 102. The data for releasing the data is stored in the main RAM 103. Then, in the process of step S14 of FIG. 52, the main CPU 101 reads out the data for opening the large winning opening 418 (see FIG. 4) stored in the main RAM 103, and the solenoid power supply for opening the large winning opening 418. Is supplied to the large winning opening solenoid 112 (see FIG. 51) that drives the shutter member 422a of the shutter device 422. Then, after the opening upper limit time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets a value (05) indicating monitoring of the remaining ball in the large winning opening to the control state flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S66. Further, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the round end command in the main RAM 103. Here, the round end command set in the process of this step is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S66. The main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S65 functions as a second displacement member control means that displaces the second displacement member to the third position a predetermined number of times based on the positive determination by the second determination means. do.

In step S66, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening is performed. In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (05) indicating monitoring of the remaining ball in the large winning opening, and when the monitoring time of the remaining ball in the large winning opening has elapsed, the large winning opening winning counter is “7” or more. It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the number of times the large winning opening opening count is equal to or more than the predetermined number (the final round) is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07) indicating the jackpot game end interval in the control state flag. On the other hand, when none of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (06) indicating the waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S67 or step S68.

In step S67, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (06) indicating the waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the large winning opening opening count counter. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets a value (04) indicating that the big winning opening is open in the control state flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S65. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S65.

In step S68, the jackpot end interval process is performed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (07) indicating the jackpot end interval and the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed. The value indicating the end (08) is set in the control state flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S69. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S69.

In step S69, the special symbol game end process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00) indicating the special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (08) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S61. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In this way, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol game by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the control state flags are set to (00), (01), (02), (08). By setting in order, the processes of step S61, step S62, step S63, and step S69 shown in FIG. 56 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit, the control state flags are set to (00), (01), (02), (03). By setting in order, the processes of step S61, step S62, step S63, and step S64 shown in FIG. 56 are executed at predetermined timings, and control to the big hit or small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit or small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of (04), (05), (06), and is shown in FIG. 56. The processes of step S65, step S66, and step S67 are executed at predetermined timings, and a big hit or a small hit game is executed. When the end condition of the big hit or small hit game is satisfied, the processes of steps S68 and S69 shown in FIG. 56 are executed at predetermined timings by setting (07) and (08) in this order. End the big hit or small hit game.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
The subroutine (special symbol storage check process) executed in step S61 of FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. In step S70, a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (00) indicating a special symbol memory check is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value (00) indicating a special symbol storage check, the process shifts to step S71. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S71, a process of determining whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes is “0” is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) of the main RAM 103. In the main CPU 101, the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is "0", that is, no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S77. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined that there is, the process is transferred to step S72.

In step S72, a process of subtracting "1" from the second start storage number is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S73.

In step S73, the special symbol storage area transfer process based on the second start opening winning is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the data of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) of the main RAM 103 in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second. 2 Performs a process of shifting (storing) to the special symbol start storage area (3). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S74.

In step S74, a process of setting a value (01) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management to the control state flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S75. Further, the main CPU 101 generates a derived symbol designation command for the sub CPU 201, which will be described later, to determine a derived symbol (identification symbol for staging) corresponding to the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 431, and the main RAM 103. Store in a predetermined area of. The main CPU 101 outputs this derived symbol designation command to the sub-control circuit 200 in step S14 shown in FIG. 52. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts the variable display of the derived symbol based on the received derived symbol designation command.

In step S75, the waiting time set process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S37 or step S46 shown in FIG. 54 in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S76.

In step S76, a process of clearing the storage area used for this fluctuation is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the storage area of the main RAM 103 used for the variable display this time. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S77, a process of determining whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes is “0” is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of data in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines that the start storage corresponding to the first special symbol is 0, that is, no data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If so, the process is transferred to step S80. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start storage corresponding to the first special symbol is not 0, that is, the data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S78. The main CPU 101 performs the process of step S77 after the process of step S71. That is, the main CPU 101 preferentially digests the second start opening winning.

In step S78, a process of subtracting "1" from the first start storage number is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the data in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S79.

In step S79, the special symbol storage area transfer process based on the first start opening winning is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) of the main RAM 103 in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first. 1 Performs a process of shifting (storing) to the special symbol start storage area (3). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S74.

In step S80, a demo display process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 103. Further, the main CPU 101 is in a state where the start storage of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes 0 for a predetermined time (for example). , 30 seconds) If it is maintained, set the value that permits the execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 101 sets a demo display command and supplies it to the sub control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 performs a demo display on the liquid crystal display device 50 based on this demo display command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management process) executed in step S63 of FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. As shown in FIG. 58, in step S90, a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02) indicating special symbol display time management is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (02) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S91, and the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process ( If it is determined that it is not 02), this subroutine is terminated.

In step S91, a process of determining whether or not the waiting time is "0" is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the process shifts to step S92, and when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S92, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 has the probability variation flag stored in the main RAM 103 and the jackpot random number determination table (first start port) shown in FIG. 73 (a) or the jackpot random number determination table (second) shown in FIG. 73 (b). The big hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 103 is associated with the big hit determination value data with reference to the start port). Judge whether it is a value given (whether it is a big hit or not). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to step S98 shown in FIG. 59, and if it determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to step S93. In this process, the main CPU 101 also performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the probability variation flag stored in the main RAM 103 and the jackpot random number determination table (first start port) shown in FIG. 73 (a), and refers to the first special symbol start storage area (first special symbol start storage area) of the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not the random number value for big hit determination stored in 0) is the value associated with the small hit determination value data (small hit). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit, the large winning opening 418 is opened for a certain period of time, and when it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S93. When the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit and closes the large winning opening 418 after opening it for a certain period of time (when the opening time of the large winning opening as a small hit has elapsed), after the small hit gaming state ends. The game state is controlled so as not to be more advantageous than the game state at the time of winning the small hit. The large winning opening opening time as a small hit is the total opening time which is the total opening time when the large winning opening 418 is repeatedly opened and closed intermittently.

In step S93, a process of setting a value (08) indicating the end of the special symbol game is performed in the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (08) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S94.

In step S94, a process of determining whether or not the time reduction state change count counter is “0” is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction state change number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. Here, the time-saving state fluctuation count counter indicates the number of times that the special symbol is changed and stopped in the time-saving state. When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the time-saving state change count counter is "0", it terminates this subroutine, and when it determines that the value of the time-saving state change count counter is not "0", it steps. The process is transferred to S95.

In step S95, a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving state fluctuation number counter is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the time reduction state fluctuation number counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S96.

In step S96, a process of determining whether or not the time reduction state change count counter is “0” is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction state change number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the time reduction state change number counter is "0", the process shifts to step S97, and when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state change number counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S97. End this subroutine.

In step S97, a process of setting "0" to the time saving flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" to the time saving flag stored in the main RAM 103. Here, the time saving flag is a flag stored in the main RAM 103 and indicating whether or not the time saving state is selected as the game state after the end of the big hit, and when the value is "0", it is not the time saving state. (Non-time saving state) is indicated, and when the value is "1", it indicates that it is a time saving state. In the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 55, the main CPU 101 generates game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 according to the value of the time saving flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 59, in step S98, the jackpot mode determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the jackpot mode based on the symbol designation command determined in step S35 or step S44 shown in FIG. 54. Specifically, when the symbol designation command is "z0", "z1", "z2", and "z3", the main CPU 101 determines the jackpot mode in which the number of rounds is "10", and the symbol designation command is "z". In the case of "z4", the jackpot mode in which the number of rounds is "16" is determined. Further, when the symbol designation command is "z11", the main CPU 101 determines the small hit mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S99.

In step S99, the jackpot flag set process is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines in the process of step S92 shown in FIG. 58 that it is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets a big hit flag in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S100.

In step S100, the large winning opening opening counter clearing process, the time saving state change number counter clearing process, the time saving flag clearing process, and the probability change flag clearing process are performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the large winning opening opening number counter and the time saving state change number counter stored in the main RAM 103. Further, the main CPU 101 stores the value of the time saving flag as the winning time saving flag in the main RAM 103, and then performs a process of setting "0" in the time saving flag. Further, the main CPU 101 stores the value of the probability change flag as the probability change flag at the time of winning in the main RAM 103, and then performs a process of setting "0" in the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S101.

In step S101, a process of setting a value (03) indicating the jackpot start interval management to the control state flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03) indicating the jackpot start interval management in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S102.

In step S102, a process of setting a waiting time (5000 ms) as the jackpot start interval time is performed. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines in the process of step S92 shown in FIG. 58 that it is a big hit, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer (5000 ms) as the big hit start interval time in the main RAM 103. .. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S103.

In step S103, the jackpot start command set process is performed. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines in the process of step S92 shown in FIG. 58 that it is a big hit, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S104. Here, the big hit start command set in the process of this step and the small hit start command set when the small hit is determined in the process of step S99 are from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. By being supplied to the sub CPU 201, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit.

In step S104, the large winning opening opening number data set processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big winning opening opening number data according to the big hit mode or the small hit mode determined in the big hit mode determining process in step S98. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 determines the jackpot mode in which the number of rounds is "10" in the jackpot mode determination process, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the upper limit value in the jackpot opening count counter of the main RAM 103. do. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines the jackpot mode in which the number of rounds is "16" in the jackpot mode determination process, the main CPU 101 sets "16" as the upper limit value in the jackpot opening number counter of the main RAM 103. Further, when the small hit mode is determined in the big hit mode determination process, the main CPU 101 sets “1” as the upper limit value in the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103. The count value of the open count counter is synonymous with the number of rounds. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S105.

In step S105, the round number display LED pattern flag setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the round number display LED pattern flag for performing display control of the round number display device 432 in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval processing) executed in step S68 of FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In step S110, a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07) indicating the jackpot end interval is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07) indicating the jackpot end interval process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (07) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, the processing is transferred to step S111, and the control status flag must be a value (07) indicating the jackpot end interval processing. If it is determined, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S111, a process of determining whether or not the waiting time is "0" is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the jackpot end interval process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the process shifts to step S112, and when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. do.

In step S112, the LED pattern flag clearing process for displaying the number of times the large winning opening is opened is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S113.

In step S113, the round number distribution flag clearing process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the round number distribution flag stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S114.

In step S114, a process of setting a value (08) indicating the end of the special symbol game is performed in the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (08) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S115.

In step S115, the jackpot flag clearing process is performed. In this process, when the jackpot flag is set in the process of step S99 shown in FIG. 59, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S116.

In step S116, the probability change flag setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 is based on the symbol designation command determined in step S35 or step S44 shown in FIG. 54, and the winning time saving flag and the winning probability change flag stored in the main RAM 103 in step S100 shown in FIG. 59. With reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76, a process of setting a probability change flag in the main RAM 103 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S117.

[Big hit type determination table]
Here, the jackpot type determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The jackpot type determination table is stored in the main ROM 102, and can be used for a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and for symbol designation commands (“z0”, “z1”, “z2”, “z3”, “z4”) in which the winning type is a jackpot. The time reduction flag, the number of time reductions, the probability variation flag, the probability variation number, and the number of rounds are associated with each other.

The symbol designation command in the jackpot type determination table is a value corresponding to the symbol designation command in the jackpot symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 74). Further, the number of time reductions in the jackpot type determination table indicates the upper limit of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the time reduction state started after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In the present embodiment, the time saving state ends when a big hit is won or when there is a change in the special symbol for the number of times shortened shown in the big hit type determination table. That is, it shifts from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. Further, the probability variation number in the jackpot type determination table indicates the upper limit of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probability variation state started after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In the present embodiment, the probability change state ends when a big hit is won or when there is a change in the special symbol for the number of probability changes shown in the big hit type determination table. That is, it shifts from the probable change state to the non-probable change state.

Further, as the jackpot type determination table, four tables corresponding to the values of the winning time reduction flag and the winning probability change flag are stored in the main ROM 102. Specifically, in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the value of the winning time saving flag is "0" and the value of the winning time probability change flag is "0", that is, the non-time saving state and When a big hit occurs in the non-probability state, it is referred to by the main CPU 101. Further, in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the value of the winning time saving flag is "1" and the value of the winning time saving flag is "0", that is, in the time saving state and the non-probability changing state. Sometimes it is referred to by the main CPU 101 when it becomes a big hit. Further, in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the value of the winning time saving flag is "0" and the value of the winning probability change flag is "1", that is, in the non-time saving state and the probability changing state. Sometimes it is referred to by the main CPU 101 when it becomes a big hit. Further, in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the value of the winning time saving flag is "1" and the value of the winning probability change flag is "1", that is, when the time saving state and the probability changing state are set. When it becomes a big hit, it is referred to by the main CPU 101.

Further, the jackpot type in the present embodiment includes a jackpot 1, a jackpot 2, a jackpot 3, a jackpot 4, and a jackpot 5. The jackpot 1 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a non-time saving state and a non-probability changing state. The jackpot 2 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a non-time saving state and a probable change state (so-called latent probabilistic change). The jackpot 3 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a time-saving state and a probable change state in which the number of time-saving times is less than 200 times. The jackpot 4 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a time-saving state with a time-saving number of 200 times and a probable change state. The jackpot 5 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a time-saving state and a probable non-variable state.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (a), which is referred to when a jackpot occurs in the non-time saving state and the non-probability changing state, the jackpot 1 is associated with the symbol designation command "z0" and the jackpot is assigned to "z1". 2 is associated, "z2" and "z3" are associated with jackpot 3, and "z4" is associated with jackpot 4. Further, in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (b), which is referred to when a jackpot occurs in the time saving state and the non-probability change state, the jackpot 1 is associated with the symbol designation command "z0" and is assigned to "z1". The jackpot 2 is associated, the jackpot 3 is associated with "z2" and "z3", and the jackpot 4 is associated with "z4". Further, in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (c), which is referred to when a jackpot occurs in the non-time saving state and the probability variation state, the jackpot 1 is associated with the symbol designation command "z0", and "z1" to "z1". The jackpot 3 is associated with "z3", and the jackpot 4 is associated with "z4". Further, in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76 (d), which is referred to when a jackpot occurs in the time saving state and the probability change state, the jackpot 5 is associated with the symbol designation command "z0", and the jackpot 5 is associated with "z1". 3 is associated, and the jackpot 4 is associated with "z2" to "z4".

Returning to FIG. 60, specifically, in step S116, the main CPU 101 has a jackpot corresponding to the winning time reduction flag and the winning probability change flag in the jackpot type determination tables shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (d). The process of reading the value of the probability change flag associated with the symbol specification command and storing it in the main RAM 103 is performed with reference to the type determination table. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the winning time reduction flag and the winning probability change flag among the jackpot type determination tables shown in FIGS. 76A to 76D, and associates them with the symbol designation command. A jackpot type command indicating the jackpot type (big hit 1, jackpot 2, jackpot 3, jackpot 4 or jackpot 5) is generated and stored in the main RAM 103.

In step S117, the time saving flag setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 is based on the symbol designation command determined in step S35 or step S44 shown in FIG. 54, and the winning time saving flag and the winning probability change flag stored in the main RAM 103 in step S100 shown in FIG. 59. With reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76, a process of setting a time saving flag in the main RAM 103 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S118. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the winning time reduction flag and the winning probability change flag among the jackpot type determination tables shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (d), and refers to the symbol designation command. The value of the time saving flag associated with is read out and stored in the main RAM 103.

In step S118, a process of determining whether or not the probability change flag is "1" is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the probability change flag of the main RAM 103 is “1”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the process is transferred to step S119, and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation flag is not "1", the process is transferred to step S120. ..

In step S119, a process of setting the probability change number in the probability change state change number counter is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 is based on the symbol designation command determined in step S35 or step S44 shown in FIG. 54, and the winning time saving flag and the winning probability change flag stored in the main RAM 103 in step S100 shown in FIG. 59. With reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76, a process of setting the probability change number in the probability change state change number counter of the main RAM 103 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S120. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the winning time reduction flag and the winning probability change flag among the jackpot type determination tables shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (d), and refers to the symbol designation command. The value of the probability variation number associated with is read out and stored in the main RAM 103.

In step S120, a process of determining whether or not the time saving flag is "1" is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the time saving flag of the main RAM 103 is “1”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the time saving flag is "1", the process shifts to step S121, and when it is determined that the value of the time saving flag is not "1", the present subroutine is terminated.

In step S121, a process of setting the number of time reductions in the time reduction state fluctuation counter is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 is based on the symbol designation command determined in step S35 or step S44 shown in FIG. 54, and the winning time saving flag and the winning probability change flag stored in the main RAM 103 in step S100 shown in FIG. 59. With reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 76, a process of setting the time reduction number of times in the time reduction state fluctuation number counter of the main RAM 103 is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the winning time reduction flag and the winning probability change flag among the jackpot type determination tables shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (d), and refers to the symbol designation command. The value of the number of time reductions associated with is read out and stored in the main RAM 103.

[Ordinary symbol control processing]
The subroutine (ordinary symbol control process) executed in step S53 of FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. In FIG. 61, the numerical values drawn on the sides of steps S130 to S135 indicate the normal symbol control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area functioning as the normal symbol control state flags in the main RAM 103. ing. The main CPU 101 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103, and the normal symbol game progresses.

In step S130, a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S131.

In steps S131 to S135, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the normal symbol control state flag, as will be described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any of the processes in steps S131 to S135 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 101 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the process ends without executing the process in each step, and other subroutines are executed.

In step S131, the normal symbol memory check process is performed. In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is the value (00) indicating the normal symbol storage check, the value of the normal symbol hold storage number counter (holding number) stored in the main RAM 103 is ". It is determined whether or not it is "0". When the value of the normal symbol hold storage number counter is "0", the main CPU 101 sets a value (04) indicating the normal symbol game end process in the normal symbol control state flag. On the other hand, when the value of the normal symbol hold storage number counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 sets a value (01) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets a predetermined value of the normal symbol. Set the variable time in the wait time timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S135 or step S132.

In step S132, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (01) indicating normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring, and sets a value (02) indicating normal symbol display time monitoring when the fluctuation time has elapsed. Set the control status flag and set the waiting time after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S133 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S133.

In step S133, the normal symbol display time monitoring process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the random value value and stores it in the main ROM 102 when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (02) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring and the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. With reference to the ordinary symbol winning table, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won. Here, different normal symbol winning tables are referred to in the time saving state and the non-time saving state (normal game state). That is, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (for example, 255/256), the normal symbol winning table is referred to, and in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high. A low (eg, 0/256) ordinary symbol winning table is referenced. The main CPU 101 sets a value (03) indicating that the normal electric accessory is open when the normal symbol lottery is won, and sets the normal symbol control state flag, and when the normal symbol lottery is not won, the normal symbol game end process. The value (04) indicating the above is set in the normal symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S134 or step S135.

In step S134, the normal electric accessory opening process is performed. In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (03) indicating the opening of the normal electric accessory, the main CPU 101 sets the normal electric accessory release flag and is the time to pull in the flat plate member 415a. Set the accessory release time in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of step S135 after the normal accessory opening time has elapsed. When the normal electric accessory release flag is set, the main CPU 101 is in a state of pulling in the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415 of the second starting port 414b (see FIG. 4). Solenoid power is supplied to (see FIG. 51). Further, in the main CPU 101, when the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415 is pulled in, a predetermined number of prizes are awarded to the second starting port 414b, or a waiting time timer in which the ordinary accessory opening time is set is set. When it is "0", the solenoid power is supplied to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 111, and the flat plate member 415a of the ordinary electric accessory 415 is projected.

In step S135, the normal symbol game end process is performed. In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is the value (04) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol hold storage number counter stored in the main RAM 103. The value (00) indicating the normal symbol memory check process is set in the normal symbol control status flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

Next, the process executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described. The sub CPU 201 reads a program from the program ROM 202 and executes the main processing of the sub control circuit in response to the power being turned on. Further, the sub CPU 201 may interrupt the sub control circuit main process and execute the sub control circuit interrupt process even when the sub control circuit main process is being executed. The sub CPU 201 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds), and executes the sub control circuit interrupt process accordingly.

[Sub-control circuit interrupt processing]
A sub-control circuit interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. In step S210, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves each register and performs a process of updating the random number stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number update process so as to increase the count value of the counter for determining the effect pattern stored in the work RAM 203 by “1”. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S211.

In step S211 the command reception process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 and stores it in the work RAM 203. In this process, in addition to the command, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of receiving data transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 and storing the data in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S212.

In step S212, the timer update process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating various timers stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, a process of updating a timer used in an effect process or the like is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S213.

In step S213, command output processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of outputting various commands to the display control circuit 210, the voice control circuit 220, the lamp control circuit 230, the first operation means control circuit 240a, and the second operation means control circuit 240b. In this process, in addition to various commands, the sub CPU 201 includes a display control circuit 210, a voice control circuit 220, a lamp control circuit 230, a first operation means control circuit 240a, a second operation means control circuit 240b, and LED control. A process of outputting various data to the circuit 250 is performed. When this process is completed, the process of returning each register to the address before the interrupt process is performed, and this subroutine is terminated.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
Next, the sub-control circuit main process executed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71 and 72. As shown in FIG. 63, the initialization process is performed in step S220. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the start program from the program ROM 202 and initializes and sets the flags and the like stored in the work RAM 203 in response to the power being turned on. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S221.

In step S221, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the initial value of the random number stored in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S222.

In step S222, command analysis processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 100 in step S211 shown in FIG. 62 and stored in the work RAM 203. This process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S223.

In step S223, the staging process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a look-ahead notice effect and an effect using the illumination array 426. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S224.

In step S224, display control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores data for displaying the effect image on the liquid crystal display device 50 in the work RAM 203. The data for displaying this effect image includes, for example, a pre-reading notice determination command described later, data of a reserved symbol described later, and the like. Then, the sub CPU 201 transmits the stored data to the display control circuit 210 in the process of step S213 shown in FIG. The display control circuit 210 outputs various image data such as derived symbol data, background image data, and effect image data from an image data ROM (not shown) based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 201. It is read out, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S225.

Here, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is an identification corresponding to the reserved symbol by setting the reserved symbol for the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 to a display mode different from the normal display mode. In the derivation display of the symbol, it is an effect of notifying the player of the reliability that is a big hit (so-called reserved ball notice).

The effect pattern of the look-ahead notice effect is set by the look-ahead advance notice effect determination process described later by the sub CPU 201. The pre-reading notice effect is not limited to the mode of displaying in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50, and may be performed by an accessory, a segment, or a second display device (liquid crystal display device or the like).

In step S225, voice control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores data for generating sound from the speaker 14 in the work RAM 203. The sub CPU 201 transmits the stored data to the voice control circuit 220 in the process of step S213 shown in FIG. 62. The voice control circuit 220 generates sound from the speaker 14 based on the data for generating sound. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S226.

In step S226, a lamp control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores data for controlling the lamp 15 including the decorative lamp and the like in the work RAM 203. The sub CPU 201 transmits the stored data to the lamp control circuit 230 in the process of step S213 shown in FIG. 62. The lamp control circuit 230 turns on, blinks, or turns off the lamp 15 based on the data for controlling the lamp 15. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis process) executed in step S222 of FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. In step S230, a process of determining whether or not there is a received command is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the command received from the main control circuit 100 is stored in the work RAM 203, and if it is determined that the command is stored, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S231. If it is determined that the command is not stored, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S231, a process of analyzing the command received in the sub-control circuit interrupt process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing commands and data received from the main control circuit 100 and stored in the work RAM 203 in step S211 shown in FIG. 62. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S232. Such commands and data include demo display commands, derived symbol specification commands, look-ahead advance notice determination commands, first and second out-ball commands, variation pattern data indicated by variation pattern specification commands, jackpot type commands, and probability variation state variations. Data showing the value of the number of times counter, data showing the value of the time saving state change count counter, big hit start command, small hit start command, data showing the value of the probability change flag, data showing the value of the time saving flag, start opening winning command, etc. included.

Further, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the data of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the analyzed variation pattern designation command and the data indicated by the pre-reading advance notice determination command in the variation pattern storage area. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern storage area is from the variation pattern storage area (0) to the variation pattern storage area (4). The data of the variation pattern indicated by the analyzed variation pattern designation command and the data indicated by the look-ahead advance notice determination command are sequentially stored in the variation pattern storage area (0) to the variation pattern storage area (4). The sub CPU 201 performs the effect pattern determination process described later based on the variation pattern data stored in the variation pattern storage area (0), and performs the look-ahead advance notice effect setting process described later based on the data indicated by the look-ahead advance notice effect command. .. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the look-ahead advance notice determination command for the amount of suspension of the variation display of the special symbol are also the variation pattern storage area (0) to the variation pattern storage area (4) of the work RAM 203. Is remembered in. The sub CPU 201 reads the variation pattern designation command and the look-ahead advance notice determination command stored in the variation pattern storage area (0) to the variation pattern storage area (4), so that the so-called “look-ahead effect”, particularly “holding ball advance notice”. "Is possible. Further, the variation pattern storage area (0) to the variation pattern storage area (4) are the first variation pattern storage area (0) to the first variation pattern storage area (0) to store the variation pattern designation command and the look-ahead advance notice determination command based on the first start opening winning. 1 variable pattern storage area (4), 2nd variable pattern storage area (0) to 2nd variable pattern storage area (4) in which a variable pattern designation command and a look-ahead advance notice determination command based on a 2nd start opening winning are stored. ,including.

In step S232, a process of determining whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received is performed. In this process, as a result of the analysis in step S231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the command received from the main control circuit 100 includes the variation pattern specification command, and determines that the variation pattern specification command is included. If so, the process is transferred to step S233, and if it is determined that the variation pattern specification command is not included, the process is transferred to step S234.

In step S233, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect table shown in FIG. 77 based on the variation pattern designation command analyzed in step S231 shown in FIG. 64 and the random value extracted for determining the effect pattern, and refers to the effect pattern. Is determined and stored in the work RAM 203.

[Direction table]
Here, the effect table will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the present embodiment, the effect table has a variation time of the derived symbol, a random value for determining an effect pattern in which a predetermined width is set in the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, a selection rate, an effect pattern, and an effect content. , The winning type and the symbol designation command are associated with each other and stored in the program ROM 202. In the effect table, the variation pattern corresponds to the variation pattern of the variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 75). Further, the fluctuation time corresponds to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 75). Further, the effect pattern indicates the type of effect pattern assigned to each effect content. Further, the winning type corresponds to the determination value data of the jackpot random number determination table (see FIG. 73). Further, the symbol designation command corresponds to the symbol designation command of the jackpot symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 74).

Returning to FIG. 64, in step S233, the sub CPU 201 has an effect table (see FIG. 77) when, for example, the variation pattern designation command is “HN20” and the random number value extracted for determining the effect pattern is “10”. ), The effect pattern "EN39" is determined, and the process of storing in the work RAM 203 is performed. The sub CPU 201 transmits this effect pattern “EN39” to the display control circuit 210. The display control circuit 210 displays "special effect A", which is the effect content of the effect pattern "EN39", on the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S234, a process of determining whether or not a derived symbol designation command has been received is performed. In this process, as a result of the analysis in step S231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the command received from the main control circuit 100 includes the derived symbol designation command, and determines that the derived symbol designation command is included. If so, the process is transferred to step S235, and if it is determined that the derived symbol designation command is not included, the process is transferred to step S236.

In step S235, a process of determining the derived symbol is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the derived symbol corresponding to the derived symbol designation command received from the main control circuit 100, and displays the derived symbol on the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50. Data is stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines the derived symbol indicating the big hit if the derived symbol designation command is associated with the big hit, and determines the derived symbol indicating the small hit if it is associated with the small hit. , If it is associated with the loss, the derivation symbol indicating the loss is determined. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the derived symbol is, for example, a variable display on the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50 in a mode in which three numbers from “0” to “9” are arranged side by side. Or it is displayed as stopped. Then, in the derived symbol indicating the big hit, the stop display mode is, for example, all three numbers are the same number, and this number is an odd number. Further, in the derived symbol indicating the small hit, the stop display mode is, for example, all three numbers are the same number, and this number is an even number. In addition, the derivation symbol showing the loss does not have the same stop display mode, for example, all three numbers.

Further, in step S235, the sub CPU 201 sets a derived symbol variation start command for starting the variation display of the determined derived symbol. Then, in the process of step S213 shown in FIG. 62, the sub CPU 201 transmits the derived symbol fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern data of the fluctuation pattern storage area (0) to the display control circuit 210. The display control circuit 210 is based on the derived symbol fluctuation start command, and the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50
In (see FIG. 4), the variation display of the derived symbol is started, and the variation display is stopped after the variation time based on the variation pattern data has elapsed. At this time, the sub CPU 201 acquires the derived symbol fluctuation start time from the RTC 204 and stores it in the work RAM 203. Further, after the derivation symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the data in the variable pattern storage area (1) to the variable pattern storage area (4) to the variable pattern storage area (0) to the variable pattern storage area (3) ( Perform the process of memorizing).

In step S236, a process of determining whether or not a read-ahead notice determination command has been received is performed. In this process, as a result of the analysis in step S231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice determination command is included in the command received from the main control circuit 100, and determines that the pre-reading advance notice determination command is included. If so, the process is transferred to step S237, and if it is determined that the look-ahead notice determination command is not included, the process is transferred to step S240.

In step S237, the look-ahead notice effect setting process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 will be described in detail later, but is a liquid crystal display device corresponding to a storage area in which the look-ahead notice determination command is stored in the variable pattern storage area (1) to the variable pattern storage area (4). Performs a process of making settings for changing the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the 50. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S240, a process of determining whether or not a first out ball command or a second out ball command has been received is performed. In this process, as a result of the analysis in step S231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the command received from the main control circuit 100 includes the first out ball command or the second out ball command, and determines whether or not the first out ball command is included. If it is determined that the ball command or the second out ball command is included, the process is transferred to step S241, and if it is determined that the first out ball command or the second out ball command is not included, the step is performed. The process is transferred to S242.

In step S241, the point counting process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 uses a part of the storage area of the work RAM 203 as a counter, and is stored in the counter each time the first out ball command or the second out ball command is received. Performs a process of adding a predetermined point value to the existing point value. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S242, processing corresponding to other received commands is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs processes corresponding to commands other than the fluctuation pattern designation command, the derived symbol designation command, the look-ahead notice determination command, and the out-ball command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Pre-reading notice effect setting process]
The subroutine (pre-reading notice effect setting process) executed in step S237 of FIG. 64 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

In step S250, a process of setting the display mode of the reserved symbol is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the display color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the process of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the display colors of the reserved symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 are white, blue, yellow, and green, and in the process of step S250, the sub CPU 201 gives a look-ahead notice by the process of the main CPU 101. The display color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the variable pattern that is not determined to be determined is set to white, and the reserved symbol corresponding to the variable pattern determined to give the pre-reading notice by the processing of the main CPU 101 is set to either blue or yellow. Regarding whether to change the display color of the reserved symbol to blue or yellow, the sub CPU 201 refers to the basic display color determination table (not shown), acquires a random number value by random number lottery, and displays this random number value. The process of determining the display color is performed by comparing with the judgment value for color setting. Note that green is a display color of the reserved symbol that changes depending on the operation of the touch sensor 425, which will be described later.

Here, the table for determining the basic display color will be described. The basic display color determination table is a random value that serves as a display color setting determination value for determining the display color of the reserved symbol in the effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 201 based on the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The range of is associated with the display color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the display color setting determination value, and is stored in the program ROM 202.

The display color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the judgment value for display color setting is two colors, blue and yellow, and the range of the random number value that is the judgment value for display color setting is distributed so as to select either blue or yellow. Has been done. Specifically, the judgment value for display color setting is such that blue is more likely to be selected when the jackpot reliability of the effect content corresponding to the effect pattern is low, and yellow is more likely to be selected as the jackpot reliability of the effect content is higher. The range of random values is set. Therefore, when the random number value acquired by the sub CPU 201 by the random lottery is the display color setting determination value corresponding to blue, the display color of the reserved symbol is set to blue, and the display color setting determination value corresponding to yellow is set. In this case, the display color of the reserved symbol is set to yellow. When this process is completed, the process of step S251 is transferred.

In step S251, a process of setting the display color data of the reserved symbol is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the data of the display color of the reserved symbol set in the process of step S250 in a predetermined area for transmission of the work RAM 203. The display color data of the reserved symbol set in the work RAM 203 is transmitted to the display control circuit 210 by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. The display control circuit 210 causes the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50 to display the reserved symbol of the display color set in the process of step S251 based on the received display color data of the reserved symbol. When this process is completed, the process of step S252 is transferred.

In step S252, a process of determining whether or not the reserved symbol whose display color is set in step S250 is the reserved symbol corresponding to the second start opening winning is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the symbol is a reserved symbol due to the second start opening winning, depending on whether the pre-reading notice determination command is stored in the first variation pattern storage area or the second variation pattern storage area. do. That is, when the pre-reading notice determination command is stored in the second variation pattern storage area, the sub CPU 201 determines that the symbol is on hold due to the second start opening winning. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the symbol is on hold due to the second start opening prize, the process shifts to step S253, and when it is not determined that the symbol is on hold due to the second start opening winning, the subroutine ends. ..

In step S253, the reserved symbol change setting process is performed. In this process, although the details will be described later, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not to change the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed in step S250 to green on condition that the touch sensor 425 is operated. conduct. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Reserved symbol change setting process]
The subroutine (pending symbol change setting process) executed in step S253 of FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

In step S260, a process of determining whether or not the effect pattern corresponding to the reserved symbol is a big hit is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect pattern corresponding to the reserved symbol is a big hit, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the process is transferred to step S261, and if it is not determined to be a big hit, the step The process is transferred to S262.

In step S261, a process of determining a change of the reserved symbol corresponding to the effect pattern that becomes a big hit is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 compares the random number value acquired by the random number lottery with the determination value set in the jackpot reserved symbol change determination table, and determines that the reserved symbol is changed when it is determined to match. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S263.

In step S262, a process of determining a change of the reserved symbol corresponding to the fluctuation pattern other than the big hit is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 compares the random number value acquired by the random number lottery with the determination value set in the reserved symbol change determination table for non-big hits, and determines that the reserved symbol is changed when it is determined to match. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S263.

Here, the jackpot reserved symbol change determination table is a table in which the effect pattern that becomes the jackpot and the random number range that becomes the determination value are associated, and in step S261, the sub CPU 201 determines that the random number value and the determination value match. The random number range is set so that the probability of doing so is 50%. The reserved symbol change determination table for non-big hits is a table in which an effect pattern associated with a fluctuation pattern that is a loss or a small hit and a random number range that is a determination value are associated, and in step S261, the sub CPU 201 has a random number value. It is set so that the probability of determining that the determination value matches the determination value is 1%.

In step S263, a process of setting a pending symbol changeable flag is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" as a reserved symbol changeable flag in a predetermined area of the second variable pattern storage area corresponding to the reserved symbol determined to change the display mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Point counting process]
The subroutine (point counting process) executed in step S241 of FIG. 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. In step S270, a process of determining the current gaming state is performed. In this process, in the storage / game state data generation process of step S56 (see FIG. 55), the sub CPU 201 has a big hit game state in which the current game state is based on the data transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. If it is determined whether or not the game is in the big hit game state, the process is transferred to step S271. If it is not determined that the game is in the jackpot game state, the process is transferred to step S272.

In step S271, a process of adding the first count value to the point counter is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding the first count value to the count value stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 used as the point counter. In the present embodiment, "20" is set as the first count value when the first out ball command is received, and "30" is set as the first count value when the second out ball command is received. ing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S273.

In step S272, a process of adding the second count value to the point counter is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding the second count value to the count value stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 used as the point counter. In the present embodiment, "1" is set as the second count value when the first out ball command is received, and "100" is set as the second count value when the second out ball command is received. ing. That is, since it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the second special out port 420c than in the first special out port 420b, many points are added when the game ball passes through the second special out port 420c. The count value is set so as to. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S273, a process of determining whether or not the final round is completed is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the final round based on the round count command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 in step S64 and the round end command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 in step S65, and the shutter member It is determined whether or not the 422a protrudes from the board surface, and if it is determined that the shutter member 422a protrudes, the process is transferred to step S274. If it is not determined that the final round has ended, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S274, a process of stopping point addition is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 pauses the point counter so that the points are not added. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S275.

In step S275, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot gaming state has ended is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot game state has ended based on the data transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the storage / game state data generation process in step S56 (see FIG. 55). If it is determined that the jackpot game state has ended, the process is transferred to step S276. If it is not determined that the jackpot game state has ended, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S276, a process of restarting point addition is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 cancels the paused state of the point counter and returns to the state in which points are added. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

That is, in the big hit game state, the count value of the point counter is added by "20" every time the game ball passes through the first special out port 420b, and the first special out port 420b is played except in the big hit game state. Every time the ball passes, the count value of the point counter is added by "1". Here, in the interval from the end of the final round to the end of the big hit game state in the big hit game state, points are not added even if the game ball passes through the first special out port 420b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the count value of the point counter from rising at once due to many game balls passing through the first special out port 420b in the interval from the end of the final round to the end of the big hit game state. can.

[Direction processing]
The subroutine (effect processing) executed in step S223 of FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. In step S280, the touch sensor activation process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to enable the operation of the touch sensor 425 based on the count value of the point counter, and during the period determined to enable the operation, the sub CPU 201 determines. Control is performed so as to receive an operation signal from the touch sensor 425. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S281. The sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S280 functions as an effect determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined effect can be executed based on the number of game media that have passed through the first special out port 420b. ..

In step S281, the touch sensor effect processing is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 controls to execute an effect of changing the display color of the reserved symbol by the operation of the touch sensor 425 by the player. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S282.

In step S282, the illumination effect processing is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the sub CPU 201 controls to notify the operation timing of the touch sensor 425 by using the illumination array 426. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S283. The sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of steps S281 and S282 functions as an effect executing means that enables a predetermined effect to be executed based on the affirmative determination of the effect determination means.

In step S283, other effect processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores in the work RAM 203 data for controlling various effects displayed during the effect during the change of the derived symbol, the effect executed before the start of the change, and the like. The sub CPU 201 outputs such data to the display control circuit 210, the voice control circuit 220, the lamp control circuit 230, the first operation means control circuit 240a, and the second operation means control circuit 240b in step S213 of FIG. .. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Touch sensor activation process]
The subroutine (touch sensor activation process) executed in step S280 of FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. As shown in FIG. 70, in step S290, a process of determining whether or not the point value in the point counter exceeds a preset set value is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 compares the point value stored in the storage area used as the point counter in the work RAM 203 with the set value stored in advance in the predetermined storage area of the work RAM 203, and the point value is determined. It is determined whether or not the set value (for example, 240) has been exceeded, and if it is determined that the point value exceeds the set value, the process is transferred to step S291, and if it is not determined that the point value exceeds the set value, it is determined. , The process is transferred to step S298.

In step S291, a process for activating the touch sensor 425 is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor activation flag in the work RAM 203, and performs a process of making the operation signal transmitted from the touch sensor 425 acceptable. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S292.

In step S292, a process of activating the timer is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 uses a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 as a timer for timing for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), and performs a process of starting the countdown of this timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S293.

In step S293, a process of determining whether or not the touch sensor 425 has been operated is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation signal from the touch sensor 425 has been received, and if it is determined that the operation signal has been received, the process is transferred to step S295. The process is transferred to step S294.

In step S294, a process of determining whether or not the timer value has become "0" is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the timer value stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 used as the timer has become “0”, and determines that the timer value has become “0”. If so, the process is transferred to step S295. If it is not determined that the timer value has reached "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In step S295, a process of disabling the touch sensor 425 is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 clears the touch sensor activation flag stored in the work RAM 203 and performs a process of not accepting the operation signal transmitted from the touch sensor 425. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S296.

In step S296, a process of resetting the timer is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing an initial value (for example, 1 minute) in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 used as a timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S297.

In step S297, a process of updating the point value of the point counter to a value obtained by subtracting only the set value is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the point value stored in the storage area used as the point counter in the work RAM 203 to a value obtained by subtracting the set value (“240” in the present embodiment). conduct. That is, the point value exceeding the set value is carried over. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S298, a process of disabling the touch sensor 425 is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 clears the touch sensor activation flag stored in the work RAM 203 and performs a process of not accepting the operation signal transmitted from the touch sensor 425. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In this way, in the touch sensor 425, after the point value counted by the point counter exceeds the preset set value, until the touch sensor 425 is operated or the timer elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). The operation is valid during the period of, and the operation is invalid during the other period.

In the present embodiment, "240" is set as the set value, "20" is set as the first count value, "1" is set as the second count value, and 1 minute is set as the timer value. It can be set as appropriate. For example, by setting "50" as the set value, "5" as the second count value, "1" as the second count value, and 3 minutes as the timer value, the touch sensor 425 can be easily enabled in a time-saving state, and moreover. It may be set so that the activated state is long. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation is invalidated when the touch sensor 425 is operated, but the operation is not limited to this, and the touch sensor 425 can be operated many times until the timer value is counted for 1 minute, for example. It may be set. Further, in the present embodiment, in step S297, the point value exceeding the set value is carried over, but the point value is not limited to this, and may be reset (set to “0”), for example.

[Touch sensor effect processing]
The subroutine (touch sensor effect processing) executed in step S281 of FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, in step S301, a process of determining whether or not the touch sensor activation flag is set is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch sensor enable flag is set in the work RAM 203, and if it is determined that the touch sensor enable flag is set, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S302 and touches. If it is not determined that the sensor enable flag is set, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S302, a process of determining whether or not the touch sensor 425 has been operated is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation signal from the touch sensor 425 has been received, and if it is determined that the operation signal has been received, the process is transferred to step S303. End this subroutine.

In step S303, a process of changing the reserved symbol corresponding to the variable pattern storage area in which the reserved symbol changeable flag is set is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets “1” in the storage area of the work RAM 203 used as the reserved symbol changeable flag in the second variation pattern storage area (1) to the second variation pattern storage area (4). It is determined whether or not the pattern is set, and a process of changing the reserved symbol corresponding to the second variation pattern storage area in which "1" is set is performed. The display color of the reserved symbol, which is changed on condition that the touch sensor 425 is operated, is set in advance in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the display color of the reserved symbol is changed to "green". When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

The reserved symbol changeable flag stored in the work RAM 203 is cleared when the identification symbol for effect change or stop display is executed based on the data in the storage area in which the reserved symbol changeable flag is stored. To.

[Illuminate production process]
The subroutine (illumination effect processing) executed in step S282 of FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. As shown in FIG. 72, in step S310, a process of determining whether or not the touch sensor activation flag is set is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch sensor enable flag is set in the work RAM 203, and if it is determined that the touch sensor enable flag is set, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S311 and touches. If it is not determined that the sensor activation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S313.

In step S311, a process of determining whether or not a big hit game is in progress is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on the data transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the storage / game state data generation process in step S56 (see FIG. 55). If the determination is made and it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress, this subroutine is terminated, and if it is not determined that the jackpot game is in progress, the process is moved to step S312.

In step S312, a process of turning on the light source 426b of the illumination array 426 is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of causing the light source 426b of the illumination array 426 to emit light to visualize the latent image of the light guide plate 426a. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S313, a process of turning off the light source 426b of the illumination array 426 is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of turning off the light source 426b of the illumination array 426 so as not to visualize the latent image of the light guide plate 426a. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, the effect by the illumination array 426 is executed during the period when the operation of the touch sensor 425 is valid. However, even during the period when the operation of the touch sensor 425 is valid, if the big hit game is in progress, the effect by the illumination array 426 is not executed. In this way, the fact that the effect by the illumination array 426 is executed informs the player that the operation of the touch sensor 425 is effective. When the timer clocks 10 seconds before, the light source 426b may be changed in emission color or blinked to indicate that the operation of the touch sensor 425 will be invalidated soon.

Further, in the process shown in FIG. 72, due to the process of step S311, if the jackpot game is in progress even during the period when the operation of the touch sensor 425 is valid, the effect by the illumination array 426 is not executed, but the effect by this step S311 is not executed. Processing can be omitted. That is, in step S310, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch sensor activation flag is set in the work RAM 203, and if it is determined that the touch sensor activation flag is set, the process is transferred to step S312. May be good. Thereby, for example, when the operation of the touch sensor 425 becomes effective during the big hit game, the touch sensor 425 is operated even during the big hit game to check whether or not the display color of the reserved symbol changes. Will be possible. For example, if there is a reserved symbol due to the second start opening winning, as in the case of continuous big hits in a high probability time saving state (so-called continuous chan), check whether the display color of the reserved symbol changes. Will be possible.

By the way, since the effect by the illumination array 426 is conditional on the game ball passing through the first special out port 420b, it is executed in the big hit game state in which the game ball is hit to the right and in the time saving state. Specifically, the effect by the illumination array 426 is executed when points are added when the game ball passes through the first special out port 420b, and the points exceed, for example, "240" in the present embodiment. Will be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the addition points in the jackpot game state are set to "20", the game balls passing through the first special out port 420b are assumed to be 1, 2 in the interval between rounds. If it is an individual, if the round game is 16 rounds, there is a high possibility that the effect by the illumination array 426 will be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the addition point in the time saving state is set to "1", the effect by the illumination array 426 is executed when 240 game balls pass through the first special out port 420b. Will be. Here, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 normally fires game balls to the extent that the number does not exceed 100 per minute, consideration is given to entering the second starting port 414b or the third special out port 420d. However, the effect by the Illumina Array 426 is executed about once every few minutes.

Furthermore, if a 16-round round game is executed in the jackpot game state, it is highly likely that the effect by the Illumina 426 is started at the time when the time-saving game is started, and the 10-round round game is executed. Although it is unlikely that the illumination array 426 will start the production at the time when the time saving game is started, it is highly possible that the illumination array 426 production is started within a relatively early time after the time saving game is started. .. The player can operate the touch sensor 425 at an arbitrary timing while the illumination array 426 is emitting light. Then, when the touch sensor 425 is operated, or when 1 minute has passed since the illumination array 426 emits light, the illumination array 426 does not emit light, but when about 3 minutes have elapsed, the effect by the illumination array 426 is executed again. To.

[Pre-reading notice production]
Next, the look-ahead notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Note that FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display screen in the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50, and is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display screen, the derived symbol 53, the round display 54, the remaining number of fluctuations display 55, and the number of first reserved balls. Only the display 56 and the second reserved ball number display 57 are shown. The first reserved ball number display 56 shows the reserved balls based on the winning of the first starting port 414a, and a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed. The second reserved ball number display 57 shows the reserved balls based on the winning of the second starting opening 414b, and a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed.

FIG. 78 (a) shows a display mode of the final round in the big hit game state. In the present embodiment, the character information "Round 16" is displayed as the round display 54. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the point value of the point counter exceeds the set value (for example, 240) at the time of the final round. At this time, the illumination array 426 does not emit light. After the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving game starts.

FIG. 78 (b) shows a display mode immediately after the start of the game in the time-saving state. In the present embodiment, "200 more times" is displayed as the remaining number of fluctuation display 55. The fluctuation number display 55 is decremented by "1" each time the derived symbol 53 repeatedly fluctuates and stops. Further, since the point value of the point counter has already exceeded the set value, the illumination array 426 lights up and the character information "Touch !!" is displayed. Then, when the player performs a right-handed strike, the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 416 and the second starting port 414b is frequently opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 78 (c) in the time saving state. In many cases, four reserved symbols are displayed as the second reserved ball number display 57.

Here, by the processing of steps S38 and S48 shown in FIG. 54, the display of the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball determined to perform the look-ahead notice is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 78 (c), the color of the reserved symbol changes from white to blue. By visually recognizing this display, the player can refer to whether or not to operate the touch sensor 425. In the example shown in FIG. 78 (c), the player does not expect the operation of the touch sensor 425 because a big hit cannot be expected so much in blue.

Then, it is assumed that the player continues to hit right and the green reserved symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (d). At this time, the player can expect a big hit in yellow, so FIG. 78
As shown in (e), it is assumed that the touch sensor 425 is operated. At this time, if the yellow reserved symbol changes to green, it can be confirmed that the jackpot is more reliable. As shown in FIG. 78 (e), if the yellow reserved symbol remains, it can be known in advance that there is a high possibility of loss.

If the stop display mode of the identification symbol during the change shown in FIG. 78 (e) is lost, the player operates the touch sensor 425. Therefore, in the next change of the identification symbol, as shown in FIG. 78 (f), the player operates the touch sensor 425. The illumination array 426 goes out and the text information "Touch !!" is not displayed.

As for the player, the player continues to hit right and digests the number of fluctuations, so that the count value of the point counter rises, and when the set value is exceeded after a few minutes, the Illumination Array 426 will be displayed again. It lights up and the text information "Touch !!" is displayed.

When the remaining number of fluctuations becomes small, the player considers to operate the touch sensor 425 if the reserved symbol changes because any color is acceptable. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (g), the reserved symbol turned blue, so when the touch sensor 425 was operated and viewed, the white reserved symbol turned green as shown in FIG. 78 (h). Suppose. In this case, the player sees the change of the identification symbol corresponding to the green reserved symbol while being aware in advance that there is a possibility of loss. Here, in the time-saving state, if the effect content has the lowest jackpot reliability, the variation of the derived symbol 53 corresponding to the reserved symbol usually ends in less than a few seconds, so that the effect time becomes longer first. I hope that. If the effect time is long, the player will see the fluctuation and effect of the derived symbol 53 while further increasing the expectation for the big hit.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, they merely exemplify specific examples and do not particularly limit the present invention. That is, the game machine of the present invention mainly divides the game medium into a game board having a game area in which the game medium can roll, and a first area and a second area different from each other in the game area. A launching means capable of launching a game medium into the game area while adjusting the launch intensity of the game medium, and a first passage forming a first pass area through which the game medium launched into the first area can pass. The area forming member, the second passing area through which the game medium that has passed through the first passing area can pass, and the game medium that is unitized together with the first passing area forming member and passes through the second passing area. A first displacement member that can be displaced to either a first position that facilitates the passage of the game medium or a second position that makes it difficult for the game medium to pass through the second passage region, and a game medium that does not pass through the second passage region. A distribution device that distributes the game medium to one of the first path and the second path that guides the accepted game medium in different directions, and the first path. The third passage area through which the game medium distributed to the second path can pass, the fourth passage area through which the game medium distributed to the second path can pass, and the game medium distributed to the second path can be rolled. And can be displaced to either a third position that facilitates the passage of the game medium through the fourth passage area and a fourth position that makes it difficult for the game medium to pass through the fourth passage area. The second displacement member and the game medium passing over the upper part of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is in the fourth position move from the fourth position of the second displacement member to the third position. A winning easy mechanism that facilitates movement to the fourth passing region side at the time of displacement, and a first out port that allows a game medium that does not pass through the fourth passing region to pass through and is sent out to the outside of the gaming region. And, on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing region, the first determining means for determining whether or not to displace the first displacement member to the first position, and the first determining means Based on the affirmative determination, the second displacement member control means for displaced the first displacement member to the first position and the second passage area on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passage region. Based on the second determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member to the third position and the second determination means making a positive determination, the second displacement member is placed in the third position a predetermined number of times. The game medium has passed through the second displacement member control means to be displaced to, and either the third passage region or the fourth passage region. Based on the above, a game value-imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value, an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on condition that the game medium has passed through the first out port, and the second A second out port for passing a game medium that does not pass through an area that triggers the addition of a predetermined game value by the game value-imparting means and sending the game medium to the outside of the game area in the game medium that rolls the area. The launching means, the first passage region forming member, the second passage region, the first displacement member, the distribution device, the third passage region, the fourth passage region, the second displacement member, and the prize-winning. Specific examples of an easy mechanism, a first out port, a first determination means, a first displacement member control means, a second determination means, a second displacement member control means, a game value imparting means, an effect executing means, a second out port, and the like. The configuration can be changed as appropriate.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the color of the reserved symbol is determined by the processing on the sub-control circuit 200 side, but the color of the reserved symbol is determined on the main control circuit 100 side, and that fact is determined by the sub-control circuit. You may send a command to 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the reserved symbol of the second starting opening prize is configured to be changed by the operation of the touch sensor 425 by the player, but the reserved symbol of the first starting opening winning is changed to the game. Needless to say, it may be configured so that it can be changed by the operation of the touch sensor 425 by a person. In this case, for example, a passage sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the passage port 413c (see FIG. 4) formed on the left side of the central base plate 413 (see FIG. 4) is provided, and this passage sensor detects the game ball. It may be configured to add a predetermined value to the point value of the point counter each time. Further, when the reserved symbol of the first start opening winning is configured to be changeable by the operation of the touch sensor 425 by the player, the process of step S311 in the process shown in FIG. 72 is deleted, and the point value is the set value. If it exceeds, it is desirable to enable the touch sensor 425 to be operated even during the big hit game. As a result, for example, when the normal game is changed to the big hit game when there are four reserved balls, the touch sensor 425 is operated during the big hit game to change the reserved symbol corresponding to the first start opening winning. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not. If a reserved symbol that has turned green appears in the reserved symbol corresponding to the first start opening prize by operating the touch sensor 425, at what point in the time-saving game, for example, the reserved symbol is immediately digested. , The player can derive and display the identification symbol on the green reserved symbol, or if the number of time reductions is 200, 190 times are exhausted and the identification symbol is displayed on the green reserved symbol. It becomes possible to make a decision and give the player a new interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning easy mechanism 424 is formed by the semi-cylindrical rib 424a, but other than that, for example, the surface of the shutter member 422a is corrugated or a minute protrusion is provided. Then, the game ball may be decelerated. In the present embodiment, even if the winning easy mechanism 424 is not used to decelerate the game ball, most of the right-handed game balls can easily win the big winning opening 418. Applicable. For example, in the interval between rounds, a detour route is provided to detour the game ball to the back side of the game board, and the game ball is returned from the detour route to the board of the game board at the timing when the shutter member is opened to win a prize in the big prize opening. good. Further, two shutter members are arranged side by side along the rolling path of the game ball on one large winning opening, a passage is provided between the two shutter members, and the shutter member on the upstream side protruding at the end of the round is provided. The game ball that passed through the aisle is digested while the game ball that has passed through the passage passes through the aisle, and when the interval between rounds ends and the two shutter members are pulled in, the game ball that has passed through the aisle from the downstream shutter member side wins a big prize. It may be something that makes a prize in the mouth.

Further, by preparing LEDs of a plurality of colors as the light source 426b of the illumination array 426 and changing the display color of the latent image 426c, the player may be motivated to operate the touch sensor 425.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the hit probability of the normal symbol game in the normal gaming state is 0%, the identification symbol of the normal symbol game does not change even if the player hits right in the normal gaming state. If the identification symbol of the ordinary symbol game does not fluctuate, the second starting port 414b will not win because the ordinary electric accessory 415 does not operate. In other words, even if you hit right in the normal game state, it will not be in the special game state. Moreover, when hitting right in the normal game state, there are three prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 419d, and the distribution device 421 distributes one ball out of four balls to the left and wins in the general winning opening 419d. However, since the other three balls are out balls, even if all the game balls heading to the left win the general prize opening 419d, the return rate will be 75%, and eventually the number of balls held will decrease. Therefore, since it is disadvantageous for the player to hit right in the normal game state, the player aims to increase the number of balls he has by shifting to the big hit game, and aims to win the first starting opening 414a on the left. You will be able to hit.

Further, according to the above-described embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the first path 423b does not enter either the general winning opening 419d or the third special out opening 420d. It is divided into cases, but it is not limited to that. For example, the third special out opening 420d may be deleted, and the general winning opening 419d may be arranged so that the game ball passing through the first path 423b wins almost 100% in the general winning opening 419d. In this case, since there are three prize balls when the ball enters the general winning opening 419d for the launch of four game balls, the player's ball by the big hit game by hitting right in the big hit game state The increase number is close to, but does not exceed, the increase number when all the game balls fired in the game area 41 win the big prize opening 418 in the big hit game state.

Further, according to the above-described embodiment, the illumination array 426 is used for suggesting the touch of the touch sensor 425 for changing the reserved symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button during the change of the identification symbol for staging is used. It may be used for the production related to the operation. For example, the mode of the touch suggestion by the illumination array 426 and the touch sensor 425 include the touch suggestion of the touch sensor 425 in the staging pattern of changing the staging by operating the staging button 16 (see FIG. 1) to increase the jackpot expectation. The effect may be changed by the operation to raise the jackpot expectation. Further, when the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 is provided with a place for displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the currently changing identification symbol, the touch suggestion is executed during the specific fluctuation effect, and the touch sensor 425 is touched. The color of the reserved symbol may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the production. The method of using the touch sensor 425 may be the same as that of the effect button 16.

Further, in the present embodiment, according to FIG. 10, one LED lamp is arranged on the side of the light guide plate 426a as the light source 426b of the illumination array 426, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of LED lamps are arranged on the light guide plate 426a. It may be arranged side by side on the side of the. As a result, for example, by turning on a plurality of LED lamps in order, it is possible to perform an effect display in which light flows. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol is unlikely to change, the lights are turned on all at once, and when the reserved symbol is likely to change or the reserved symbol changes to a reserved symbol with a high expectation of big hit, the lights are turned on in order. , The effect by the illumination array 426 may be selectable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, according to the flowcharts of FIGS. 66 and 67, the display color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the sub CPU 201 to perform the look-ahead notice by the processing of the main CPU 101 is white. After deciding whether to make it blue or yellow, the reserved symbol to be green is determined, and the reserved symbol changeable flag is associated with the reserved symbol. Then, when the touch sensor 425 is operated, the reserved symbol associated with the reserved symbol changeable flag is changed to green. However, the process of changing the reserved symbol by operating the touch sensor 425 is not limited to the process described above.

For example, first, it is determined whether the display color of the reserved symbol is white, blue, yellow, or green, and then the display color of the reserved symbol to be actually displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 is determined. .. At this time, it is determined to actually display the display color lower than the originally determined original display color, and the reserved symbol of the lower display color is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. Then, when the touch sensor 425 is operated, the lower display color may be changed to the originally determined original display color. This example will be described in detail as a modified example of the present embodiment with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81.

[Modification 2]
In the modification of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 is made to execute the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80 instead of the flowchart of FIGS. 66 and 67 and the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81 instead of the flowchart of FIG. 71. be. Since the other processes are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 80, in step S254, a process of determining the display color of the reserved symbol is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the display color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the variation pattern that is not determined to perform the look-ahead notice by the process of the main CPU 101 to white, and determines that the look-ahead notice is performed by the process of the main CPU 101. The reserved symbol corresponding to is set to one of blue, yellow, and green. Regarding whether to set the display color of the reserved symbol to blue, yellow, or green, the sub CPU 201 refers to the basic display color determination table (not shown), acquires a random number value by random number lottery, and obtains this random number value. And the judgment value for setting the display color are compared with each other to determine the display color. Note that green is a display color of the reserved symbol that changes depending on the operation of the touch sensor 425, which will be described later.

Here, the basic display color determination table used in the modified example will be described. In the basic display color determination table, as in the above-described embodiment, the effect pattern includes a range of random values that are display color setting determination values for determining the display color of the reserved symbol, and a display color setting determination. The display color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the value is associated with and stored in the program ROM 202.

Here, the display colors of the reserved symbols corresponding to the display color setting determination values are three colors of blue, yellow, and green, and the range of the random number values that are the display color setting determination values is any of blue, yellow, and green. It is sorted to select. Specifically, when the jackpot reliability of the effect content corresponding to the effect pattern is low, the display color is set so that blue is easily selected, then yellow is easily selected, and green is the most difficult to select. A range of random values that serve as judgment values is set. Further, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the smaller the range of random numbers corresponding to blue is, and the larger the range of random values corresponding to yellow or green is. The range of random numbers that are the determination values for display color setting is set so that green is most easily selected, then yellow is most easily selected, and blue is most difficult to be selected. Therefore, in the modified example of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white, blue, yellow, and green.

When the random number value acquired by the sub CPU 201 by the random lottery is the display color setting determination value corresponding to blue, the display color of the reserved symbol is set to blue, and the display color setting determination value corresponding to yellow is set. In the case of, the display color of the reserved symbol is set to yellow, and in the case of the display color setting determination value corresponding to green, the display color of the reserved symbol is set to green. The display color of the reserved symbol set in this way is stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 as the original display color of the reserved symbol. When this process is completed, the process of step S255 is transferred.

In step S255, a process of determining whether or not the reserved symbol whose display color is set in step S254 is a reserved symbol corresponding to the second start opening winning is performed. This process is the same as the process of step S252 shown in FIG. 66, and the sub CPU 201 stores the look-ahead notice determination command in the first variation pattern storage area or the second variation pattern storage area. It is determined whether or not the symbol is a reserved symbol due to the winning of the second starting opening. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the symbol is on hold due to the second start opening winning, the process is transferred to step S256, and if it is not determined that the symbol is on hold due to the second start opening winning, the process is transferred to step S257. ..

In step S256, a process of setting the display color of the reserved symbol to be actually displayed is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the display color of the reserved symbol to be actually displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 sets the display color of the reserved symbol set in step S254 (the display color is not changed) or the display color lower than the display color as the display color of the reserved symbol to be actually displayed. In the modified example of the present embodiment, since the upper display colors are in the order of white, blue, yellow, and green, green is the highest display color, and the lower colors of green are white, blue, and yellow. .. Similarly, the lower yellow color is white and blue, the lower blue color is white, and white is the lowest display color.

The sub CPU 201 actually displays whether the display color of the reserved symbol to be actually displayed is the display color of the reserved symbol set in step S254 (the display color is not changed) or a display color lower than the display color. A process of determining a display color is performed by referring to a color determination table (not shown), acquiring a random number value by random lottery, and comparing this random value with the actual display color setting determination value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S257.

Here, the actual display color determination table will be described. In the table for determining the actual display color, the reserved symbol to be actually displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 according to the original display color of the reserved symbol set in step S254, that is, green, yellow, and blue. A range of random values that are judgment values for setting the actual display color used to determine the display color is set. The table for determining the actual display color includes a table for determining the actual display color of the jackpot, which is referred to in the case of an effect pattern that is a jackpot, and a table for determining the actual display color other than the jackpot, which is referred to in the case of an effect pattern other than the jackpot. .. According to the jackpot actual display color determination table, for example, if the original display color of the reserved symbol set in step S254 is green, the range of random numbers corresponding to green (the display color is not changed) corresponds to yellow. The range of random values to be used, the range of random values corresponding to blue, and the range of random values corresponding to white are set. If the display color of the reserved symbol set in step S254 is yellow, the range of random numbers corresponding to yellow (the display color is not changed), the range of random values corresponding to blue, and the range of random values corresponding to white are. It is set. If the display color of the reserved symbol set in step S254 is blue, the range of the random number value corresponding to blue (the display color is not changed) and the range of the random number value corresponding to white are set. If the display color of the reserved symbol set in step S254 is white, white is set as the display color of the reserved symbol to be actually displayed. The table for determining the actual display color other than the jackpot is the actual display of the jackpot in that the range of the random number value corresponding to the blue color corresponding to the green color of the reserved symbol in the table for determining the actual display color of the jackpot is not set. It is different from the color determination table.

That is, in the modification of the present embodiment, the setting included in the table for determining the actual display color of the jackpot and not in the table for determining the actual display color other than the jackpot is included, and the original display color is actually green. The setting that blue is selected as the display color of is included only in the table for determining the actual display color of the jackpot. Therefore, when the reserved symbol is initially blue and the reserved symbol turns green by the operation of the touch sensor 425, the jackpot is confirmed.

The process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81 includes the process of step S304 instead of the process of step S303 in the flowchart of FIG. 71. In step S304, a process of setting the data of the original display color of the reserved symbol is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 is set in the process of step S254, and performs a process of setting the display color data of the reserved symbol stored in the work RAM 203 in a predetermined area for transmission of the work RAM 203. The data of the display color of the original reserved symbol set in the work RAM 203 is transmitted to the display control circuit 210 by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. The display control circuit 210 displays the reserved symbol of the original display color set in the process of step S254 in the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50 based on the received display color data of the reserved symbol. Let me. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, according to the modification of the present embodiment, the display color of the reserved symbol is displayed in the display area 51 of the liquid crystal display device 50 first with the display color lower than the original display color, and the touch sensor 425. When is operated, the lower display color is changed to the original display color. Therefore, by operating the touch sensor 425, the player can see that the reserved symbol has changed from the lower display color to the upper display color, so that the expectation for the big hit can be amplified. Specifically, the display colors of the reserved symbols before and after the operation of the touch sensor 425 are white to white, white to blue, white to yellow, white to green, blue to yellow, blue to green, yellow to green, and the like. Changes to.

Further, in the modified example of the present embodiment, the setting that blue is selected as the actual display color when the original display color is green is included only in the jackpot actual display color determination table, in other words, When the first display color of the reserved symbol is blue and the reserved symbol changes to green by the operation of the touch sensor 425, the big hit is confirmed. In this way, it is possible to set a specific color change so that it is determined only in the case of a big hit. Furthermore, if the initial display color of the reserved symbol is white or yellow and the reserved symbol changes to green by the operation of the touch sensor 425, it may be lost.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead notice (holding ball notice), the sub CPU 201 determines the display color of the holding symbol, and further, the touch sensor. The reserved symbol to be changed and the display color thereof are determined by the operation of 425, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main CPU 101, it is determined whether or not to perform a look-ahead notice (holding ball notice), and whether or not to change the color by operating the touch sensor 425 is determined, and the result is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 , The display color of the reserved symbol for which the look-ahead notice is given and the display color when the touch sensor 425 is operated may be appropriately determined. Further, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to give a look-ahead notice (holding ball notice), further determines the display color of the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball decided to give the look-ahead notice, and touch sensor 425. It is determined whether or not to change by the operation of, and the result is transmitted to the sub CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 201 may determine the display color of the reserved symbol to be changed by the operation of the touch sensor 425.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the second embodiment of the present invention, the differences from the first embodiment of the present invention described above will be described, and the same points as the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. Omit.

In the embodiment of the present invention, the special symbol display device 431 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying the special symbol. The main CPU 101 starts the variation of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 when the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined variation display end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 starts the variation. It constitutes a symbol changing means for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431.

Further, the main CPU 101 constitutes a gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state between the normal gaming state and the special gaming state. The sub CPU 201 constitutes an effect determining means capable of determining an effect and an effect executing means for executing the effect.

Further, the program ROM 202 constitutes an effect data storage means for storing the effect data referred to when the predetermined effect is executed and the effect data referred to when the predetermined effect is not executed. Here, the predetermined effect includes an effect described later such as a 1P effect and a touch point MAX effect.

[Command analysis processing]
The command analysis process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. First, in step S400 of FIG. 82, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a received command. If it is determined that there is no received command (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process.

If it is determined that there is a received command (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S401. In step S401, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command received in the sub control circuit interrupt process and executes the process of step S402.

In step S402, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S403. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S405.

In step S403, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect pattern determination process. In the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect table shown in FIG. 77 based on the variation pattern designation command analyzed in step S401 and the random value extracted for the effect pattern determination, and obtains the effect pattern. Determined and stored in the work RAM 203.

After executing the process of step S403, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S404. In step S404, the sub CPU 201 executes the point giving effect setting process described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, and ends the command analysis process.

In step S405, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the derived symbol designation command has been received. If it is determined that the derived symbol designation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S406. If it is determined that the derived symbol designation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S407.

In step S406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the derived symbol. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the derived symbol corresponding to the derived symbol designation command received from the main control circuit 100, and displays the derived symbol on the display area 51 (see FIG. 4) of the liquid crystal display device 50. Data is stored in the work RAM 203.

In step S407, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the read-ahead notice determination command has been received. If it is determined that the read-ahead notice determination command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S408. If it is determined that the read-ahead notice determination command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S411 (FIG. 83).

In step S408, the sub CPU 201 executes the point-giving effect setting process described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. After executing the process of step S408, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S409.

In step S409, the sub CPU 201 executes the look-ahead notice effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 86. After executing the process of step S409, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S410.

In step S410, the sub CPU 201 executes the look-ahead continuous effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 87. After executing the process of step S410, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process.

In step S411 shown in FIG. 83, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a second out-ball command (hereinafter, simply referred to as “out-ball command”) has been received. If it is determined that the out-ball command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S412. If it is determined that the out-ball command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S413.

In step S412, the sub CPU 201 executes the out-mouth / entry-in-ball effect processing described with reference to FIG. 88. After executing the process of step S412, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process.

In step S413, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the demo display command has been received. If it is determined that the demo display command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S414. If it is determined that the demo display command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S415.

In step S414, the sub CPU 201 executes the demonstration in-probability notification effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 89. After executing the process of step S414, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process.

In step S415, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs processes corresponding to commands other than the fluctuation pattern designation command, the derived symbol designation command, the look-ahead notice determination command, the out-ball command, and the demo display command. After executing the process of step S415, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process.

[Point grant effect setting process]
Hereinafter, the point-giving effect setting process executed in the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

First, in step S420 of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S421. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S428 (FIG. 85).

In step S421, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point MAX effect flag is 1. Here, the touch point MAX effect flag is a touch that sets the current touch point as a set value (for example, 5 points in the embodiment, a value set as an upper limit, a value sufficient to execute the effect, etc.). Indicates whether or not to execute a point MAX effect (for example, when the current touch point is 1 point, an effect of adding 4 points is executed and a MAX point of 5 points is executed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be controlled to indicate whether or not the touch point is a set value.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, the point value (sometimes referred to simply as "point") is added in the point counting process described with reference to FIG. 68. In the present embodiment, for example, as described later in the processing of S431 or S434, the point value is added as a touch point according to the selected effect. Expressions such as values, numbers, and points are values that can include 0.

Further, the point value in the present embodiment is provided with an upper limit value, and the upper limit value is set to "5". Further, the set value in the present embodiment will be described as "5". That is, the point value in the present embodiment is limited to the set value.

In some cases, the set value and the upper limit value are described as MAX points, but if the points can be accumulated beyond the set value (more than 5 points), a value of 5 or more is set as the set value or the upper limit value. In this case, if the point value reaches 5, the effect mode is changed according to the player's operation (for example, before touching as in FIGS. 101 (b) to 101 (c)). Since the effect that the item is changed to the item after touching) may be executed, the MAX point indicates 5 points, and the specified value may be 5 points or more, so the point value. The expression that is MAX may be expressed as the point value satisfying the execution condition of the effect, or it may be expressed that the point value has reached the set value, so that the point value can be accumulated. Even if it is not the maximum value, it may be expressed that the point value is MAX.

If it is determined in step S421 that the touch point MAX effect flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S422. If it is determined that the touch point MAX effect flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S425.

In step S422, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a 5.0 second fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern is HN00 (see FIG. 75)) and there is a stage change. Here, the stage change means that the effect stage, which is a display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50, such as the identification symbol and the background of the identification symbol, is changed. The staging stage in this embodiment includes a "normal stage", a "choi heat stage", and a "super heat stage".

Here, if the fluctuation fluctuates by 5.0 seconds and the stage is changed, it takes time to change the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 to the display suitable for each stage effect at the time of the stage change. (For example, if the time required for the stage change is 3.0 seconds and the shortest effect time of the effect of adding touch points is 4.0 seconds, the time required for the effect is 7.0 seconds, which is 5.0. Since it does not fit in the fluctuation of seconds, it is not possible to execute the effect of adding touch points.) If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not enough to perform the effect of adding touch points, in S427, 5. It is possible to control to select another effect that can be performed during the 0 second fluctuation. The identification symbol can be expressed as a special symbol, a normal symbol, or a decorative symbol (derived symbol), and the effect of each embodiment can be executed regardless of which symbol is used.

For example, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice, whether or not the selection result (or lottery, determination) of the special symbol includes a selection result that is a big hit, and whether or not the variable display is suspended for the special symbol. The stage change is executed by a lottery based on the selection rate according to the selection result or the effect pattern corresponding to the change (for example, the change pattern) of the selection result.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 executes the stage change, it may be executed before the start of the change of the identification symbol or after the start of the change of the identification symbol, when the stage change is performed during the change, or before the start of the big hit. It is possible to change the stage at various timings, such as changing the stage after the big hit, changing the stage according to the game state, and so on.

If it is determined in step S422 that the fluctuation is a variation of 5.0 seconds and there is a stage change (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S427. If it is determined that the fluctuation is not a fluctuation of 5.0 seconds or there is no stage change (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S423.

In step S423, the sub CPU 201 selects a variable effect (touch point MAX effect) in which the touch point is MAX (for example, a set value or an upper limit value). After executing the process of step S423, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S424.

In this embodiment, the touch point MAX effect, which is a look-ahead effect, and the "look-ahead notice effect in which the touch point becomes MAX" are collectively referred to as the touch point MAX effect, and the "touch point becomes MAX". There is a case where it is collectively called a touch point MAX effect, but an effect in which the touch point becomes MAX can exist in any effect, and the touch point which is a look-ahead effect is MAX. The staging that becomes is the first staging, the staging that the touch point that is the variable staging becomes MAX may be the second staging, and the staging of 1 touch point MAX can be executed as the look-ahead staging or the fluctuating staging. May be good.

Further, when the touch point exceeds the set value (for example, exceeds 5 points) and can be stored, if the player operates the operating means (for example, the effect button 16, the touch sensor 425, etc.), the touch is made. FIG. 101 (b), which is an effect indicating that the effect of changing (switching, changing, etc.) the previous item to the item after touching, is changed to FIG. 101 (c), or FIG. 101 (c). It is also possible to control the addition of touch points so that the condition for displaying the effect such as) is satisfied at least once.

In step S424, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch point MAX effect flag to 0. After executing the process of step S424, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S427.

In step S425, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point is MAX. If it is determined that the touch point is MAX (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S427. If it is determined that the touch point is not MAX (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S426.

In step S426, the sub CPU 201 selects whether or not to execute the 1P effect in which 1 is added to the touch points based on the fluctuation pattern and various effects. Here, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the 1P effect is to be executed, 1 is added to the touch points to select the 1P effect that can be executed as the variable effect. After executing the process of step S426, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S427.

In step S427, the sub CPU 201 selects another variation effect. Here, the sub CPU 201 attaches a touch icon to the treasure box hold symbol if the touch point is MAX during the period when the treasure box hold symbol is displayed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 selects, for example, effect image data according to an effect pattern as other variable effects other than the effect related to the addition of touch points. After executing the process of step S427, the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

In step S428 shown in FIG. 85, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the read-ahead notice determination command has been received. If it is determined that the read-ahead notice determination command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S429. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice determination command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

In step S429, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 1 is set in the touch point MAX effect flag. If it is determined that 1 is set in the touch point MAX effect flag (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S430. If it is determined that 1 is not set in the touch point MAX effect flag (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S433.

In step S430, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a 5.0 second fluctuation and there is a stage change. If it is determined that the fluctuation is a 5.0 second fluctuation and there is a stage change (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S435. If it is determined that the fluctuation is not a fluctuation of 5.0 seconds or there is no stage change (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S431.

In step S431, the sub CPU 201 selects a look-ahead advance notice effect (touch point MAX effect) in which the touch point becomes MAX. After executing the process of step S431, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S432.

In step S432, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch point MAX effect flag to 0. After executing the process of step S432, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S435.

In step S433, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point is MAX. If it is determined that the touch point is MAX (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S435. If it is determined that the touch point is not MAX (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S434.

In step S434, the sub CPU 201 selects whether or not to execute the 1P effect in which 1 is added to the touch points based on the variation pattern in which the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed and various effects. Here, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the 1P effect is to be executed, 1 is added to the touch points to select the 1P effect that can be executed as the look-ahead effect. After executing the process of step S434, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S435.

In step S435, the sub CPU 201 here attaches a touch icon to the treasure box holding symbol if the touch point is MAX during the period in which the treasure box holding symbol is displayed. Further, the sub CPU 201 selects a look-ahead effect other than the effect related to the addition of the touch point. After executing the process of step S435, the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

In this way, the addition of touch points in the point granting effect setting process is performed as a variable effect at the time of fluctuation (at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, etc.), and the first start port 414a or the second start port. It may be performed as a look-ahead notice effect from the selection result at the time of winning a prize for 414b (hereinafter, simply referred to as "starting mouth winning prize").

In addition, in steps S426 and S434 of the point giving effect setting process described above, it was explained that the sub CPU 201 selects whether or not to execute the 1P effect in which 1 is added to the touch points, but the touch points do not exceed MAX. In a range (for example, a range that does not exceed a set value or an upper limit value), it may be selected whether or not to execute an effect in which 2 or more are added to the touch points.

[Pre-reading notice effect setting process]
Hereinafter, the look-ahead advance notice effect setting process executed by the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

When it is determined from the look-ahead notice command or the like that the sub CPU 201 executes the look-ahead notice effect, first, in step S440, the sub CPU 201 selects the display color of the reserved symbol. After executing the process of step S440, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S441.

In step S441, the sub CPU 201 sets the data representing the display color of the reserved symbol in the work RAM 203. After executing the process of step S441, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S442.

In step S442, the sub CPU 201 shifts to a probabilistic state as a result of selection (or lottery, determination) of a special symbol whose variable display is suspended. The variable effect selection table shown in FIG. 94 or 95 is set in the work RAM 203 depending on whether or not the "big hit" is included, and the variable effect pattern is selected based on the variable effect selection table set in the work RAM 203. .. After executing the process of step S442, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S443.

In step S443, the sub CPU 201 refers to the post-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 96, and from the effect pattern and the variation effect pattern set in step S442, the liquid crystal display is obtained by the effective operation of the touch sensor 425 constituting the operation detection means. The post-touch item displayed on the display device 50 (for example, if it is a hold symbol and the post-touch item TA2 of FIG. 96 is selected, the sword hold display shown in FIG. 101 (e) is displayed). select. After executing the process of step S443, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S444.

The effective operation may be the case where the operation of the effect button 16 is detected. If the touch sensor 425 is used as the first operation means and the effect button 16 is used as the second operation means, a specific operation may be performed. While the effect is being executed (for example, when the special effect described in the effect table of FIG. 77 is being executed), the effective operation of the first operating means can be detected, and the effective operation of the second operating means is effective. The operation may be undetectable. Further, the item after touch does not have to be limited to the reserved symbol, and is not limited to this as long as it is an effect to be executed when the touch is made (when the operation means is operated).

In step S444, the sub CPU 201 sets the post-touch item pattern representing the post-touch item selected in step S443 in the work RAM 203. After executing the process of step S444, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S445.

In step S445, the sub CPU 201 refers to the pre-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 97 to determine whether or not the result of selecting (or drawing, deciding) a special symbol whose variable display is suspended includes a big hit. The corresponding effect pattern (or special symbol variation pattern, selection result, etc.) and the post-touch item pattern set in step S444 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 until an effective operation is detected by the touch sensor 425. Select an item pattern before touch (for example, a reserved symbol). After executing the process of step S445, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S446.

As the pre-touch item, for example, when TB1 in FIG. 97 is selected, a black treasure box symbol is selected as the treasure box symbol in FIG. 101 (b), and the treasure box symbol is displayed before or during display. When the touch point reaches the specified value or the upper limit value (when it reaches MAX), the touch icon on the treasure box pattern as shown in Fig. 101 (c) (when an effective operation of the operation means is detected, the pre-touch item changes to the post-touch item. It changes (changes, switches, etc.) to a black treasure chest holding pattern with a touch icon with an effect (indicating that it is possible).

The item before touch does not have to be limited to the reserved symbol, and if it is an effect that is displayed before or at the same time as the effect that is executed when the item is touched (when the operation means is operated), this is used. Not limited.

However, by detecting the operation of the operation means and displaying the post-touch item once before the post-touch item is displayed, and then displaying the pre-touch item, once the operation means is operated. There is an effect that notifies that the displayed post-touch item is displayed (including an effect mode in which the pre-displayed post-touch item is displayed again when the operation means is operated). In some cases, the post-touch item may be displayed before the pre-touch item, so that the pre-touch item and the post-touch item can be displayed at various timings.

As the pre-touch item, any of the reserved symbols with the touch icon and the reserved symbol without the touch icon can be treated as the pre-touch item.

Further, when the touch icon is attached to the pre-touch item, the effective operation of the operation means is not detected, and the change related to the pre-touch item with the touch icon is executed, the change starts. The post-touch item may be displayed at the time, during the fluctuation, or at the end of the fluctuation, or the post-touch item may be controlled not to be displayed in the fluctuation unless an effective operation of the operating means is detected. It may be controlled so that the item is not displayed after the touch regardless of the detection of the effective operation of the operation means.

In step S446, the sub CPU 201 sets the pre-touch item pattern selected in step S445 in the work RAM 203. After executing the process of step S446, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S447.

In step S447, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current touch point is MAX. If it is determined that the current touch point is not MAX (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S448. If it is determined that the current touch point is MAX (YES), the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead advance notice effect setting process.

In step S448, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved items is more than 1. If it is determined that the number of reserved items is not more than 1, (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the pre-reading notice effect setting process. If it is determined that the number of reserved items is more than 1, (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S449.

In this embodiment, when the number of reserved pieces is more than 1, the points are set to MAX (for example, 5 points in the embodiment, a value set as an upper limit, a value sufficient to execute the effect, etc.). Is controlled to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to control to execute when the number of pending numbers is 1 or more or 0.

In step S449, the sub CPU 201 selects by lottery whether or not to set the touch point to MAX in the next variation of the special symbol. After executing the process of step S449, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S450.

In step S450, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point is selected to be MAX in the next variation of the special symbol. If it is determined that the touch point is set to MAX in the next variation of the special symbol (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S451. If it is determined that the touch point is set to MAX in the next fluctuation of the special symbol (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead advancement effect setting process.

In step S451, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch point MAX effect flag to 1. After executing the process of step S451, the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead advance notice effect setting process.

When 1 is set in the touch point MAX effect flag, for example, a variable effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect in which the determination of S421 in FIG. 84 or S429 in FIG. 85 becomes YES and the touch point becomes MAX may be executed. ..

[Read-ahead continuous effect setting process]
Hereinafter, the look-ahead continuous effect setting process executed by the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

When it is determined from the look-ahead notice command or the like that the sub CPU 201 executes the look-ahead continuous effect, in the look-ahead continuous effect setting process, the sub CPU 201 is predetermined (for example, the same color) at the end of the fluctuation as shown in FIGS. 102 to 107. Work data for pre-reading continuous production that stops and displays a combination of symbols (for example, "2, 4, 8", "3, 5, 7", etc.) on the liquid crystal display device 50 with an effect. Set to RAM 203.

In the look-ahead continuous effect setting process, by continuously executing the look-ahead continuous effect at the end of the fluctuation, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot at the time of the next change in which the look-ahead continuous effect is executed.

It should be noted that the continuous pre-reading effect is executed continuously at the end of the fluctuation when the effect content (scenario) of the continuous pre-reading effect is determined and the continuous pre-reading effect is executed for each change. It is also assumed that the effect content of the look-ahead continuous effect is executed in the fluctuation of 1.

In such a case, an effect mode in which the effect content (scenario) of the look-ahead continuous effect is executed at each temporary stop of the symbol (for example, an effect that the symbol is temporarily stopped with an effect at each temporary stop). Since the mode is assumed), it can be said that the expression of stopping the symbol or displaying the combination of the symbols can include the stop of the symbol and the temporary stop.

First, in step S460, the sub CPU 201 refers to the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIGS. 98 and 104, and selects a scenario of the look-ahead continuous effect according to the effect pattern and the currently stored reserved number. After executing the process of step S460, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S461.

In addition, although it was controlled to select the scenario of the look-ahead continuous production according to the production pattern and the number of pending productions currently stored, it is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, whether it is a big hit or not, and the big hit. It may be controlled to select the effect according to whether or not to shift to the probability change after the end, the game state when the fluctuation related to the big hit is executed, the current game state, the game state after the big hit, and the like. ..

In step S461, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 1 is set in the look-ahead continuous effect flag indicating whether or not the look-ahead continuous effect is set. If it is determined that 1 is set in the look-ahead continuous effect flag (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S462. If it is determined that 1 is not set in the look-ahead continuous effect flag (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S467.

Further, the look-ahead continuous effect setting process is executed when it is determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the look-ahead continuous effect based on the type of command received by the sub CPU 201, the lottery of the effect, and the like. Since 1 is set in the look-ahead continuous effect flag in S468, when 1 is set in the look-ahead continuous effect flag, it can be determined that the scenario of the look-ahead continuous effect has already been set. Since the look-ahead continuous effect is an effect that has the possibility of being executed over a plurality of variations, it is possible to select the effect contents for the plurality of variations by selecting one scenario.

In step S462, the sub CPU 201 compares the already set scenario of the look-ahead continuous effect with the scenario of the pre-reading continuous effect selected this time, and extracts the effect in which the execution timings overlap. After executing the process of step S462, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S463.

Here, the effect of overlapping execution timings will be described in detail later, but as shown in FIG. 103, for example, as the look-ahead continuous effect for the fourth hold, the effect contents of "blue", "blue", and "none" are used. After being selected, the fluctuation for the first hold starts, and during the fluctuation of the first hold, the starting port (first starting port 414a or second starting port 414b) has a prize, and the number of holdings is 4 again. At the same time, assuming that the production contents of "red", "red", and "blue" are selected as the look-ahead continuous production for the new fourth hold, each symbol will be displayed at the end of the change of the first hold. "2, 4, 8" whose color is blue is stopped and displayed, and the scenarios of "blue", "blue", and "none" are executed for one variation, and practically "blue", "none", and "none" are executed. "None" is set, and "blue" is set as the new first hold effect content. However, since the production contents of "red", "red", and "rainbow" have been newly decided as the look-ahead continuous production for the new fourth hold, should the production content of the first hold be "blue"? , It is necessary to select whether to make it "red". It is possible to express such a situation as a state in which there is an effect in which the execution timings overlap. Simply, when the already set scenario and the newly set scenario exist, the execution timings overlap in the same manner. It can be judged that the production exists.

In step S463, the sub CPU 201 identifies the “none” effect from the already set pre-reading continuous effect scenario. After executing the process of step S463, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S464.

In step S464, the sub CPU 201 sets a newly selected look-ahead continuous effect effect mode for the “none” effect specified in step S463. After executing the process of step S464, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S465.

In the example of FIG. 103 described above, "blue" is set for the effect content of the first hold as the pre-reading continuous effect that has already been set, and "red" is used for the first to third holds. When the effect contents of "," "red", and "rainbow" are newly selected, the final effect contents to be executed are "blue", "red", and "虻". It can be said that the setting of such an effect mode is an example of the process of setting the effect mode of the newly selected look-ahead continuous effect for the effect of "none".

In step S465, the sub CPU 201 sets the look-ahead continuous effect flag to 0. After executing the process of step S465, the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead continuous effect setting process.

In step S467, the sub CPU 201 sets the selected look-ahead continuous effect scenario. After executing the process of step S467, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S468.

In step S468, the sub CPU 201 sets the look-ahead continuous effect flag to 1. After executing the process of step S468, the sub CPU 201 ends the look-ahead continuous effect setting process.

In this embodiment, when the selected look-ahead continuous effect is set, 1 is set in the look-ahead continuous effect flag, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the already set look-ahead continuous effect does not exist, When the look-ahead continuous effect is set, the continuous effect flag may be controlled not to be set to 1.

[Out entrance ball production process]
Hereinafter, the out-mouth / in-ball effect effect process executed by the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. The out-port entry-in-ball effect processing is performed on the second out-ball detection sensor 117b (FIG. 51) constituting the discharge medium detecting means for detecting the game medium passing through the second special out-port 420c (see FIG. 4) as a predetermined discharge port. It is executed when the out ball command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received when the game medium is detected by (see).

In this embodiment, when the gaming state changes (for example, when the normal gaming state changes to the probabilistic gaming state or when the probabilistic gaming state changes to the normal gaming state, etc.), such as before the start of the jackpot or after the end of the jackpot. It is possible to notify which area of the game area (for example, the area on the left side, the area on the right side, etc.) the game ball is to be fired.

When such a notification is made, the player can grasp the game area in which the game ball should be launched, and thereafter, unless otherwise indicated, the game ball is launched into one of the game areas. In many cases, the game is performed on the premise that the game ball is not fired to the other game area.

However, even if such a game is performed, depending on the operation condition of the player's operating means, the game ball rolls to the other game area even if the game ball is intended to be launched into one game area. There is a case like that.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the player is in the normal gaming state (for example, during normal), the player basically launches the gaming ball to the left side of the gaming area, but the launching means (for example, operation). Depending on the operation condition of the means), there is a possibility that the game ball rolls to the right side of the game area. In such a case, when the second out ball detection sensor 117b detects the game ball, the main CPU 101 The out ball command will be sent from.

In this embodiment, there are two out-ball detection sensors (first out-ball detection sensor 117a, second out-ball detection sensor 117b, etc.), but the sub CPU 201 has a game ball in which out-ball detection sensor. It is possible to know whether it was detected.

First, in step S470, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state, that is, in the normal gaming state. If it is determined that the process is normal (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S471. If it is determined that it is not normal, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S473.

Here, the term "normally medium" indicates a state including a non-time-saving state and a non-probability state, or a non-time-saving state and a probable change state, but is not limited to this, and may include a time-saving state and a non-probability state. May be.

The time-saving state may indicate a high-probability state of a normal symbol, the probabilistic state may indicate a high-probability state of a special symbol, the non-time-saving state may indicate a low-probability state of a normal symbol, and the non-probability state may indicate a low-probability state of a special symbol. May indicate the status of.

In step S471, if the current gaming state is the latent probability change, the sub CPU 201 refers to the latent probability change notification table shown in FIG. 99 and selects an effect related to the notification of the latent probability change. After executing the process of step S471, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S472.

In step S472, the sub CPU 201 is set in the work RAM 203 to execute the effect selected from the latent probability change notification table. After executing the process of step S472, the sub CPU 201 ends the out-port entry ball effect effect process.

In step S473, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the big hit, that is, in the special gaming state. If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S474. If it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the out-mouth / entry-in-ball effect processing.

In step S474, it is determined whether or not the selection (or lottery, determination) result of the special symbol whose variable display is suspended includes a jackpot, that is, whether or not there is a jackpot in the suspension. If it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S475. If it is determined that there is no big hit in the hold (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S476.

In step S475, the sub CPU 201 refers to the hold continuous notification effect selection table shown in FIG. 100, and selects an effect when there is a big hit in the hold. After executing the process of step S475, the sub CPU 201 ends the out-port entry ball effect effect process.

In step S476, the sub CPU 201 refers to the hold continuous notification effect selection table shown in FIG. 100, and selects an effect when there is no big hit in the hold. After executing the process of step S476, the sub CPU 201 ends the out-mouth entry ball effect effect process.

It should be noted that steps S474 to S476 in the above-mentioned out-mouth entry ball production process may be executed only for the type of special gaming state (for example, probability variation big hit), and are limited to the special gaming state in which the number of round games is a specific number or more. It may be executed only in a specific round game in a special gaming state.

It should be noted that steps S474 to S476 in the above-mentioned outro ball entry effect processing may be executed according to the type of special game state (for example, probability variation big hit), and when the number of round games is a specific number or more in the special game state. It may be executed, it may be executed at a specific round game in a special gaming state, or it may be a combination of each condition. Furthermore, even if the game is controlled to perform an effect when the ball enters the outro when the big hit game state is continuous (for example, when the hold to be digested next to the already executed big hit is a big hit). good.

[Demonstration latency notification effect setting process]
Hereinafter, the demonstration in-probability notification effect setting process executed by the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 89.

First, in step S480, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability change. If it is determined that the current gaming state is latent probability change (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S481. If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent probability change (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the latent probability notification effect setting process during the demonstration.

In step S481, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect suggesting that the gaming state is a latent probability change. After executing the process of step S481, the sub CPU 201 ends the process of setting the latent probability notification effect during the demonstration.

If it is determined in step S480 that the current gaming state is not the latent probability change, the sub CPU 201 may select an effect suggesting that the gaming state may be the latent probability change.

That is, the sub CPU 201 may select an effect suggesting the possibility that the gaming state is the latent probability change, regardless of whether or not the current gaming state is the latent probability change. In this case, the sub CPU 201 may execute an effect having a different selection rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is a latent probability change.

[Touch sensor effect processing]
The touch sensor effect processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. The touch sensor effect processing according to the present embodiment is the touch sensor activation process described with reference to FIG. 70 and the touch sensor effect process described with reference to FIG. 71 in the first embodiment of the present invention. Is executed instead of.

First, in step S490, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point is MAX, that is, whether or not the point value is equal to or greater than the set value. If it is determined that the point value is equal to or greater than the set value (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S491. If it is determined that the point value is not equal to or greater than the set value (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S491, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the treasure box holding symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. If it is determined that the treasure box reserved symbol is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S492. If it is determined that the treasure box hold symbol is not in the displayed period (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S492, the sub CPU 201 sets 1 to the touch sensor activation flag indicating whether or not the detection result of the touch sensor 425 is valid. After executing the process of step S492, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S493.

In step S493, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation detection flag indicating whether or not a valid operation is detected by the touch sensor 425 is 1. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S494. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S494, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor enable flag to 0. After executing the process of step S494, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S495.

In step S495, the sub CPU 201 sets the display of the effect after the touch when the effective operation is detected by the touch sensor 425. For example, the sub CPU 201 changes the reserved symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 to the reserved symbol after touching. After executing the process of step S495, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S496.

In step S496, the sub CPU 201 subtracts the set value from the point value. In this embodiment, since the set value and the upper limit value are set to be equal, the sub CPU 201 may simply set the point value to 0. After executing the process of step S496, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect process.

[Touch sensor status control process]
Hereinafter, the touch sensor state control process executed as one of the interrupt processes periodically executed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 91.

First, in step S500, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation is detected by the touch sensor 425. If it is determined that the operation is detected by the touch sensor 425 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S501. If it is determined that the operation is not detected by the touch sensor 425 (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S503.

In step S501, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 1 is set in the touch sensor enable flag. If it is determined that 1 is set in the touch sensor activation flag (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S502. If it is determined that 1 is not set in the touch sensor activation flag (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S503.

In step S502, the sub CPU 201 sets the operation detection flag to 1. After executing the process of step S502, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor state control process.

In step S503, the sub CPU 201 sets the operation detection flag to 0. After executing the process of step S503, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor state control process.

In this way, the sub CPU 201 constantly monitors the detection state of the touch sensor 425, and the detection result of the touch sensor 425 is in a state where the operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected before the detection result of the touch sensor 425 becomes effective. Is enabled, it is assumed that the touch sensor 425 has detected a valid operation.

For example, in the touch sensor effect processing described with reference to FIG. 90, the point value of the sub CPU 201 is equal to or higher than the set value (S490) even when the operation is continuously detected by the touch sensor 425, and the liquid crystal display device 50. During the period in which the reserved symbol is displayed (S491), the display of the effect after the touch in which the effective operation is detected by the touch sensor 425 is set (S495).

[Big hit production control process]
Hereinafter, the jackpot effect control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. For example, the jackpot effect control process is executed as one of the interrupt processes periodically executed by the sub CPU 201 in the special gaming state.

First, in step S510 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 418 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “attacker”) has been received. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the attacker has won a prize.

If it is determined that the attacker has won a prize (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S511. If it is determined that the attacker has not won a prize (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S512.

In step S511, the sub CPU 201 sets the data of the effect (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “acquired number display effect”) of adding the number of prize balls when the attacker wins to the acquired number in the work RAM 203.

The number of acquisitions may be the number of acquisitions in the special gaming state, or may be the cumulative number of acquisitions in the continuous special gaming state without becoming a non-time saving state. After executing the process of step S511, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S512.

In step S512, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times of the special gaming state (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the number of consecutive big hits”) that has continued without being in the non-time saving state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more. to decide.

In step S512, the sub CPU 201 may determine whether or not the number of consecutive big hits is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), and the number of consecutive big hits is a multiple of a predetermined value (for example, 5 times or 10 times). , 15 times, etc.).

If it is determined in step S512 that the number of consecutive big hits is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S520. If it is determined that the number of consecutive big hits is not more than the predetermined number (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S513.

In step S513, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command indicating that the game ball has won a prize has been received in the general winning opening 419d (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “other hole”). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a prize in the other hole.

If it is determined that there is a prize in the other hole (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S514. If it is determined that there is no prize in the other hole (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S516.

In step S514, the sub CPU 201 sets the data of the effect when there is a prize in the other hole (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the effect of winning the other hole”) in the work RAM 203. For example, the sub CPU 201 works as an effect of producing a prize in another hole by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 50 in which a fairy brings a number indicating the number of prize balls when a prize is won in the other hole. Set to RAM 203. After executing the process of step S514, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S515. The effect of winning the other hole is not limited to the above-mentioned effect, and may be any form of the effect as long as it can notify that the other hole has won a prize.

In step S515, the sub CPU 201 sets the data of the winning number display effect of adding the number of prize balls when a prize is won in another hole to the winning number in the work RAM 203. The sub CPU 201 may not include the number of prize balls when there is a prize in another hole in the number of winnings. In this case, the process of step S515 is omitted from the big hit medium effect control process. After executing the process of step S515, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S516.

In step S516, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning the attacker in each round game in the special game state has overflowed more than a preset number.

If it is determined that there is an overflow (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S517. If it is determined that there is no overflow (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S518.

In step S517, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the overflow (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “overflow effect”). After executing the process of step S517, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S518.

In step S518, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the acquisition number flag indicating whether or not the condition for displaying the acquisition number is satisfied is 1. If it is determined that the acquired number flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S519. If it is determined that the acquired number flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S524 (FIG. 93).

In step S519, the sub CPU 201 sets a display regarding the number of acquisitions. After executing the process of step S519, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S524.

In step S520, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the acquired number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2600). If it is determined that the acquired number exceeds a predetermined number (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S521. If it is determined that the acquired number does not exceed the predetermined number (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S522.

In step S521, the sub CPU 201 sets the acquired number display flag to 1. After executing the process of step S521, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S522.

In step S522, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has ended. If it is determined that the jackpot has been completed (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S523. If it is determined that the jackpot has not been completed (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S518.

In step S523, the sub CPU 201 sets the acquired number display flag to 0. After executing the process of step S523, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S518.

In step S524 of FIG. 93, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the acquisition number display effect. Specifically, when the data of the acquired number display effect is set in the work RAM 203, the sub CPU 201 determines that the acquired number display effect is performed, and the data of the acquired number display effect is set in the work RAM 203. If not, it is determined that the acquisition number display effect is not performed.

If it is determined that the acquired number display effect is to be performed (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S525, and if it is determined that the acquired number display effect is not performed (NO), the sub CPU 201 is stepped. The process of S526 is executed.

In step S525, the sub CPU 201 sets the display priority of the layer for displaying the image of the acquired number display effect to 3. Here, the display priority represents the position of the layer for displaying the image related to the effect on the liquid crystal display device 50. The display priority in this embodiment becomes lower as the value becomes larger.

Layers with high display priority are displayed in the foreground, and layers with low display priority are displayed in the back of layers with high display priority. That is, the image of the layer having a high display priority is not hidden by the image of the layer having a low display priority, but the image of the layer having a low display priority is hidden by the image of the layer having a high display priority. There is. After executing the process of step S525, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S526.

In step S526, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to produce the other hole winning effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning number display effect is performed when the data of the effect of winning the other hole is set in the work RAM 203, and the data of the effect of winning the other hole is set in the work RAM 203. If not, it is determined that the acquisition number display effect is not performed.

If it is determined that the other hole winning effect is to be performed (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S527, and if it is determined that the other hole winning effect is not performed (NO), the sub CPU 201 is , The process of step S528 is executed.

In step S527, the sub CPU 201 sets the display priority of the layer for displaying the image of the effect of winning another hole to 2. After executing the process of step S527, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S528.

In step S528, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the overflow effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines that the overflow effect is performed when the overflow effect data is set in the work RAM 203, and overflows when the overflow effect data is not set in the work RAM 203. Judge that no production will be performed.

If it is determined that the overflow effect is to be performed (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S529, and if it is determined that the overflow effect is not performed (NO), the sub CPU 201 is the jackpot medium effect control process. To finish.

In step S527, the sub CPU 201 sets the display priority of the layer displaying the image of the overflow effect to 1. After executing the process of step S528, the sub CPU 201 ends the big hit middle effect control process.

As shown in FIG. 110, the image of the acquisition number display effect is an image showing a state in which the acquisition number is relatively small as shown in (a) and an image showing a state in which the acquisition number is relatively small, as shown in (b). A plurality of images are prepared according to the number of acquisitions, such as an image showing a large number of states. In the image of the acquired number display effect shown in FIG. 110, the number of images representing the displayed characters and the like increases as the acquired number increases.

As an example of the effect of winning another hole, a plurality of images are prepared as shown in FIG. 111. The image of the effect of winning the other hole shown in FIG. 111 includes an image showing the number of prize balls based on the winning of the other hole, and is displayed every time the winning of the other hole is detected.

When the acquisition number display effect and the other hole winning effect are executed, the sub CPU 201 is displayed on the image of the acquisition number display effect displayed on the layer having a relatively low display priority, as shown in FIG. 112. On the other hand, the image of the effect of winning another hole, which is displayed on the layer having a relatively high display priority, is superimposed so as to be arranged in the foreground. Further, the sub CPU 201 superimposes an image showing the number of rounds and an image showing the number of prize balls based on the winning of the attacker.

A plurality of images are prepared for the overflow effect image. As an example shown in FIG. 113, the image of the overflow effect is displayed over substantially the entire display area in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the overflow has occurred. Since the image of the overflow effect has the highest priority, the sub CPU 201 superimposes the image of the overflow effect on the images of the other layers so as to be arranged in the foreground.

As described above, the expressions such as "execution of the effect" and "perform the effect" include the display of the effect and literally include the presence or absence of the execution of the effect.

[Variable staging selection table]
Hereinafter, the variable effect selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the look-ahead continuous effect setting process shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

The variable effect selection table shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 is referred to for selecting the next advance notice effect as one of the effects selected by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 94 shows a table that is referred to when the selection (or lottery, determination) result of the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended does not include the probability variation jackpot. FIG. 95 shows a table that is referred to when the selection (or lottery, determination) result of a special symbol whose variable display is suspended includes a probability variation jackpot.

In the variable effect selection table shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the effect pattern, the selection rate, and the variable effect pattern are associated with each other. The effect pattern is represented by EN00 to EN44 as shown in FIG. 77, but in FIGS. 94 and 95, in order to make the invention easier to understand, the effect content and the winning type are shown in combination. There is. Further, in FIGS. 94 and 95, the content of the next advance notice effect is associated with the variable effect pattern.

For example, in FIG. 94, when the staging pattern is a special staging (special staging A to H) and the winning type is lost, the fluctuating staging pattern JY1 is selected with a selection rate of 50/100, and the fluctuating staging pattern JY2 is , 50/100 selection ratio, and variable staging patterns JY3 to JY5 are not selected.

Similarly, in FIG. 95, when the staging pattern is a special staging (special staging A to H) and the winning type is a probability variation jackpot, the fluctuating staging pattern JY1 is selected with a selection rate of 10/100, and the fluctuating staging pattern. JY2 is selected with a selection rate of 40/100, variable effect pattern JY3 is selected with a selection rate of 20/100, variable effect pattern JY4 is selected with a selection rate of 20/100, and variable effect pattern JY5 is selected with a selection rate of 20/100. It is selected with a selectivity of 10/100.

When the variable effect pattern JY1 is selected, the next advance notice effect is not executed. When the variable effect pattern JY2 is selected, the next advance notice effect is executed in the default mode. When the variable effect pattern JY3 is selected, the next advance notice effect is executed in a mode of notifying a hit of a small hit or more. When the variable effect pattern JY4 is selected, the next advance notice effect is usually executed in a mode of notifying a hit of a big hit or more. When the variable effect pattern JY5 is selected, the next advance notice effect is executed in a manner of notifying the probability variation jackpot.

When one variation is executed in the order of other effects such as look-ahead system, variation effect pattern, and effect selected by the effect pattern, it is basically determined from the effect near the end of the change. After the effect pattern is determined, the variable effect pattern is determined. Therefore, in the variable effect selection table, the selection rate of the variable effect pattern is associated with the effect pattern.

The execution period of the variable effect pattern may include the execution period of other effects such as the look-ahead system. Further, the variable effect pattern may be executed at the same time as long as it is before the time when the effect selected by the effect pattern is executed.

[Item selection table after touch]
Hereinafter, the post-touch item selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the look-ahead continuous effect setting process shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 96.

The post-touch item selection table is referenced by the sub CPU 201 when a valid operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected. In the post-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 96, an effect pattern, a variable effect pattern, a selection rate, and a post-touch item pattern (a reserved symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 after touch) are associated with each other. In FIG. 96, in order to make the invention easier to understand, the content is associated with the item pattern after touch.

For example, in FIG. 96, when the effect pattern is EN42 and the variation effect pattern is JY2, the item pattern TA1 after touch is selected with a selection rate of 10/100, and the item pattern TA2 after touch is 20/100. The item pattern TA3 after touch is selected with a selection rate of 10/100, the item pattern TA4 after touch is selected with a selection rate of 40/100, and the item pattern TA5 after touch is 20 /. It is selected with a selection rate of 100.

When the item pattern TA1 is selected after touching, the default "white blinking hold" is displayed. When the item pattern TA2 is selected after touching, the color "sword hold" determined in the look-ahead continuous effect setting process is displayed. When the item pattern TA3 is selected after touching, a rainbow-shaped "sword hold" that is a hit notification of a big hit or more is displayed.

When the item pattern TA4 is selected after touching, the default white "next notice hold" is displayed. When the item pattern TA5 is selected after touching, a rainbow-shaped "next notice hold" that notifies the probability change jackpot is displayed.

[Item selection table before touch]
Hereinafter, the pre-touch item selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the look-ahead continuous effect setting process shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

The pre-touch item selection table is referenced by the sub CPU 201 when selecting an item pattern that can be transformed into a post-touch item when a valid operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected.

In the pre-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 97, the effect pattern, the post-touch item pattern, the selection rate, and the pre-touch item pattern (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 before the effective operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected). The pending symbol) is associated with it.

The effect patterns are represented by EN00 to EN44 as shown in FIG. 77, but in FIG. 97, they are collectively shown by winning type in order to make the invention easier to understand. In addition, the content is associated with the item pattern before touch.

For example, in FIG. 97, when the effect pattern corresponds to a big hit and the item pattern after touch is TA3, the item pattern TB1 before touch is selected with a selection rate of 10/100, and the item pattern TB2 before touch is 10 The pre-touch item pattern TB3 is selected with a selection rate of / 100, the pre-touch item pattern TB3 is selected with a selection rate of 40/100, and the pre-touch item pattern TB4 is selected with a selection rate of 60/100.

When the pre-touch item pattern TB1 is selected, "black treasure chest hold" is displayed. When the pre-touch item pattern TB2 is selected, "Wooden treasure chest hold" is displayed. When the pre-touch item pattern TB3 is selected, "Silver treasure chest hold" is displayed. When the pre-touch item pattern TB4 is selected, "gold treasure chest hold" is displayed.

[Look-ahead continuous production table]
Hereinafter, the look-ahead continuous effect table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the look-ahead continuous effect setting process shown in FIG. 87 will be described with reference to FIG. 98.

In the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 98, the effect pattern, the number of reserved items, the selection rate, and the effect content (scenario) are associated with each other. The effect patterns are represented by EN00 to EN44 as shown in FIG. 77, but in FIG. 98, they are collectively shown by winning type (loss / hit) in order to make the invention easier to understand. The effect content consists of information representing each effect for Hold 1 to Hold 3.

For example, in FIG. 98, when the number of reserved symbols is 3, there is a starting opening prize corresponding to the fourth reserved symbol, and when the variable display of the special symbol display device 431 for this starting opening winning is a hit, 50 / "Blue", "blue", and "none" are selected with a selection rate of 100, "blue", "red", and "red" are selected with a selection rate of 25/100, and "blue", "red", and "red" are selected with a selection rate of 25/100. "Red", "Red", and "Rainbow" are selected.

In the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 98, if the variable display of the special symbol display device 431 is lost, the effect including the "rainbow" is not selected. Therefore, the effect including the "rainbow" is not selected. It will be a production to notify the hit.

[Hidden probability change notification table]
Hereinafter, the latent probability change notification table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the out-mouth / entry-ball effect processing shown in FIG. 88 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In the look-ahead latent probability change notification table shown in FIG. 99, the game state, the selection rate, and the effect content are associated with each other. The gaming state is identified by whether or not it is a latent probability change (“latent probability” in the figure).

For example, in FIG. 99, if the gaming state is latent probability variation, an effect of lighting one character (not shown) on the board in white is selected with a selection rate of 25/100, and a selection rate of 25/100 is selected. , The effect of lighting two characters on the board in white is selected, and the effect of lighting three characters on the board in blue is selected with a selection rate of 25/100, and four characters on the board are selected with a selection rate of 25/100. The effect of lighting in red is selected.

In the look-ahead latent probability change notification table shown in FIG. 99, if the gaming state is not the latent probability change, the effect of lighting the four characters on the board in red is not selected, so the four characters on the board are lit in red. The effect of making the player notify that the game state is a latent probability change.

[Holding continuous notification effect selection table]
Hereinafter, the hold continuous notification effect selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the out-port entry ball effect effect process shown in FIG. 88 will be described with reference to FIG. 100. In the look-ahead latent probability change notification table shown in FIG. 100, the presence / absence of a big hit in the hold (the result of selection (or lottery, decision) of the special symbol whose variation display is held), the selection rate, and the special game transition suggestion effect. It is associated with the production content.

For example, in FIG. 100, if there is a big hit in the hold, the first special game transition suggestion effect in which the shutter (not shown) that is built in the effect button 16 moves is selected with a selection rate of 50/100, and 50 With a selection rate of / 100, the shutter built into the effect button 16 is fully opened for a time longer than the execution time of the first special game transition suggestion effect, and the LED group 18 provided on the back side of the shutter becomes a rainbow shape. The second special game transition suggestion effect that emits light is selected.

In the look-ahead latent probability change notification table shown in FIG. 100, if there is no big hit in the hold, the second special game transition suggestion effect is not selected. Therefore, the second special game transition suggestion effect is an effect of notifying that there is a big hit in the hold.

[Specific example of pre-reading notice effect setting process]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 101.

As shown in the display state (a), if the default hold symbol (white flashing hold) is displayed and there is a start opening prize, the touch point (point value) must be MAX (set value). For example, in step S445 of FIG. 86, the treasure chest reserved symbol selected based on the pre-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 97 is displayed as shown in the display state (b).

As shown in the display state (a), in the state where the default hold symbol (white blinking hold) is displayed and there is a start opening prize, if the touch point is MAX, in step S445 of FIG. , The treasure chest holding symbol selected based on the pre-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 97 is displayed with a touch icon as shown in the display state (c).

As shown in the display state (b), when the treasure box hold symbol without the touch icon is displayed and the touch point is MAX, the treasure box hold symbol (pre-touch item) is the treasure box hold with the touch icon. It is changed to a design.

When an effective operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected in step S493 of FIG. 90 in the state shown in the display state (c), the reserved symbol is shown in the display state (d) in step S495 of FIG. 90. After the area in which is displayed is hidden by the hidden image, as shown in the display state (e), the display of the effect in which the area in which the reserved symbol is displayed appears is set.

When the area where the hold symbol is displayed appears, the treasure box hold symbol with the touch icon is changed to another hold symbol (post-touch item) based on the post-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 96. ..

For example, in FIG. 96, if the effect pattern is EN06, the variable effect pattern is JY1, and the item pattern after touch is TA2, the treasure box hold symbol with the touch icon is when the area where the hold symbol is displayed appears. , Blue, etc. have been changed to "Sword Hold".

In the present embodiment, a plurality of reserved symbols do not become treasure chest reserved symbols. That is, if there is a start opening prize while the treasure box hold symbol is displayed, the hold symbol for the start opening prize becomes the default.

In addition, if there is a start opening prize during the winning fluctuation, the holding symbol for the starting opening winning may become a treasure box holding symbol, but this treasure box holding symbol stops the winning fluctuation. It will be changed to the default reserved symbol when it shifts to the special game state.

The state where the area where the reserved symbol is displayed is hidden by the hidden image means that a layer on which the hidden image is drawn is prepared in front of the layer on which the reserved symbol is drawn, and the layer on which the hidden image is drawn is set. It may be realized by changing from the hidden state to the displayed state, or the hidden image may be drawn in the area where the reserved symbol is displayed.

In other words, when the reserved symbol is "hidden" or the reserved symbol is "hidden", it is expressed as "hidden" in terms of processing even if the image is displayed instead of the reserved symbol. In some cases, when "hidden" as an appearance, the image may be displayed in place of the reserved symbol in terms of processing.

[Specific example of look-ahead continuous effect setting process]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 87 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103.

First, a simple specific example of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In this specific example, the decorative symbols are set to "1" to "9", the colors of the symbols "1" and "9" are set to "green", and "2", "4", "6" and " The color of the symbol of "8" is "blue", and the color of the symbols of "3", "5" and "7" is "red".

In step S460 of FIG. 87, when "blue", "blue", and "none" are selected from the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 98, for example, as the look-ahead continuous effect for the fourth hold. As shown in (F11), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 1, "2, 4, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The blue effect is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F12), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 2, "4, 6, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The blue effect is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F13), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 3, "4, 5, 8" in which the colors of the symbols are not aligned is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The effect does not run.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a specific example in the case where the scenarios of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process are duplicated will be described. In step S460 of FIG. 87, when "blue", "blue", and "none" are selected from the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 98, for example, as the look-ahead continuous effect for the fourth hold. As shown in (F21), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 1, "2, 4, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The blue effect is performed.

Here, it is assumed that there is a start opening prize during the fluctuation shown in (F21) and the number of reserved pieces is 4. As a look-ahead continuous effect according to the start opening winning, in step S460 of FIG. 87, from the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 98, as shown in (P1), "red", "red", and "rainbow" It is assumed that the production content is selected. At this time, as shown in (P2), one variation of the already set effect remains. In addition, "None" of the production content is not a set production.

Therefore, in step S464 of FIG. 87, the effect content for hold 2 and subsequent is set as the new effect content excluding the effect for the first variation (effect for hold 1) from the effect content shown in (P1). As a result, the production contents of "blue", "red", and "rainbow" are set as shown in (P3).

As a result, as shown in (F22), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 1 in (P3), "4, 6, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50 and the LED are displayed. The blue effect by the group 18 and the like is executed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F22), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 2 in (P3), "3, 5, 7" in which the color of each symbol is red is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50 and the LED are displayed. The red effect by the group 18 and the like is executed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F23), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 3 in (P3), "3, 7, 7" in which the color of each symbol is red is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50 and the LED are displayed. The rainbow pattern effect by the group 18 and the like is executed.

As a specific example of the pre-reading continuous effect setting process described above, an example of executing an effect based on the effect content of the pre-reading continuous effect table at the end of the change has been described. The production may be executed based on the production content of.

[Modification example of look-ahead continuous effect setting process]
The look-ahead continuous effect setting process in the present embodiment has been described as the pre-reading continuous effect setting process described above as setting an effect for hold 1 to hold 3, but it is also referred to as a change during execution (hereinafter, also referred to as “hold 0”). ) And the effect for the hold 4 may be set.

In this case, the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 98 is changed as shown in FIG. 104. In the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 104, an effect pattern, a reserved number, a selection rate, and an effect content (scenario) are associated with each other. The effect patterns are represented by EN00 to EN44 as shown in FIG. 77, but in FIG. 98, they are collectively shown by winning type (loss / hit) in order to make the invention easier to understand. The effect content consists of information representing each effect for hold 0 to hold 4.

For example, in FIG. 104, when the number of reserved symbols is 3, there is a starting opening prize corresponding to the fourth reserved symbol, and when the variable display of the special symbol display device 431 for this starting opening winning is a hit, 50 / "None", "Blue", "Blue", "None", "None" are selected with a selection rate of 100, and "Blue", "Blue", "Blue", "Red" with a selection rate of 25/100. , "Red" is selected, and "red", "red", "red", "rainbow", and "rainbow" are selected with a selection rate of 25/100.

In the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 104, if the variable display of the special symbol display device 431 corresponding to the reserved symbol is lost, the effect including the "rainbow" is not selected. The production including "rainbow" is a production that notifies the hit.

A simple specific example of a modification of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 105. In the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 104, for example, as the look-ahead continuous effect for the fourth hold, the effect contents of "none", "blue", "blue", "none", and "none" are selected. In this case, as shown in (F31), at the end of the fluctuation corresponding to the first "None", "2.3.2" in which the colors of the symbols are not aligned is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50 is displayed. The effect of the LED group 18 and the like is not executed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F32), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 1, "2, 4, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The blue effect is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F33), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 2, "4, 6, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The blue effect is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F34), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 3, "4, 5, 8" in which the colors of the symbols are not aligned is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The effect does not run.

Subsequently, as shown in (F35), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 4, "3, 5, 8" in which the colors of the symbols are not aligned is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The effect does not run.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107, a specific example in the case where the scenarios of the look-ahead continuous effect setting process are duplicated will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the look-ahead continuous effect table shown in FIG. 104, for example, “none”, “blue”, and “blue” are used as the look-ahead continuous effect for the fourth hold corresponding to the changing start opening winning. , "None", and "None" are selected, and as shown in (F41), the colors of each symbol are not aligned at the end of the change with respect to hold 0 (during change). 3.2 ”is stopped and displayed, and the effect of the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like is not executed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F42), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 1, "2, 4, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50, the LED group 18, and the like are used. The blue effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is assumed that there is a start opening prize during the fluctuation shown in (F43), and the number of reserved pieces is 3. As shown in (P11), it is assumed that the production contents of "red", "red", "rainbow", "rainbow", and "none" are selected as the look-ahead continuous production according to the start opening winning. At this time, as shown in (P12), one variation of the already set effect remains.

Therefore, as a new effect content excluding the effect for the first variation (effect for hold 0) from the effect content shown in (P12), the effect content for hold 1 and subsequent is set, and as a result, (P13). As shown in, the production contents of "blue", "red", "rainbow", "rainbow", and "none" are set.

As a result, as shown in (F43), at the end of the change with respect to hold 0 (during change) in (P13), "4, 6, 8" in which the color of each symbol is blue is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. A blue effect is executed by the device 50, the LED group 18, and the like.

Subsequently, as shown in (F44), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 1 in (P13), "3, 5, 7" in which the color of each symbol is red is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50 and the LED are displayed. The red effect by the group 18 and the like is executed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F45), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 2 in (P13), "3, 7, 7" in which the color of each symbol is red is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50 and the LED are displayed. The rainbow pattern effect by the group 18 and the like is executed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F46), at the end of the fluctuation with respect to the hold 3 in (P13), "7, 7, 7" in which the color of each symbol is red is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 50 and the LED are displayed. The rainbow pattern effect by the group 18 and the like is executed.

[Cancel look-ahead]
When the gaming state is the time saving state, the sub CPU 201 may cancel the look-ahead continuous effect as described below. Specifically, when the gaming state is the time saving state, the sub CPU 201 is produced by the fluctuation during execution (hold 0) and all the fluctuations of the special symbols held (hold 1 to hold 3). If it does not occur, the setting of the look-ahead continuous effect may be prohibited, or the set look-ahead continuous effect may be cancelled.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108, when the effects are continuous from hold 0 to hold 3, the sub CPU 201 allows the setting of the look-ahead continuous effect or maintains the set look-ahead continuous effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, when there is no effect after hold 2, the sub CPU 201 prohibits the setting of the look-ahead continuous effect at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold 2, or performs the set look-ahead continuous effect. Cancel.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, when there is no effect after hold 2, the sub CPU 201 can set the look-ahead effect on the assumption that the pre-reading continuous effect setting is being non-look-ahead at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to hold 2. It is also possible to control it as such.

With this configuration, in the present embodiment, when the game state is a time-saving state, the look-ahead continuous effect is executed only when the effect is continuous, so that the player's expectation for the look-ahead continuous effect is high. Can be raised. That is, in the present embodiment, the reliability of the player for the look-ahead continuous effect can be increased by not executing the look-ahead continuous effect that is unlikely to include the variation of the hit.

In the look-ahead continuous production described above, in the present embodiment, it is usually assumed that one step (blue → green) change (reliability change) is performed, but in the case of a big hit, two steps (change in reliability) are assumed. It may be controlled so that the effect scenario that changes from blue to red) is selected. However, if the effects are combined (such as when (blue → blue → none → none) is selected and (blue → green → red → red) is selected), there are two stages even if there is a loss. The production may be performed.

Also, if the stage of the production is lowered (for example, when (blue → green → red → red) is selected and (blue → blue → blue → blue) is selected), the reliability of the production is lowered. It may be controlled so that it does not exist (the place where the final effect to be executed is (blue → green → blue → blue) is changed to (blue → green → red → red)). In addition, when the effect mode is such that the reliability of the effect is lowered, the effect determined later may be controlled to be discarded.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment performs a treasure box holding symbol transition effect in which the treasure box holding symbol becomes a treasure box holding symbol with a touch icon on the condition that the touch point MAX effect is executed as an effect transition condition. If it is determined to execute the touch point MAX effect, the touch point MAX effect is executed by starting the next fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431. After executing the MAX effect, secure a state in which the treasure box hold symbol transition effect can be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention can smoothly execute the effect without adjusting the effect.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment executes an effect of displaying the treasure box hold symbol with a touch icon when it is determined to execute the effect of displaying the treasure box hold symbol when the touch point is MAX. However, when the touch point becomes MAX while the treasure box hold symbol is displayed, the touch point MAX effect and the treasure box hold symbol with the touch icon are displayed in order to execute the treasure box hold symbol transition effect. And can be executed smoothly.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment executes the treasure box hold symbol transition effect on the condition that the touch point MAX effect is executed as the effect transition condition, and displays the symbol when it is determined to execute the touch point MAX effect. When it is determined that the touch point MAX effect cannot be executed due to the variation pattern of the symbol displayed on the means and the pattern of the effect, the next variation of the symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is started. By executing the touch point MAX effect as an opportunity, the state of executing the treasure box hold symbol transition effect after executing the touch point MAX effect is secured. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention can smoothly execute the effect without adjusting the effect.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-touch item executed when the operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected within a predetermined valid period after the treasure box holding symbol transition effect is executed is touched. Since the item transition effect, which is the later item, is executed when the operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected and the valid period is reached, the operation of the touch sensor 425 was performed earlier than the valid period. Even so, the item migration effect is executed. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention can prevent the player's interest in the effect from being lowered by reliably executing the item transfer effect.

In particular, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment detects the operation of the touch sensor 425, it is possible to prevent the item transfer effect from being executed due to the detection of the touch sensor 425 not intended by the player.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may have a hold for shifting to the special gaming state when the gaming medium passing through the second special out port 420c is detected in the special gaming state. Execute a special game transition suggestion effect that suggests.

Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention does not give the impression that the player is forced to play the game because the progress of the game by the player in the special gaming state also serves as the progress of the production. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment suggests the certainty that there is a hold that shifts to the special gaming state in the hold in the mode of staging, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the look-ahead continuous effect is determined, if the effect mode other than "None" is not determined for the same hold, the determined effect mode is used. Since the setting is made for the corresponding fluctuation, it is possible to execute an effective production utilizing the determined production mode and the determined production mode, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the production.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can easily give the player the content represented by the effect by executing the effect of a plurality of types executed in the special game state with priority. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered because the player is made to understand the game.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment does not execute a specific effect or does not execute halfway through the special game state according to the state of the special game state, so that the effect in the special game state is achieved. Since the patterns are diversified, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the effect data referred to when the 1P effect or the touch point MAX effect is executed for the variation pattern of the symbol 1 displayed on the special symbol display device 431. The 1P effect or the touch point MAX effect is stored in the program ROM 202.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, once the variation pattern of the symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 431 is determined, 1P based on the effect data stored in the program ROM 202 corresponding to the variation pattern of the symbol. Since the effect or the touch point MAX effect can be executed, the 1P effect and the touch point MAX effect can be smoothly executed.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the third embodiment of the present invention, the differences from the second embodiment of the present invention described above will be described, and the same points as the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. Omit.

A third embodiment of the present invention is a non-game including a state in which a demo effect is being executed, for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “demo”). When the operation of the touch sensor 425 is detected in the state, the effect is executed.

The non-gaming state means a state in which the player has stopped the game. The sub CPU 201 is based on the detection values of the various sensors described above or the command received from the main control circuit 100, instead of determining whether or not the game is in the non-gaming state based on whether or not the demo is in progress. Therefore, it can be determined that the player has stopped the game.

For example, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the special symbol is in the non-gaming state when the state in which the special symbol does not change in a state other than the special gaming state continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the special symbol and the normal symbol may be determined in the state other than the special gaming state. It may be determined that the game is in a non-gaming state when the state in which the symbol does not change continues for a predetermined time or longer.

[Touch sensor effect processing]
The touch sensor effect processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The detection range of the touch sensor 425 (effective distance and effective range of the touch sensor 425) is always constant, but the detection range may be changed according to the effect.

First, in step S600, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point is MAX, that is, whether or not the point value is equal to or greater than the set value. If it is determined that the point value is equal to or greater than the set value (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S601. If it is determined that the point value is not equal to or greater than the set value (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S601, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. If it is determined that the pending symbol is in the displayed period (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S603. If it is determined that the pending symbol is not in the displayed period (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S602.

In step S602, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the demo is in progress. If it is determined that the demo is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S603. If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (NO), the touch sensor effect processing is terminated.

In step S603, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor enable flag to 1. After executing the process of step S603, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S604.

In step S604, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation detection flag is 1. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S605. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S605, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor enable flag to 0. After executing the process of step S605, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S606.

In step S606, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the demo is in progress. If it is determined that the demo is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S608. If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S607.

In step S607, the sub CPU 201 refers to the touch hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 115, and whether or not the variation corresponding to the hold symbol on which the treasure box hold symbol is displayed is a big hit, and stage information indicating the effect stage. And the hidden image (see FIG. 101) is selected based on the touched item. After executing the process of step S607, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S608.

In step S607, the sub CPU 201 sets the display of the effect after the touch when the effective operation is detected by the touch sensor 425. For example, the sub CPU 201 changes the reserved symbol before touch displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 to the reserved symbol after touch if it is not during the demo, and if the demo is in progress and the gaming state is latent probability change, FIG. 116 Refer to the latent probability notification effect selection table shown in the above, and set an effect that suggests that the gaming state is the latent probability change.

In step S607, the sub CPU 201 has a different selection rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is latent probability change, instead of setting an effect suggesting that the gaming state is latent probability change during the demonstration. You may set the effect. After executing the process of step S608, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S609.

In step S609, the sub CPU 201 subtracts the set value from the point value. After executing the process of step S609, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect process.

[Hidden image selection table on hold when touched]
Hereinafter, the touch hold concealed image selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the touch sensor effect processing shown in FIG. 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 115.

The touch hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 115 is referred to for selecting a concealed image (see FIG. 101) selected by the sub CPU 201. In the touch-hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 115, an effect pattern, a post-touch item pattern, stage information, a selection rate, and an effect content are associated with each other.

The effect patterns are represented by EN00 to EN44 as shown in FIG. 77, but in FIG. 115, in order to make the invention easier to understand, they are collectively shown by winning type (other than big hit / big hit). ..

The post-touch item patterns range from TA1 to TA5 (see FIG. 96), but only TA4 is shown, and other post-touch item patterns are omitted. The production content includes information representing a hidden image.

For example, in FIG. 115, when the effect pattern is a big hit, the item pattern after touch is TA4, and the stage is a "choi heat stage", the selection rate is 20/100, which is commonly used in each stage. A possible concealed image is selected, a concealed image dedicated to each stage is selected at a selectivity of 60/100, and a concealed image that informs more than a jackpot that can be commonly used at each stage at a selectivity of 10/100. Is selected, and with a selection rate of 10/100, a hidden image that notifies the jackpot or more dedicated to each stage is selected.

Although the hidden image in the present embodiment has been described as being selected by each selection rate, it is uniquely selected by the combination of the effect before the change (item before touch) and the effect after change (item after touch). It may be done.

[Latent notification effect selection table]
Hereinafter, the latent notification effect selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the touch sensor effect process shown in FIG. 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 116.

In the latent notification effect selection table shown in FIG. 116, the point value, the selection rate, and the effect content are associated with each other. For example, if the point value is "5" or less, "None" is selected with a selection rate of 30/100, "Hidden probability 50%" is selected with a selection rate of 20/100, and a selection rate of 10/100. "Hidden probability 80%" is selected, and "Hidden probability 100%" is selected with a selection rate of 40/100. If the point value is "6" or more, "None" is selected with a selection rate of 30/100, and "Hidden probability 77%" is selected with a selection rate of 70/100.

In the latent probability notification effect selection table shown in FIG. 116, when a value other than "None" is selected, the notification effect is determined to be the latent probability change, but the game state is not the latent probability change. Also in this case, by referring to the sub CPU 201 a table having a different selection rate similar to the latent probability notification effect selection table shown in FIG. 116, the sub CPU 201 is made to execute an effect suggesting that the gaming state may be a latent probability change. You may do so.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the execution condition of the treasure box holding symbol transition effect is satisfied even if the player is in a non-gaming state in which the game is stopped. For example, by operating the touch sensor 425, an effect suggesting that the gaming state may be latent probability variation is executed, so that the player's interest in the effect can be improved.

Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is in a non-gaming state, if the touch point is MAX, the touch sensor 425 is operated, so that the gaming state may be latent and probable. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect because the effect that suggests the effect is executed.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the differences from the second embodiment of the present invention described above will be described, and the same points as the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. Omit.

In the second embodiment of the present invention, an upper limit value equal to the set value is defined for the point value, but in the present embodiment, the point value may be added in excess of the upper limit value (set value). You can do it.

[Point grant effect setting process]
Hereinafter, the point-giving effect setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

First, in step S620 of FIG. 117, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S621. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S629 (FIG. 118).

In step S621, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point MAX effect flag is 1. If it is determined in step S621 that the touch point MAX effect flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S622. If it is determined that the touch point MAX effect flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S625.

In step S622, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a 5.0 second fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern is HN00 (see FIG. 75)) and there is a stage change. If it is determined that the fluctuation is 5.0 seconds and there is a stage change (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S628. If it is determined that the fluctuation is not a fluctuation of 5.0 seconds or there is no stage change (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S623.

In step S623, the sub CPU 201 selects a variable effect in which the touch point is MAX. After executing the process of step S623, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S624.

In step S624, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch point MAX effect flag to 0. After executing the process of step S624, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S626.

In step S625, the sub CPU 201 selects whether or not to execute the 1P effect in which 1 is added to the touch points based on the fluctuation pattern and various effects. Here, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the 1P effect is to be executed, 1 is added to the touch points to select the 1P effect that can be executed as the variable effect. After executing the process of step S625, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S626.

In step S626, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point exceeds MAX (MAX point). If it is determined that the touch point exceeds the MAX point (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S627. If it is determined that the touch point does not exceed the MAX point (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S628.

In step S627, the sub CPU 201 sets the special effect flag to 1. Here, the special effect flag is set when the current touch point exceeds a set value (for example, 5 points in the embodiment, a value set as an upper limit, a value sufficient to execute the effect, etc.) (for example, a touch point). Is 5 points, and when 1 is added to the touch point, a special effect (for example, an effect to notify how much the touch point exceeds the set value, or an operation of the touch sensor 425 is encouraged. Indicates whether or not to execute (such as directing). After executing the process of step S627, the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

In step S628, the sub CPU 201 selects another variation effect. Here, the sub CPU 201 executes the same process as step S427 in the point granting effect setting process described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. After executing the process of step S628, the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

In step S629 shown in FIG. 118, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the read-ahead notice determination command has been received. If it is determined that the read-ahead notice determination command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S630. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice determination command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

In step S630, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 1 is set in the touch point MAX effect flag. If it is determined that 1 is set in the touch point MAX effect flag (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S631. If it is determined that 1 is not set in the touch point MAX effect flag (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S634.

In step S631, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a 5.0 second fluctuation and there is a stage change. If it is determined that the fluctuation is a 5.0 second fluctuation and there is a stage change (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S637. If it is determined that the fluctuation is not a fluctuation of 5.0 seconds or there is no stage change (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S632.

In step S632, the sub CPU 201 selects a look-ahead advance notice effect in which the touch point becomes MAX. After executing the process of step S632, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S633.

In step S633, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch point MAX effect flag to 0. After executing the process of step S633, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S635.

In step S634, the sub CPU 201 selects whether or not to execute the 1P effect in which 1 is added to the touch points based on the fluctuation pattern and various effects. Here, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the 1P effect is to be executed, 1 is added to the touch points to select the 1P effect that can be executed as the variable effect. After executing the process of step S634, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S635.

In step S635, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the touch point exceeds the MAX point. If it is determined that the touch point exceeds the MAX point (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S636. If it is determined that the touch point does not exceed the MAX point (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S637.

In step S636, the sub CPU 201 sets the special effect flag to 1. After executing the process of step S636, the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

In step S637, the sub CPU 201 selects another variation effect. Here, the sub CPU 201 executes the same process as step S435 in the point granting effect setting process described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. After executing the process of step S637, the sub CPU 201 ends the point granting effect setting process.

As described above, the addition of touch points in the point granting effect setting process may be performed as a variable effect at the time of fluctuation or as a look-ahead notice effect at the time of winning the start opening. That is, the point-giving effect is executed both as an effect executed at the time of fluctuation and as a look-ahead advance notice effect.

In addition, in steps S625 and S634 of the point giving effect setting process described above, it was explained that the sub CPU 201 selects whether or not to execute the 1P effect in which 1 is added to the touch point, but 2 or more are added to the touch point. You may choose whether or not to execute the effect to be performed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 notifies that the touch point has reached the MAX point when the touch point becomes the MAX point, and when the touch point exceeds the MAX point, the touch point exceeds the MAX point. May not be notified.

Further, the sub CPU 201 does not notify that the touch point has reached the MAX point when the touch point becomes the MAX point, and when the touch point exceeds the MAX point, the touch point exceeds the MAX point. You may notify that.

[Touch sensor effect processing]
The touch sensor effect processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119. First, in step S640, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the point value is equal to or greater than the set value. If it is determined that the point value is equal to or greater than the set value (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S641. If it is determined that the point value is not equal to or greater than the set value (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S641, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. If it is determined that the pending symbol is in the displayed period (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S642. If it is determined that the pending symbol is not in the displayed period (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S642, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor enable flag to 1. After executing the process of step S642, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S643.

In step S643, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation detection flag is 1. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S644. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S644, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special effect flag is 1. If it is determined that the special effect flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S645. If it is determined that the special effect flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S646.

In step S645, the sub CPU 201 refers to the post-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 120 and the touch-hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 121, and the display of the already selected effect is selected in the stock state. Change to the display of and set.

Here, the stock state means a state in which the point value exceeds the MAX point (for example, if the specified value is 5 points, the point value is 6 points). After executing the process of step S645, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S647.

In step S646, the sub CPU 201 sets the display of the effect after touch that has already been selected. After executing the process of step S646, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S647.

In step S647, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor enable flag to 0. After executing the process of step S647, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S648.

In step S648, the sub CPU 201 subtracts a set value (for example, 5 points in the embodiment, a value set as an upper limit, a value sufficient to execute the effect, etc.) from the point value. After executing the process of step S648, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect process.

In addition, in steps S645 and S646 of the above-mentioned touch sensor effect processing, the sub CPU 201 may execute the notification effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change. In this case, the sub CPU 201 executes the notification effect executed in steps S645 and S646 in different modes from each other.

With this configuration, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the player to select the content of the notification effect suggesting that the gaming state may be latent probability change, so that the effect accompanied by the operation. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Item selection table after touch]
Hereinafter, the post-touch item selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the touch sensor effect processing shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The post-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 120 is referred to in the stock state. If it is not in stock, the post-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 96 is referred to.

In the post-touch item selection table shown in FIG. 120, the effect pattern, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate, and the post-touch item pattern are associated with each other. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to make the invention easier to understand, it is associated with the content of the post-touch item pattern shown in FIG. 96.

For example, in FIG. 120, when the effect pattern is EN42 and the variation effect pattern is JY2, the item pattern TA1 after touch is selected with a selection rate of 10/100, and the item pattern TA2 after touch is 20/100. The item pattern TA3 after touch is selected by the selection rate, the item pattern TA3 after touch is selected by the selection rate of 10/100, the item pattern TA4 after touch is selected by the selection rate of 40/100, and the item pattern TA5 after touch is 20/100. It is selected by the selection rate of.

When the item pattern TA1 is selected after touching, the default "white blinking hold" is displayed unchanged. When the item pattern TA2 is selected after touching, a blue, red, or gold "fairy" hold is displayed instead of the blue or red "sword" hold.

When the item pattern TA3 is selected after touching, the rainbow-patterned "fairy" hold that is a big hit or more hit notification is displayed instead of the rainbow-patterned "sword" hold that is a big hit or more hit notification.

When the item pattern TA4 is selected after touching, the default "white" hold with a timer effect is displayed instead of the default white "next notice" hold. When the item pattern TA5 is selected after touching, a "rainbow pattern" hold with a timer effect for notifying the probability change jackpot is displayed instead of the "next notice" hold of the rainbow pattern for notifying the probability change jackpot.

Further, when the item pattern TA4 or TA5 is selected after the touch, depending on the effect pattern and the variable effect pattern, the "holy sword" hold with the timer effect is displayed after the touch.

In the timer effect, for example, the time until the next notice effect is executed is displayed. That is, the timer effect is an effect of notifying the player at what timing the next notice is executed (for example, a variation time or an effect time from the display of the timer effect to the execution of the next notice effect). The production shown).

In the "fairy" hold, either a blue, red, or gold fairy appears instead of the "sword" hold. The degree of expectation given to the player may be changed to blue <red <gold, but blue> red> gold or the like.

The "holy sword" hold is displayed as a more promising production than the "sword" hold. The sub CPU 201 may be controlled to drive the upper movable effect member 650 (hereinafter, simply referred to as "sacred sword accessory") at the timing when the "sacred sword" hold is displayed, and the "sacred sword" hold may be performed. It may be controlled so that the sacred sword character is driven at the timing when the fluctuation with respect to is started.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the sacred sword accessory to be driven at the timing when the operating means such as the touch sensor 425 is operated when the "holy sword" hold is displayed, before or after the display. It may be controlled to. Further, the sub CPU 201 may control the sacred sword character to be driven when a specific effect is executed during the fluctuation with respect to the "holy sword" hold.

In this way, the sub CPU 201 may be controlled so that the sacred sword character is driven at various timings, but in relation to other effects, the section and permission for prohibiting the driving of the sacred sword character are permitted. It may be controlled to provide a section to be used.

The section for prohibiting the driving of the sacred sword character includes, for example, a section before a specific effect is executed during the super reach, a section for executing a plurality of other effects, and the like. That is, the sub CPU 201 prohibits the driving of the sacred sword character when the content of the production becomes unclear due to the driving of the sacred sword character, or when the story of the production is divided. You may.

In addition, the production driven by the sacred sword character may be a production in which a big hit is confirmed, or a production in which a big hit expectation is high. That is, the effect driven by the sacred sword character may be executed in the case of loss.

In the present embodiment, the result of selection (or lottery, determination) of the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is that the sub CPU 201 selects the post-touch item pattern at the start opening prize at the start opening winning. However, the item pattern is not limited to this, and the item pattern may be reselected after touching by drawing again after winning the starting opening.

[Hidden image selection table on hold when touched]
Hereinafter, the touch-holding concealed image selection table referred to by the sub CPU 201 in the touch sensor effect processing shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The touch hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 121 is referred to in the stock state. If it is not in stock, the touch hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 115 is referred to.

The touch hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 121 is referred to for selecting a concealed image (see FIG. 101) selected by the sub CPU 201. In the touch-hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 121, an effect pattern, a post-touch item pattern, stage information, a selection rate, and an effect content are associated with each other.

The effect patterns are represented by EN00 to EN44 as shown in FIG. 77, but in FIG. 121, in order to make the invention easier to understand, they are collectively shown by winning type (other than big hit / big hit). ..

The post-touch item patterns range from TA1 to TA5 (see FIG. 96), but only TA4 is shown, and other post-touch item patterns are omitted. The production content includes information representing a hidden image.

For example, in FIG. 121, when the effect pattern is a big hit, the post-touch item pattern is TA4, and the stage is a "choi heat stage", the selection rate is 20/100, which is commonly used in each stage. A possible concealed image is selected, a concealed image dedicated to each stage is selected at a selectivity of 20/100, and a concealed image that informs more than a jackpot that can be commonly used at each stage at a selectivity of 10/100. Is selected, a hidden image that notifies the jackpot or more dedicated to each stage is selected with a selection rate of 10/100, and a stock that notifies the jackpot or more that can be commonly used in each stage with a selection rate of 20/100. A hidden image dedicated to the state is selected, and a hidden image dedicated to the stock state that notifies the jackpot or more dedicated to each stage is selected with a selection rate of 20/100.

Although the concealed image in the present embodiment has been described as being selected by each selection rate, it is uniquely determined by the combination of the effect before the change (item before touch) and the effect after change (item after touch). It may be selected.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the touch point is executed by executing the 1P effect and the touch point MAX effect in order to execute the effect executed when the touch point is 5. In order to operate the touch sensor 425 every time when becomes 5, or to execute the effect executed when the touch point exceeds 5, the 1P effect is executed after the touch point becomes 5. By allowing the player to select whether to wait and operate the touch sensor 425, the player can select the effect to be executed, so that the player's interest in the effect accompanied by the operation can be improved. ..

When there are two types of specified values, it is possible to set one specified value to 0 and the other specified value to 5, and one specified value is 0 as the specified value for executing the Gase effect. It is also possible to control it so that it is always executed by setting it to. Further, it is possible to set the other specified value to a value less than 5, and there are two types of points to be accumulated, a specified value is set for each, and the first point is the first specified value. It is also possible to control to change to a touchable hold when the second point reaches the second specified value. Furthermore, it is possible to change to a hold that can be touched when one of the two types of points reaches a specified value.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the differences from the fourth embodiment of the present invention described above will be described, and the same points as the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Omit.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 has an RTC (Real Time Clock) effect function for operating a special effect in a predetermined time zone for a predetermined period.

[RTC effect processing]
Hereinafter, the RTC effect process executed as one of the interrupt processes periodically executed by the sub CPU 201 in a predetermined time zone will be described with reference to FIG. 122.

First, in step S660, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current time is the start time of the RTC effect. If it is determined that the current time is the start time of the RTC effect (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S661. If it is determined that the current time is not the start time of the RTC effect (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S667.

In step S661, the sub CPU 201 selects the opening (effect) of the RTC effect. After executing the process of step S661, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S662.

In step S662, the sub CPU 201 selects the loop effect of the RTC effect. After executing the process of step S662, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S663.

In step S663, the sub CPU 201 selects the ending (effect) of the RTC effect. After executing the process of step S663, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S663.

In step S664, the sub CPU 201 sets 1 to the unlimited touch state flag indicating whether or not the operation by the touch sensor 425 is enabled even if the point value is not equal to or more than the set value. After executing the process of step S664, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S665.

In step S665, the sub CPU 201 sets the end time of the RTC effect. After executing the process of step S665, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S666.

In step S666, the sub CPU 201 sets the opening data in the work RAM 203. After executing the process of step S666, the sub CPU 201 ends the RTC effect process.

In step S667, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current time is the end time of the RTC effect. If it is determined that the current time is the end time of the RTC effect (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S668. If it is determined that the current time is not the end time of the RTC effect (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S670.

In step S668, the sub CPU 201 sets the ending data in the work RAM 203. After executing the process of step S668, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S669.

In step S669, the sub CPU 201 sets the unlimited touch state flag to 0. After executing the process of step S669, the sub CPU 201 ends the RTC effect process.

In step S670, the sub CPU 201 sets the loop effect data in the work RAM 203. After executing the process of step S670, the sub CPU 201 ends the RTC effect process.

[Touch sensor effect processing]
The touch sensor effect processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. First, in step S680, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the unlimited touch state flag is 1.

If it is determined that the unlimited touch state flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S684. If it is determined that the unlimited touch state flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S681.

In step S681, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the point value is equal to or greater than the set value. If it is determined that the point value is equal to or greater than the set value (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S682. If it is determined that the point value is not equal to or greater than the set value (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S682, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50. If it is determined that the pending symbol is in the displayed period (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S684. If it is determined that the pending symbol is not in the displayed period (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S683.

In step S683, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the demo is in progress. If it is determined that the demo is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S684. If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S684, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor enable flag to 1. After executing the process of step S684, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S685.

In step S685, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation detection flag is 1. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S686. If it is determined that the operation detection flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing.

In step S686, the sub CPU 201 sets the touch sensor enable flag to 0. After executing the process of step S686, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S687.

In step S687, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the demo is in progress. If it is determined that the demo is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S689. If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S688.

In step S688, the sub CPU 201 refers to the touch hold concealed image selection table shown in FIG. 115, determines whether or not the variation corresponding to the hold symbol on which the treasure box hold symbol is displayed is a big hit, stage information, and touch. Select a concealed image (see FIG. 101) based on the back item. After executing the process of step S688, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S689.

In step S689, the sub CPU 201 sets the display of the effect after the touch when the effective operation is detected by the touch sensor 425. For example, the sub CPU 201 changes the reserved symbol before touch displayed on the liquid crystal display device 50 to the reserved symbol after touch if it is not during the demo, and if the demo is in progress and the gaming state is latent probability change, FIG. 116 Refer to the latent probability notification effect selection table shown in the above, and set an effect that suggests that the gaming state is the latent probability change.

In step S689, the sub CPU 201 has a different selection rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is latent probability change, instead of setting an effect suggesting that the gaming state is latent probability change during the demonstration. You may set the effect. After executing the process of step S689, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S690.

In step S690, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the unlimited touch state flag is 1. If it is determined that the unlimited touch state flag is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect processing. If it is determined that the unlimited touch state flag is not 1, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S691.

In step S691, the sub CPU 201 subtracts the set value from the point value. After executing the process of step S691, the sub CPU 201 ends the touch sensor effect process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the touch point is a specific effect in which the pre-touch item is the post-touch item, which is not executed unless the touch point is MAX. Since it is executed even if it is not MAX, it is possible to prevent a player who expects that a specific effect in which the pre-touch item becomes the post-touch item to be executed to reduce the interest in the game.

In this way, in the state where the unlimited touch state flag is 1, that is, in the state where the RTC effect is being executed, the touch sensor activation flag can be set regardless of whether or not the touch point has reached the specified value. Therefore, if the operation detection flag = 1 during the period when the RTC effect is being executed (for example, the player's hand is placed within the effective range of the touch sensor 425 by the player while the pre-touch effect is displayed). If), the effect is executed after the player touches.

Further, in the state where the unlimited touch state flag is 1, that is, in the state where the RTC effect is executed, the point value is not subtracted, so that the point increase section in which the point value can be accumulated can be set.

Further, in each embodiment, the effective range of the touch sensor 425 always has a constant effective circumstance, and specifically, if an object (for example, a player's hand) exists within a certain distance from the touch sensor. It becomes operation knowledge. The effective range of the touch sensor 425 may be changed according to the effect, or the effective range may be changed according to the gaming state.

Further, although the touch sensor 425 and the effect button 16 exist as operation means in each embodiment, the item is not displayed after touching even if the effect button 16 is pressed when the touch point reaches a predetermined value. It may be controlled, or it may be controlled so that the item is displayed after touching regardless of which of the operating means of the touch sensor 425 and the effect button 16 is operated.

In the embodiment of the present invention described above, various control processes are described separately as a main control process executed by the main CPU 101 and a sub control process executed by the sub CPU 201, but various types included in the sub control process. The main CPU 101 may execute the process, or the sub CPU 201 may execute various processes included in the main control process.

Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, an example in which the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention receives a medal as a gaming medium. It can also be applied to other gaming machines such as the pachislot gaming machine used.

<Gist of the invention><Gist1>
In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-39923, when the gaming balls winning in the special drawing 1 starting area and the special drawing 2 starting area are merged on the rear surface of the gaming board, the gaming balls flow down. Depending on the direction, the gaming ball discharged from the starting area of the special figure 1 may come into contact with the gaming ball discharged from the starting area of the special figure 2, and the ball may be clogged. Therefore, if the ball jam continues, the player's game may be hindered.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of ball passages (601, 602) through which game balls winning in a plurality of winning openings (second starting opening 414b, general winning opening 419d) flow down, and the plurality of ball passages. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a confluence portion (604) at which the plurality of ball passages merge on the downstream side, and a partition portion (partition plate 605) is provided in the ball passage, and the partition is provided. In the unit, the game is such that the traveling direction of the gaming ball flowing down from at least one of the plurality of ball passages to the confluence is substantially the same as the traveling direction of the gaming ball flowing down from the other ball passage to the confluence. It has a structure to guide the ball.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the traveling direction of the gaming ball flowing down from at least one of the plurality of ball passages to the merging portion is substantially the same as the traveling direction of the gaming ball flowing down from the other ball passage to the merging portion. Since the gaming ball is guided in the traveling direction of the above, it is possible to prevent the gaming balls flowing down from the plurality of ball passages from coming into contact with each other at the confluence. As a result, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring, and the game can be continued smoothly.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the partition portion is composed of a common wall portion forming the plurality of ball passages.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the partition portion is composed of a common wall portion forming a plurality of ball passages, so that a dedicated member constituting the partition portion is added to the ball passage. It can be made unnecessary and the configuration of the ball passage can be simplified.

<Summary 2>
In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226196, there is a possibility that the trajectory of the accessory may not be stable when the accessory rotates and moves around the base end portion, and in particular, the accessory has become huge. In some cases, the trajectory of the accessory may be more unstable.

As a result, when the accessory is rotated and moved, the accessory may come into contact with the decorative member provided on the gaming machine, or a load may be applied to a drive unit such as a motor that drives the accessory. It may not be executed correctly.

The game machine according to the present invention has a support member (wooden frame 60) to which a game board (40) having a game area (41) on which a game medium rolls is attached, and a predetermined game machine attached to the rear of the game board. An accessory (upper movable effect) that moves between the standby position and the drive position centered on the display device (liquid crystal display device 50) that displays the effect and the base end portion (swing axis 651B) attached to the support member. The member 650) and the guide members (guide rails 668, 669) provided on the support member so as to be located in front of the display device, and the accessory is on standby with the base end as a fulcrum. It has a guided portion (guide piece 670) guided by the guide member when moving between the position and the drive position.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the accessory that can move around the base end portion can move between the standby position and the drive position while the guided portion is guided by the guide member. The orbit can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately perform the production by the character.

Further, for example, when the accessory moves between the standby position and the drive position, it can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the accessory can be prevented from coming into contact with the game board or the display device. As a result, the accessory, the game board, and the display device can be protected. In addition to this, by preventing the accessory from swinging in the front-rear direction, the space between the accessory and the game board and the space between the accessory and the display device can be reduced. Therefore, the dimensions of the gaming machine in the front-rear direction can be shortened, and the space of the gaming machine can be saved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the accessory is a first moving member (upper movable base 655) and a second moving member (upper slide base 657) that can move along the longitudinal direction of the first moving member. The second moving member has a first moving position having the largest area overlapping the first moving member in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine with respect to the first moving member. It is movably provided between the second moving position and the second moving position where the area overlapping in the front-rear direction is the smallest, and when the second moving member moves to the second moving position, the end portion of the second moving member is the guide. It is preferable that the member can be projected beyond the member.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can prevent the movement of the second moving member from being restricted by the guide member, and can more effectively perform the effect by the accessory.

<Summary 3>
In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226196, in addition to the configuration for rotating the arm base, a configuration for moving the first arm and the second arm is required, which is an accessory. The configuration becomes complicated. Therefore, the configuration for moving the first arm and the second arm may hinder the rotation of the arm base and may lead to a failure.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a base end portion (swing shaft 651B) between a standby position close to the fixing member (supporting wall member 675) and a driving position separated from the fixing member. ) Is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a movable means (upper movable effect member 650) having a first movable member (upper slide base 657, fixed crossguard member 672) that is movable around the above movable means. Is an urging member (coil) that elastically connects the second movable member (movable crossguard member 673) that is relatively movable with respect to the first movable member, and the first movable member and the second movable member. The second movable member has a spring 674), and when the first movable member moves so as to be close to the fixing member, the second movable member comes into contact with the fixing member to urge the urging member. When the first movable member moves relative to the first movable member and moves to the first position, and the first movable member moves away from the fixing member, the urging member is attached. It has a configuration in which it moves relative to the first movable member and moves to the second position by being forced.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention resists the urging force of the urging member by contacting the second movable member with the fixing member when the first movable member moves close to the fixing member. When the first movable member moves relative to the first movable member and moves to the first position and the first movable member moves away from the fixed member, the second movable member is urged by the urging member. As a result, the movable means is relatively movable with respect to the first movable member and is moved to the second position. Therefore, the movable means can be smoothly operated by the simple configuration, and the effect of the movable means can be improved.

In particular, the movable means is composed of a first movable member, a second movable member, and an urging member, and by associating the fixing member with the first movable member, the second movable member is changed to the first movable member as the first movable member moves. Since it can be moved relative to the relative, the configuration of the movable means can be simplified more effectively.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a support member (spacer 90) to which a gaming board (40) having a gaming area on which the gaming medium rolls is attached, and a support member (spacer 90) attached to the rear of the gaming board to display a predetermined effect. (Liquid crystal display device 50) and guide members (guide rails 668, 669) provided on the support member so as to be located in front of the display device, and the movable means is the base. It is preferable to have a guided portion (guide member 679) guided by the guide member when moving between the standby position and the drive position with the end portion as a fulcrum.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the movable means that can move with the base end as a fulcrum can move between the standby position and the drive position while the guided portion is guided by the guide member. The orbit can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately perform the effect by the movable means.

Further, for example, when the movable means moves between the standby position and the drive position, it can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the movable means can be prevented from coming into contact with the game board or the display device. Thus, the movable means, the gaming board and the display device can be protected. In addition to this, by preventing the movable means from swinging in the front-rear direction, the space between the movable means and the game board and the space between the movable means and the display device can be reduced. Therefore, the dimensions of the gaming machine in the front-rear direction can be shortened, and the space of the gaming machine can be saved.

<Summary 4>
In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226196, in addition to the configuration for rotating the arm base, a configuration for moving the first arm and the second arm is required, which is an accessory. The configuration becomes complicated. Therefore, the configuration for moving the first arm and the second arm may hinder the rotation of the arm base and may lead to a failure.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an accessory (upper movable effect member 650) that can move between a standby position and a drive position, and the accessory is a first slide. A member (upper movable base 655), a moving body (upper slide base 657) that can move between the first moving position and the second moving position with respect to the base main body, and a first base body. A movable member (movable arm 662, 663) that can move between the movable position and the second movable position, and the movable member provided on the base body and operated from the first operating position to the second operating position to move the movable member. An actuating member that moves the movable member from the second movable position to the first movable position by moving from the first movable position to the second movable position and moving from the second actuating position to the first actuating position. The gears 664, 665) and the moving body are provided on the moving body, and when the moving body moves from the first moving position to the second moving position with respect to the base body, the moving body engages with the operating member to operate the moving body. A first engaging portion (movable slider 658) for moving a member from the first operating position to the second operating position, and a second moving position provided on the moving body with the moving body relative to the base body. A second that engages with the actuating member from the direction opposite to the first engaging portion and moves the actuating member from the second actuating position to the first actuating position when moving to the first moving position. It is provided with an engaging portion (base rib 666).

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the base body moves to the first moving position and the second moving position with respect to the moving body, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are actuating members. Since the movable member is moved between the first movable position and the second movable position by engaging with, the movable member can be smoothly operated by a simple configuration. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect while ensuring that the accessory operates smoothly.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the operating member is composed of gears (664, 665), the movable member has gear portions (662A, 663A) that mesh with the gear, and the gear is , The gear is provided between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion with respect to the moving direction of the moving body, and the gear is attached to the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. It is preferable to have an engageable rib (664A).

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the movable member is set to the first movable position via the gear portion by engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion with the ribs to rotate the gear. It can be moved to and from the second movable position. As a result, the accessory can be made into a simple structure more effectively.

Further, when the movable member is positioned at the first movable position and the second movable position, the rotation of the gear can be restricted by engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion with the rib. As a result, the posture of the movable member can be stabilized at the first movable position and the second movable position, and the behavior of the movable member can be prevented from becoming unstable.

<Summary 5>
The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226196 does not have a configuration for restricting the movement of the arm base when the arm base is stopped at the drive position. May swing and the accessory may not operate smoothly. In particular, when the accessory becomes large, the swing of the arm base becomes even larger, so that the above-mentioned problems are more concerned.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a fixed body (lower fixed base 611, rotating body 621) and a movable body (lower movable base 615) that can move between a standby position and a drive position with respect to the fixed body. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an accessory (lower movable effect member 610) composed of the above, and a driving means (motor 612) for moving the movable body between the standby position and the driving position. The movable body has a first contact portion (protrusion portion 617B) that abuts on the fixed body at least at the drive position, and the fixed body has the first contact portion when the movable body is in the drive position. The drive means has at least the movable body from the drive position when the movable body is stopped at the drive position. It has a configuration in which a driving force for urging the movable body is applied so as not to move toward the standby position.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, at least the movable body stands by from the drive position when the accessory is stopped at the drive position with the first contact portion in contact with the second contact portion. Since the driving means for urging the movable body so as not to move toward the position is provided, it is possible to prevent the movable body from swinging in the moving direction at the driving position, and the movable body is stably stationary at the driving position. Can be made to. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the character while ensuring that the character operates smoothly.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is an arm member (movable) that is connected to the movable body and moves the movable body to the standby position and the drive position by transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the movable body. It is preferable to have an arm 618).

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable body is positioned at the drive position, the arm member bends when an excessive load is applied to the movable body from the motor via the arm member. The load applied to the second contact portion from the contact portion can be absorbed. This makes it possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the movable body and the motor.

Further, when the movable body is positioned at the drive position, when the play of the drive gear or the like provided between the movable body and the fixed body occurs, the arm member bends by the amount of the backlash to cause the backlash. It can be eliminated.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the first contact portion is composed of a protrusion provided on the movable body, and the second contact portion is described when the movable body is in the drive position. It is composed of a first rib (rib 626) with which the first contact portion abuts and a second rib (rib 626) with which the first abutment portion abuts when the movable body is in the standby position. When the movable body moves to the drive position, the protrusion abuts on the first rib, and when the movable body moves to the standby position, the protrusion abuts on the second rib. preferable.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the protrusion abuts on the first rib when the movable body moves to the drive position, and the protrusion hits the second rib when the movable body moves to the standby position. Since they are in contact with each other, the movable body can be stably stopped at both the drive position and the standby position.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, at least one of the first contact portion and the second contact portion is provided with an elastic member that abuts on the other of the first contact portion and the second contact portion. It is preferable to have it.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, even when an excessive load is applied to the movable body from the drive means when the movable body is positioned at the drive position, the elastic member bends and the first contact portion is formed. Can absorb the load applied to the second contact portion. This makes it possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the movable body and the driving means.

<Summary 6>
The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226196 does not have a configuration for restricting the movement of the arm base when the arm base is stopped at the drive position. May swing and the accessory may not operate smoothly. In particular, when the accessory becomes large, the swing of the arm base becomes even larger, so that the above-mentioned problems are more concerned.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a fixed body (lower fixed base 611) and a movable body (lower movable base 615, rotating body 621) that can move with respect to the fixed body, and the movable body stands by. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an accessory (lower movable effect member 610) that can move between a position and a driving position, and a first locking portion (locking piece 611F) provided on the fixed body. And a second locking portion (locking piece 615B) provided on the movable body, and the first locking portion and the second locking portion are locked to each other at the standby position to serve as the above-mentioned combination. The guide member includes a locking means (locking piece 611F, locking piece 615B) for restricting the swing of an object, and a guide member (base cover 623) for guiding wiring connected to the accessory. The movable body is provided in front of the movable body in a state where the movable body is located in the standby position, and has a configuration for restricting the movement of the movable body forward.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a locking means for restricting the swing of the movable body by locking the first locking portion and the second locking portion to each other at the standby position. It is possible to prevent the movable body from swinging with respect to the fixed body at the position, and it is possible to stably hold the movable body.

Further, since the guide member for restricting the movement of the movable body to the front is provided in front of the movable body in the state where the movable body is in the standby position, excessive vibration is applied to the accessory during transportation of the gaming machine or the like. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the movable body from moving forward with respect to the fixing member.

As a result, the locking between the first locking portion and the second locking portion is not released when the movable body is in the standby position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the accessory from occurring due to the release of the locking between the first locking portion and the second locking portion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect while guaranteeing the smooth operation of the accessory.

In addition to this, since the guide member is composed of a guide member that guides the wiring connected to the accessory, it is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated member that regulates the movement of the movable body forward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of parts from increasing and prevent the manufacturing cost of the accessory from increasing.

<Summary 7>
In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226196, the arm base, the first arm, and the second arm can be stably moved when the arm base is rotated or the first arm and the second arm are moved. It does not have a configuration to move. As a result, the accessory may not operate smoothly. In particular, when the accessory becomes large, the swing of the arm base becomes even larger, so that the above-mentioned problems are more concerned.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming board (40) having at least a part of translucency or light guiding property, and a displacement means (right side) provided behind the gaming board and movable between a standby position and a driving position. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a movable effect member 750 and a left movable effect member 770), wherein the displacement means has contact portions (guide protrusions 761, 781) that abut on the back surface of the game board. ), The contact portion abuts on the back surface of the game board in a region where it is difficult to see the rear of the game board when the displacement means moves to the standby position and the drive position. It has a configuration provided in the displacement means.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the displacement means moves to the standby position and the drive position, the abutting portion abuts on the back surface of the game board. It can be used as a guide, and the displacement means can be operated stably. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the displacement means while ensuring that the displacement means operates smoothly.

Further, by bringing the contact portion into contact with the back surface of the game board, it is possible to prevent the decoration or the like formed on the front surface of the displacement means from coming into contact with the game board. Therefore, the front surface of the displacement means can be protected from the game board.

Further, since the contact portion of the displacement means is brought into contact with the back surface of the game board in a region where the rear of the game board is difficult to see, the contact portion of the displacement means is not easily visible to the player. .. Therefore, the decorativeness of the game board can be maintained.

<Summary 8>
In the gaming machine of JP-A-2016-39923, since an inclined surface having a simple shape is formed on the wall portion of the distribution drum, the gaming ball depends on the speed of the gaming ball accepted by the receiving portion and the like. May run up the slope and the game ball may roll in an unintended direction. As a result, the distribution drum may bite the ball and a rotation failure may occur, which may make it difficult to distribute the game ball.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a rotating member (distribution drum 801) in which a plurality of receiving portions (groove portions 802A to 802D) for receiving a gaming ball flowing down the gaming region (41) are formed, and the receiving portion has a rotating member (distribution drum 801). It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a distribution device (800) for distributing the accepted gaming balls, and the receiving portion extends outward in the radial direction of the rotating member, and the gaming balls are placed. It has a mounting surface portion (802a) and wall surface portions (803B, 804B) for determining the distribution direction of the game balls mounted on the previously described mounting surface portion, and the wall surface portion has the previously described mounting surface portion. A connected first inclined surface (803e, 804e) and a second inclined surface (803f, 804f) connected to the first inclined surface are formed, and the first inclined surface with respect to the above-mentioned mounting surface portion is formed. It has a configuration in which the inclination angle (θ1) is larger than the inclination angle (θ2) of the second inclined surface with respect to the above-mentioned mounting surface portion.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the inclination angle of the first inclined surface with respect to the mounting surface portion is formed to be larger than the inclination angle of the second inclined surface with respect to the mounting surface portion. The inclination angle of the second inclined surface can be made steeper. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from rolling in an unintended direction, for example, when the flow speed of the game ball is high, the game ball received by the receiving portion runs up along the wall surface portion.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating member from biting the ball and causing a rotation failure, and it is possible to reliably distribute the game ball, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second inclined surface is extended from the first inclined surface to above the center point (807a) of the gaming ball (807) placed on the above-mentioned mounting surface portion. It is preferable to have.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can set the center of gravity of the gaming ball mounted on the mounting surface portion below the upper end of the second inclined surface portion, and the gaming ball mounted on the mounting surface portion. Can be more effectively prevented from running up along the wall surface. Further, when the rotating member rotates due to the weight of the game ball, the game ball can be reliably discharged in the direction along the first inclined surface of the receiving portion facing downward.

<Summary 9>
In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-171438, the gaming ball passing over the attacker can be decelerated, but the gaming ball entering the attacker cannot be decelerated.

Therefore, it is only possible to increase the number of game balls passing over the attacker, and it is not possible to allow more game balls to enter the attacker. Therefore, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is not possible to increase the number of gaming balls to be won in the large winning opening and give a lot of profits to the player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided in the gaming area (41) and is a variable winning means (shutter member) capable of shifting to an open state in which the winning area (large winning opening 418) is opened and a closed state in which the winning area is closed. 422a), a detection means (count sensor 113) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the winning area, and the variable winning means provided outside the winning area and at least when the variable winning means is closed. Among the first deceleration means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the means (rib 424a) and the game ball guided from the outside of the winning area to the inside of the winning area, the detecting means. A second deceleration means (rib 424b) capable of decelerating the rolling speed of the gaming ball not detected in the above is provided, and the variable winning means is provided between the first deceleration means and the second deceleration means. When the variable winning means is in the open state or the closed state, the second decelerating means can decelerate the gaming ball rolling inside the winning area.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can decelerate a gaming ball rolling on the variable winning means by the first decelerating means when the variable winning means is in the closed state, and the variable winning means is opened. Since the second decelerating means can decelerate the gaming ball that rolls inside the winning area when in the state or the closed state, more gaming balls are used in the winning area before the detecting means detects the gaming ball. Can be won. Therefore, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and a sufficient profit can be given to the player.

<Summary 10>
In a conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106670, the effect that can be executed differs depending on the pattern of variation such as the variation time of the symbol. Therefore, when the effect is determined or when the effect is executed. If you do not adjust the production smoothly, you may not be able to execute the production smoothly.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol changing means (main CPU 101) that changes a symbol when a start condition is satisfied, and an effect executing means (sub CPU 201) that executes an effect according to an effect pattern. The execution means is a first effect (for example, an effect in which a treasure box holding symbol is displayed) and a second effect (for example, an effect that can be transferred from the first effect) when a predetermined effect transition condition (for example, the touch point is MAX) is satisfied. , Treasure box hold symbol transition effect) and the effect executed when the effect transition condition is not satisfied, and is executed according to the pattern variation pattern of the symbol in the symbol change means and the effect pattern of the effect. It is determined whether or not the effect is to be performed, and when the effect is executed a plurality of times, the third effect (for example, 1P effect) in which the effect transition condition is satisfied and the effect transition condition are not satisfied are executed. It is possible to execute the fourth effect (for example, touch point MAX effect) in which the execution possibility of the effect is determined by lottery, and the effect transition condition is satisfied once the effect is executed. It is possible, and the fourth effect has a configuration to be executed at the next change of the change in which the lottery for whether or not the fourth effect can be executed is executed.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the second effect on the condition that the fourth effect is executed as an effect transition condition, and when it is determined to execute the fourth effect, the next symbol by the symbol changing means is used. By executing the fourth effect with the start of the fluctuation of, the state in which the second effect can be executed after the fourth effect is executed is secured. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention can smoothly execute the effect without adjusting the effect.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect executing means determines to execute the first effect while the effect transition condition is satisfied, the effect executing means executes the second effect and the first effect. When the effect transition condition is satisfied while the effect is being executed, the first effect being executed may be shifted to the second effect.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the second effect and executes the first effect when it is determined to execute the first effect while the effect transition condition is satisfied. When the effect transition condition is satisfied, the first effect being executed is transferred to the second effect, so that the second effect can be smoothly transferred from the first effect.

<Summary 11>
In a conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106670, the effect that can be executed differs depending on the pattern of variation such as the variation time of the symbol. Therefore, when the effect is determined or when the effect is executed. If you do not adjust the production smoothly, you may not be able to execute the production smoothly.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol changing means (main CPU 101) that changes a symbol when a start condition is satisfied, and an effect executing means (sub CPU 201) that executes an effect according to an effect pattern. The execution means is a first effect (for example, an effect in which a treasure box holding symbol is displayed) and a second effect (for example, an effect that can be transferred from the first effect) when a predetermined effect transition condition (for example, the touch point is MAX) is satisfied. , Treasure box hold symbol transition effect) and a third effect (for example, an effect that is executed when the predetermined effect transition condition is not satisfied, and the effect transition condition is satisfied when the execution is performed. Touchpoint MAX effect), and when it is determined to execute the third effect for a predetermined variation, the pattern variation pattern of the symbol variation means and the effect pattern of the effect. Therefore, when it is determined that the third effect cannot be executed by the predetermined variation, it is possible to determine that the third effect is executed at the time of the next variation of the predetermined variation.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is displayed on the symbol display means when the second effect is executed on the condition that the third effect is executed and the third effect is determined to be executed. If it is determined that the third effect cannot be executed due to the variation pattern of the symbol and the pattern of the effect, the third effect is executed with the start of the next variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. This ensures a state in which the second effect is executed after the third effect is executed. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention can smoothly execute the effect without adjusting the effect.

<Summary 12>
In a conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106670, the operation of the operation means is not reflected in the effect unless the operation of the operation means such as a button is performed within the valid period corresponding to the effect. , There is a risk that the interest in the production will be reduced for the player who has operated the operating means earlier than the valid period.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an effect executing means (sub CPU 201) for executing an effect, an operation detecting means (touch sensor 425) capable of detecting a predetermined operation, and a first effect capable of satisfying a predetermined performance execution condition. (For example, a touch point MAX effect), a second effect (for example, a treasure box hold symbol transition effect) executed when the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied by executing the first effect, and the second effect are executed. A third effect (eg, for example) that is executed when the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detection means within a predetermined valid period (for example, a period when the touch sensor activation flag is 1) that is started after the operation detection means. , Item transition effect), and the effect executing means has the predetermined valid period in a state where the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detecting means when the effect execution means is not within the predetermined valid period. With this as an opportunity, the third effect can be executed.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a valid period of the third effect, which is executed when a predetermined operation is detected within the valid period, in a state where the predetermined operation is detected. Since this is also executed as an opportunity, the third effect is executed even if the predetermined operation is performed earlier than the valid period. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention can prevent the player's interest in the effect from being lowered by reliably executing the third effect.

In particular, the gaming machine according to the present invention prevents the third effect from being executed due to the detection of the touch sensor not intended by the player when the operation detecting means capable of detecting a predetermined operation is configured by the touch sensor. can do.

The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a symbol changing means (main CPU 101) that changes the symbol when the starting condition is satisfied, and the second effect is a predetermined effect transition condition (for example, the touch point is MAX). When is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the fourth effect (for example, an effect in which the treasure box holding symbol is displayed), and the first effect is an effect executed when the effect transition condition is not satisfied. It is determined whether or not the effect is executed according to the symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation means and the effect pattern of the effect, and when the effect is executed a plurality of times, the effect transition condition is satisfied. For example, 1P effect) and an effect to be executed when the effect transition condition is not satisfied, and whether or not the effect can be executed is determined by lottery, and when the effect is executed once, the effect transition condition is executed. The sixth effect may be executed at the time of the next change of the change in which the lottery for whether or not the sixth effect can be executed is executed, including the sixth effect (for example, the touch point MAX effect) in which is satisfied. ..

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the second effect on the condition that the sixth effect is executed as the effect transition condition, and when it is determined to execute the sixth effect, the next symbol by the symbol changing means is used. By executing the sixth effect with the start of the fluctuation of, the state in which the second effect can be executed after the sixth effect is executed is secured. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention can smoothly execute the effect without adjusting the effect.

<Summary 13>
A conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106670 can improve the player's interest in playing a game by devising the conditions under which the effect can be performed.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol changing means (main CPU 101) that changes a symbol when a start condition is satisfied, an effect executing means (sub CPU 201) that executes an effect, and an operation detection unit that can detect a predetermined operation. (Touch sensor 425), a first effect (for example, a touch point MAX effect) that can satisfy a predetermined effect execution condition, and a second effect executed when the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied by the first effect execution. (For example, the treasure box holding symbol transition effect) and the predetermined valid period (for example, the period when the touch sensor activation flag is 1) started after the second effect is executed by the operation detection means. A third effect (for example, an effect in which the item before touch becomes an item after touch), which is executed when the operation of the above is detected, is provided, and the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied. A fourth effect (for example, an effect suggesting that the gaming state may be latent probability change), which is executed when the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detection means when the start condition is not satisfied. ) And has a configuration capable of executing.

With this configuration, even if the starting condition is not satisfied, the gaming machine according to the present invention can perform the fourth effect by performing a predetermined operation as long as the execution condition of the second effect is satisfied. Since it is executed, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the production.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a game between a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value as compared with the normal gaming state, according to a predetermined transition condition. The game state transition means (main CPU 101) for shifting the state is further provided, and the fourth effect may be a gaming state in which the probability that the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state is relatively high in the normal gaming state. It may suggest sex.

With this configuration, even if the gaming machine according to the present invention is in a non-gaming state, the gaming state is special by performing a predetermined operation as long as the execution condition of the first effect is satisfied. Since the fourth effect suggesting the possibility of the game state having a relatively high probability of shifting to the game state is executed, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention refers to the effect data referred to when the first effect is executed and the effect data referred to when the first effect is not executed for one variation pattern by the symbol variation means. The effect data may be further provided with the effect data storage means for storing the effect data.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention, once the variation pattern of 1 by the symbol variation means is determined, executes the effect based on the effect data stored in the effect data storage means corresponding to the symbol variation pattern. Therefore, the production can be executed smoothly.

<Summary 14>
In a conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106670, the player often knows the execution timing of the effect accompanied by the operation, and the unexpectedness of the effect disappears, so that the operation is performed. There is a risk that the player's interest in the accompanying production will be reduced.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an effect executing means (sub CPU 201) for executing an effect, an operation detecting means (touch sensor 425) capable of detecting a predetermined operation, and a first effect executing condition (for example, touch). The predetermined operation is detected by the operation detecting means in a state where the first effect (for example, 1P effect or touch point MAX effect) in which the point 5) can be established and the first effect execution condition are satisfied. At least the first effect is executed in a state where the second effect (for example, the effect executed when the touch point is 5) and the first effect execution condition are satisfied. In this case, the second effect execution condition (for example, the state where the touch point exceeds 5) can be satisfied, and the operation detection means can satisfy the predetermined effect while the second effect execution condition is satisfied. It has a configuration including a third effect (for example, an effect executed when the touch point exceeds 5), which is executed when the operation is detected.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs a predetermined operation each time the execution condition of the second effect is satisfied in order to execute the second effect, or the second effect is executed in order to execute the third effect. By allowing the player to select whether to perform a predetermined operation after the execution condition of the effect is satisfied and waiting for the first effect to be executed, the player can select the effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the production involving the operation.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a game between a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can be given a predetermined gaming value as compared with the normal gaming state, according to a predetermined transition condition. A gaming state transitioning means (main CPU 101) for shifting the state is further provided, and the second effect and the third effect have a relatively high probability of shifting to the special gaming state in the normal gaming state (a gaming state (). For example, the effect executing means may execute the notification effect of the second effect and the third effect in different modes from each other, including the notification effect suggesting the possibility of latent probability change).

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can allow the player to select the content of the notification effect suggesting the possibility of the gaming state having a relatively high probability of shifting to the special gaming state. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the accompanying production.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the first effect on the symbol variation means (main CPU 101) that changes the symbol when the start condition is satisfied and the symbol variation pattern by the symbol variation means. The staging data storage means (program ROM 202) for storing the staging data sometimes referred to and the staging data referred to when the first staging is not executed may be further provided.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an effect based on the effect data stored in the effect data storage means corresponding to the pattern variation pattern once the symbol variation pattern by the symbol variation means is determined. Therefore, the production can be smoothly executed.

<Summary 15>
Conventional gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106670 play a considerable amount of games in order to perform a specific effect when high conditions are set to perform the specific effect. Since it is necessary to perform the specific effect and the specific effect is not executed, there is a risk that the player who expects the specific effect to be performed may be less interested in the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an effect executing means (sub CPU201) for executing an effect, an operation detecting means (touch sensor 425) capable of detecting a predetermined operation, and a time measuring means (RTC204) capable of measuring time. With the first effect (for example, touch point MAX effect) capable of satisfying a predetermined effect execution condition (for example, the touch point is MAX) and the predetermined effect execution condition being satisfied, the operation detection means may be used. It is assumed that the second effect (for example, the item transition effect) executed when the predetermined operation is detected and the time measured by the timing means are the predetermined time (for example, the execution period of the RTC effect). If it is determined, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the effect execution period during which the second effect can be executed when the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detection means. And have a configuration with.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs a specific effect that is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied, for a predetermined period, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the specific effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced, which is expected to be executed.

<Summary 16>
A conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106670 forces a game only by performing an effect of urging a predetermined operation or urging a gaming medium to pass through a predetermined area. There is a risk that the player will be given the impression that the game is being played, and the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is predetermined to a game area in which the game medium can be moved, a symbol changing means (main CPU 101) that changes the symbol when the game medium passes through the starting area and the starting condition is satisfied, and a player. Based on the game state transition means (main CPU 101) that can shift the game state to the special game state that can give the game value of the above, and when the game ball passes through the start area at least while the symbol is changing. A discharge medium detection that detects a game medium that passes through a hold storage means (main RAM 103) that can hold and store start conditions and a discharge area (second special out port 420c) for discharging the game medium from the game area. Means (second out-ball detection sensor 117b), profit-giving means (main CPU 101) capable of giving profit to the player when the passage of the game medium is detected, and effect executing means (sub CPU201) for executing the effect. ), And the profit-giving means does not give a profit to the player when the passage of the game medium is detected by the discharge medium detecting means, and the effect executing means is the special game. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect when the game medium is detected by the discharge medium detecting means during the state, and the predetermined effect may include a hold for shifting to the special gaming state in the hold. A gaming machine comprising a special game transition suggestion effect suggesting the above, wherein the effect executing means can execute the special game transition suggestion effect when a game medium is detected by the discharge medium detecting means.

With this configuration, it is suggested that the gaming machine according to the present invention may have a hold that shifts to the special gaming state when the gaming medium that passes through the predetermined ejection port is detected in the special gaming state. Perform a special game transition suggestion effect.

Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention does not give the impression that the player is forced to play the game because the progress of the game by the player in the special gaming state also serves as the progress of the production. Can be prevented from decreasing.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game transition suggestion effect is a first special game transition suggestion effect (for example, suggesting that there may be a hold for shifting to the special game state in the hold. The effect of moving the shutter built in the effect button 16) and the second special game transition suggestion effect (for example, the effect button) suggesting that the hold has a hold for transitioning to the special game state. The shutter built in 16 is fully opened, and the LED group 18 provided on the back side of the shutter emits a rainbow-colored effect), and the effect executing means is the first special game transition suggestion effect. The second special game transition suggestion effect may be executed in different modes from each other.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention suggests the certainty that there is a hold that shifts to the special gaming state in the hold in the mode of staging, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Summary 17>
A conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31485 responds to a fixed variation or a variation during execution when the effect is executed over a plurality of variations such as a look-ahead effect. Considering that the effect is determined, it is necessary to select an effective effect according to each variation of the fixed variation or the variation during execution. That is, the conventional gaming machine may not be able to improve the player's interest in the staging unless an effective combination of staging is taken into consideration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming area in which the game medium can move, a symbol changing means (main CPU 101) that changes the symbol when the game medium passes through the starting region and the starting condition is satisfied, and at least the symbol variation. When the game ball passes through the starting area, the holding storage means (main RAM 103) that can hold and store the starting condition based on the passing, and the variation based on the holding based on the passing, are included a plurality of times. A continuous effect determining means (main CPU 101) that can determine whether or not to continuously execute a continuous effect that is related to each other over fluctuations, and whether or not the continuous effect is being executed, and an effect. The effect execution means (sub CPU 201) for executing the continuous effect is provided, and as the effect execution content of the continuous effect, a continuous effect for continuing the continuous effect (for example, a look-ahead continuous effect) and a discontinuous effect for not continuing the continuous effect are performed. Including, the effect executing means is determined by the execution content of the continuous effect of each variation determined by the continuous effect determining means at the first timing and the second timing which is the timing after the first timing. The execution contents of the continuous effect of the variation are compared, and if the execution of the continuous effect is determined for the same hold, the continuous effect determined at the first timing is executed and the same. When the continuous effect is determined for only one of the hold, the configuration is such that the determined continuous effect is executed.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been determined because the determined effect is set for the corresponding hold if the effect is not determined for the same hold when the effect is determined. It is possible to perform an effective production that makes use of the production and the determined production, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the production.

<Summary 18>
A conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106752 can provide a variety of information to a player by staging, but if there are too many types of staging performed in the same period, which one It becomes difficult for the player to grasp what the production represents, and conversely, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

The game machine according to the present invention includes a game area in which the game medium can be moved, a game state transition means (main CPU 101) capable of shifting the game state to a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player, and a game state transition means (main CPU 101). The game area includes a first area (large winning opening 418) through which a game medium can pass in the special game state, and a first area different from the first area. The effect executing means includes two areas (general winning opening 419d), and the first effect (effect of winning another hole) executed when the game medium passes through the second area in the special gaming state. It is executed when the number of game media passing through the first area exceeds a predetermined number at least in one period (each round game) in which the first area can be passed in the special gaming state. It is possible to execute a second effect (overflow effect) and a third effect (acquired number display effect) according to the number of game values given to the player in the special game state, and the second effect can be performed. It has a configuration in which the third effect is executed with a higher priority than the first effect, and the third effect is executed with a lower priority than the first effect.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can easily give the player the content represented by the effect by executing the effect of a plurality of types executed in the special gaming state with priority. Since the game is made to be understood, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the special gaming state satisfies a special condition (for example, when the number of consecutive big hits is 5 times or more), the effect executing means has the first effect and the effect. When the number of game values given to the player in the special game state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, when the number of acquisitions exceeds 2600) without executing the second effect, the first 3 The effect may be executed.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention does not execute a specific effect or does not execute halfway through the special gaming state according to the state of the special gaming state, so that the effect pattern in the special gaming state is achieved. In order to diversify the game, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from diminishing.

1 Pachinko game machine (game machine)
40 Game board 41 Game area 50 Liquid crystal display device (display device)
90 spacer (support member)
101 Main CPU (design change means, game state transition means, profit giving means)
103 Main RAM (holding storage means)
113 Count sensor (detection means)
117b Second out ball detection sensor (emission medium detection means)
201 Sub CPU (effect execution means, effect determination means)
202 Program ROM (Production data storage means)
204 RTC (Timekeeping Means)
414b 2nd start opening (winning opening)
418 Large prize opening (winning area, first area)
419d General winning opening (winning opening, second area)
420c 2nd special outlet (exhaust area)
422a Shutter member (variable winning means)
424a rib (first deceleration means)
424b rib (second deceleration means)
425 Touch sensor (operation detection means)
431 Special symbol display device (symbol display means)
601, 602, 603 Ball passage 604 Confluence part 605 Partition plate (partition part)
610 Lower movable staging member (role)
611 Lower fixed base (fixed body)
611F locking piece (first locking portion, locking means)
612 motor (driving means)
615 Lower movable base (movable body)
615B locking piece (second locking portion, locking means)
617B protrusion (first contact part)
618 Movable arm (arm member)
621 Rotating body (movable body)
623 Base cover (guide member)
626 ribs (second contact part, first rib, second rib)
650 Upper movable staging member (role)
651B Swing shaft (base end)
655 Upper movable effect member (base body, first moving member)
657 Upper slide base 657 (1st movable member, moving body, movable means, 2nd moving member)
658 Movable slider (first engaging part)
662, 663 Movable arm (movable member)
662A, 663A Gear part 664, 665 Gear (actuating member)
664A rib 666 base rib (second engaging part)
668, 669 Guide rail (guide member)
670 Guide piece (guided member)
672 Fixed crossguard member (first movable member, movable means)
673 Movable crossguard member (second movable member, movable means)
674 Coil spring (biasing member)
675 Support wall member (fixing member)
750 Right side movable staging member (displacement means)
761, 781 Guide protrusion (contact part)
770 Left side movable staging member (displacement means)
800 Sorting device 801 Sorting drum (rotating member)
802A-802D Groove (receiver)
802a Mounting surface portion 803B, 804B Wall surface portion 803e, 804e First inclined surface 803f, 804f Second inclined surface 807 Game ball 807a Center point of game ball θ1 Inclined angle of first inclined surface θ2 Inclined angle of second inclined surface

Claims (1)

A symbol change means that changes the symbol when the start condition is satisfied,
A lottery means to draw lots related to the progress of the game,
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
An operation detection means that can detect a predetermined operation ,
A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state advantageous to the player when the variation of the symbol satisfies the special result based on the lottery result of the lottery means.
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
The first effect, which is an effect executed according to the lottery result of the lottery means and can satisfy the first effect execution condition, and
The effect is executed when the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detection means while the first effect execution condition is satisfied by the execution result of the first effect. The second effect, which changes the effect mode displayed before the first effect is executed,
When the operation detecting means detects the predetermined operation in a state where the second effect execution condition different from the first effect execution condition is satisfied by the execution result of the first effect. The third effect, which is different from the second effect to be executed,
A fourth effect different from any of the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed.
The symbol variation means has a first variation pattern capable of executing the variation of the symbol in the first time and a second variation pattern capable of executing the variation of the symbol in a second time longer than the first time. It is possible to execute the variation of the symbol in any variation pattern including at least the variation pattern.
The first effect execution condition can be satisfied when the fourth effect is not executed by the effect executing means, and the symbol variation means causes the symbol variation to be the second variation pattern. It can be established when it is executed,
The second effect execution condition can be satisfied in a state where the first effect execution condition is satisfied .
The second effect can be executed in any of the effect modes including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which the rate of transition to the special gaming state is relatively higher than that of the first effect mode. It is a directing
When the fourth effect is executed, the ratio of the second effect being executed in the second effect mode may differ between before and after the fourth effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images